Chap 1

Modulo Arithmetic Page 1

CHAPTER 1

Modulo Arithmetic

1.1 Modulo Arithmetic n , then the remainder may be 0, 1, 2, 3, ..., (n - 1).

Modular arithmetic is a special type of arithmetic that Thus, m mod n may be either of 0, 1, 2, 3, ...,
involves only integers. It is a system of arithmetic for (n - 1).
integers in which the numbers ‘wrap around’ after
reaching a certain value. This value around which the EXAMPLE 1.1
numbers wrap around is called the modulus and written Evaluate the following:
as mod. The modulo arithmetic forms the basis of many (i) 8 mod 5 (ii) 4 mod 6
programming languages of computer.


Sol :
A familiar use of modulo arithmetic is in the 12
hour clock, in which a day is divided into two 12 hours
periods. The dial of the clock is divided into 12 equal parts Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae101
marked as 1, 2, 3, ..., 12. If the present time is say 9:00,
then 9 hours, by simple addition the clock should show EXAMPLE 1.2
18:00. However, the clock shows 6:00 as it wraps around Evaluate the following:
every 12 hours, and so the hour number starts over again (i) 26 mod 7 (ii) 22 mod 5
after it reaches 12, thereby showing 6:00 after 9 hours. It


Sol :
can be easily understood as, when 18 is divided by 12, the
remainder is 4.
Thus we can say that modulo arithmetic is the Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae102
arithmetic of remainder.
We know that when we divide an integer a by EXAMPLE 1.3
another integer b , then we have Evaluate the following:
a = bq + r (i) 126 mod 7 (ii) 252 mod 5
where q and r are integers and 0 # r 1 b


Sol :
Here a is the dividend, b is the divisor, q is the
quotient and r is the remainder.
In modulo arithmetic, we consider the remainder r Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae103
as our output or answer when a is divided by b
i.e., a mod b = r EXAMPLE 1.4
Evaluate the following:


Illustration
(i) 426 mod 27 (ii) 512 mod 25
When 13 is divided by 4, the remainder is 1


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae104

Thus, we write 13 mod 4 = 1. EXAMPLE 1.5

Remark: Evaluate the following:
When an integer m is divided by another positive integer (i) - 14 mod 4 (ii) - 85 mod 9
Page 2 Modulo Arithmetic Chap 1

Sol : EXAMPLE 1.11

It is 9:00 am currently in the digital watch. What time
will watch show (in am or pm) after 600 hours.
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae105


Sol :
EXAMPLE 1.6
What time will it be after 200 hours, if the present time Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae111
is 5:00 am?
1.1.1 Properties of Modulo Operator


Sol :
Property 1:
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae106 If the value of a is increased by a multiple of m (say, km
, where k is any integer) then
EXAMPLE 1.7 a mod m = (a + km) mod m

What is the time 100 hours after 7 a.m. Find using modulo Property 2:
arithmetic ? If a , b and m are positive integers then, addition


Sol : property of modulo arithmetic is
(a + b) mod m = (a mod m + b mod m) mod m
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae107 Property 3
If a , b and m are positive integers then, subtraction
EXAMPLE 1.8 property of modulo arithmetic is
What is the time 150 hours before 11 p.m. Find using (a − b) mod m = (a mod m − b mod m) mod m
modulo arithmetic? Property 4:


Sol : If a , b and m are positive integers then, multiplication
property of modulo arithmetic is
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae108 (a # b) mod m = (a mod m # b mod m) mod m

EXAMPLE 1.9 EXAMPLE 1.12

Today is Tuesday. My uncle will come after 45 days. In Using modulo arithmetic find the remainder when
which day my uncle will be coming. Find using modulo (43 + 73) is divided by 7.
arithmetic ?

Sol :


Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae112
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae109
EXAMPLE 1.13
EXAMPLE 1.10 Using modulo arithmetic evaluate (358 + 461) (mod 8)
The duration of flight travel from Chennai to London

Sol :
through British Airlines is approximately 11 hours. The
airplane begins its journey on Sunday at 23:30 hours. If
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae113
the time at Chennai is four and half hours ahead to that
of London’s time, then find the time at London, when will
the flight lands at London Airport. Find using modulo EXAMPLE 1.14
arithmetic Using modulo arithmetic find the remainder when
(73 - 43) is divided by 7.


Sol :


Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae110
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae114
Chap 1 Modulo Arithmetic Page 3

EXAMPLE 1.15 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae120

Using modulo arithmetic find the remainder when
(225 - 125) is divided by 11.
EXAMPLE 1.21


Sol : Using modulo arithmetic evaluate (14 # 8) mod 5


Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae115
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae121
EXAMPLE 1.16
Using modulo arithmetic find the remainder when
EXAMPLE 1.22
(38 + 89 + 67) is divided by 9.
Using modulo arithmetic evaluate (246 # 176) mod 9


Sol :


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae116

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae122

EXAMPLE 1.23
Find the last two digits of the product 4321 # 3215 .


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae123

EXAMPLE 1.24
Simplify (13 + 11) # 18 (mod 7).
EXAMPLE 1.17

Sol :
Using modulo arithmetic find the remainder when
(35 + 81 + 82 + 19) is divided by 4.
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae124


Sol :

EXAMPLE 1.25
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae117 Using modulo arithmetic find the remainder when
(523 # 124 # 329 # 832) is divided by 3.
EXAMPLE 1.18

Sol :
Find (8 # 16) (mod 7) ?


Sol : Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae125

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae118 EXAMPLE 1.26

Find the last three digits of the product 5142 # 7466 .
EXAMPLE 1.19

Sol :
Using modulo arithmetic evaluate (16 # 29) mod 7


Sol : Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae126

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae119 EXAMPLE 1.27

There are 81 boxes with 21 articles in each.
EXAMPLE 1.20 When we rearrange all of the articles so that
Using modulo arithmetic evaluate (25 # 51) mod 6 each box has 5 articles, how many articles will
be left out without a box.


Sol :
Page 4 Modulo Arithmetic Chap 1

Sol : EXAMPLE 1.31

(i) Apply subtraction modulo to positive integers 45
and 18 for modulo 9.
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae127
(ii) Apply subtraction modulo to positive integers 95
1.1.2 Modulo Arithmetic and 36 for modulo 11


Sol :
Addition Modulo m :
Given two positive integers a and b , the addition modulo
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae131
m denoted as + m (where m is any positive integer) is
defined for set of integers as:
a + m b = (a + b) mod m EXAMPLE 1.32
(i) Apply multiplication modulo to positive integers 3
Subtraction Modulo m
and 11 for modulo 8.
Given two positive integers a and b , the subtraction (ii) Apply subtraction modulo to positive integers 5 and
modulo m denoted as - m (where m is any positive 13 for modulo 13.
integer) is defined for set of integers as:
a − m b = (a − b) mod m

Sol :

Multiplication Modulo m
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae132
Given two positive integers a and b , the multiplication
modulo m denoted as K m (where m is any positive
integer) is defined for set of integers as: EXAMPLE 1.33
a K m b = (a # b) mod m Apply multiplication modulo to positive integers 81 and
21 for modulo 5.
EXAMPLE 1.28

Sol :
(i) Find the sum of 3 and 11 in modulo 24.
(ii) Find the sum of 17 and 15 in modulo 9. Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae133
(iii) Find the sum of 35 and 17 in modulo 30.


Sol : 1.1.3 Application of Modulo Arithmetic
There are many application of modulo, ranging from
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae128 everyday life to Math and Science. Some of which are as
follows :
1. A practical application of modulo arithmetic is to
EXAMPLE 1.29 calculate checksums within serial number identifiers.
Find the sum of 31 and 148 in modulo 24. For example, International Standard Book Number


Sol : (ISBN) uses modulo 11 (for 10 digit ISBN) or modulo
10 (for 13 digit ISBN) arithmetic for error detection.
Likewise, International Bank Account Numbers
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae129
(IBANs), for example, make use of modulo 97
arithmetic to spot user input errors in bank account
EXAMPLE 1.30 numbers.
(i) Apply subtraction modulo to positive integers 25 2. In computer science, modular arithmetic is often
and 7 for modulo 5. applied in bitwise operations and other operations
(ii) Apply subtraction modulo to positive integers 15 .The modulo operation, as implemented in many
and 6 for modulo 25 programming languages and calculators, is an


Sol : application of modular arithmetic.
3. In music, arithmetic modulo 12 is used in the
consideration of the system of twelve-tone equal
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae130
temperament.
4. On a calendar, arithmetic modulo 7 is used in
algorithms that determine the day of the week for a
Chap 1 Modulo Arithmetic Page 5

given date. (i) 45 + 13 18 (ii) 55 - 11 17

5. Modular arithmetic also has wide application Ans : (i) 11, (ii) 5
in disciplines such as law (e.g., apportionment),
economics(e.g., game theory) and other areas of the
social sciences.
5. Evaluate the following :
(i) 5 9 7 8 (ii) 13 9 11 7
Ans : (i) 5, (ii) 3

6. Find the last two digits of the product 4895 # 6789

Ans : 55

7. Find the last two digits of the product 123 # 234 # 345
Ans : 90

E X ERC I S E 1.1 8. Find the last three digits of the product 2345 # 4567 .
Ans : 615
1. Evaluate the following:
(i) 22 mod 4 (ii) 35 mod 7
(iii) –15 mod 2 (iv) 4 mod 9
Ans : (i) 2, (ii) 0, (iii) 1, (iv) 4
9. Find the remainder when 481 + 392 + 604 + 937 is
divided by 8.
Ans : 6

2. Evaluate the following:

(i) 43 (mod 6)
(ii) 97 (mod 5)
(iii) - 17 (mod 4) 10. Find the remainder when 512 # 398 # 114 # 756 is
Ans : (i) 1, (ii) 2, (iii) 3 divided by 5.
Ans : 4

3. Evaluate the following:

(i) (57 - 42) mod 11
(ii) (62 + 53) mod 7
(iii) (9 # 8) mod 5
1.2 Congruences
Ans : (i)4, (ii) 3, (iii) 2
If two integers a and b leave the same remainder when
divided by a fixed number n (n dN), then we can say that
a is congruent to b modulo n or a is congruent to b (mod 
n ). It is written as a / b (mod n).
4. Evaluate the following :
Page 6 Modulo Arithmetic Chap 1

For example, consider 45 / 17 (mod 7) If a , b , c , d are any integers and n is a positive integer,
Dividing 45 and 17 by 7, we have then
(i) (a + b) (mod n) / a (mod n) + b (mod n)


Illustration
Let a = 37 , b = 13 , c = 50 , n = 3 , then
(37 + 13) (mod 3) / 50 (mod 3) = 2
We observe that both 45 and 17 leave the same remainder
Also, 37 (mod 3) / 1 and 13 (mod 3) / 1
3, when divided by 7.
Thus, we can say that 45 / 17 (mod 7). 50 (mod 3) / 37 (mod 3) + 13 (mod 3)
Alternatively, we can understand or define (37 + 13) (mod 3) / 37 mod 3 + 13 mod 3
congruence modulo in another way as: (ii) If a / b (mod n), then (a + k) / (b + k) (mod n), for
a / b (mod n) if n divides (a - b) any integer k .
since the difference of a - b is an integral multiple of n . (iii) If a / b (mod n) and c / d (mod n), then (a + c)
We observe that in above example 45 / 17 (mod 7) / (b + d) (mod n).
as 7 divides 45 − 17 = 28 completely i.e., 28 is a multiple (iv) If a / b (mod n), c / d (mod n), then (a - c)
of 7. / (b - d) (mod n).

Definition: 1.3.2 Properties of Multiplication

If a and b are any two integers and n is a positive integer If a , b , c , d are any integers and n is a positive integer,
such that (a -n b) i.e., (a - b) is divisible by n , then a is said then
to be congruent to b modulo n and is expressed as (i) a $ b (mod n) / a (mod n) $ b (mod n)
a / b (mod n) (ii) If a / b (mod n) and c / d (mod n), then
or a - b / (mod n) ac / bd (mod n).
(iii) If a / b (mod n), then ka / kb (mod n) for any integer
or a - b = kn for some integer k .
k.
Here n is said to be modulo of the congruence.


Illustration 1.3.3 Exponential Property in Congruence
/ 7 (mod 5) as 4 divides (32 - 7)
32 For any integers a , b and a positive integer n , if
46 / 10 (mod 4) as 4 divides (46 - 10) a / b (mod n), then ak / bk (mod n), where k is a positive
If n does not divide (a - b), then a is called incongruent integer.
to b modulo n . For example, 46 _ 12 (mod 7) as 7 does
not divide (46 - 12). EXAMPLE 1.34
Find the least positive integer (mod 11) to which 283 is
congruent.
1.3 Properties of Congruences

Sol :
If a , b , c are any integers and n is a positive integer, then
(i) a / b (mod n) + a = b + kn for some integer k . Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae134
(ii) a / b (mod n) + a and b leave the same remainder
when divided by n . EXAMPLE 1.35
(iii) An integer is congruent to its remainder Find a such that a / 9 (mod 7).
i.e., a / r (mod n)


Sol :
(iv) Every integer is congruent to itself
i.e., a / a (mod n)
(v) If a / b (mod n), then b / a (mod n) Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae135
(vi) If a / b (mod n), then - a / - b (mod n)
(vii) If a / b (mod n) and b / c (mod n), then EXAMPLE 1.36
a / c (mod n) If x is an odd integer, prove that x2 / 1 (mod 8).
1.3.1 Properties of Addition

Sol :
Chap 1 Modulo Arithmetic Page 7

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae136 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae143

EXAMPLE 1.37 EXAMPLE 1.44

Find the last digit (unit digit) of 2212 . Show that 224 - 1 is divisible by 17.


Sol :

Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae137 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae144

EXAMPLE 1.38 EXAMPLE 1.45

Evaluate : Find the remainder when 3 40 is divided by 23.
(i) 610 mod 5 (ii) 316 (mod 4)

Sol :


Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae145
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae138
EXAMPLE 1.46
EXAMPLE 1.39 Find remainder when 224 is divided by 17.
Evaluate 315 mod 7 .

Sol :


Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae146
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae139
EXAMPLE 1.47
EXAMPLE 1.40 Find remainder when 1135 is divided by 13.
Find the least non-negative remainder when 730 is divided

Sol :
by 5.


Sol : Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae147

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae140 EXAMPLE 1.48

Find remainder when 2340 is divided by 341.
EXAMPLE 1.41

Sol :
Find the least non-negative remainder when 3100 is divided
by 7.
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae148


Sol :

EXAMPLE 1.49
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae141 Find the remainder when 250 is divided by 7.


Sol :
EXAMPLE 1.42
Show that 220 - 1 is divisible by 41.
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae149


Sol :

EXAMPLE 1.50
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae142 Find the remainder when 312 + 512 is divided by 13.


Sol :
EXAMPLE 1.43
Show that 5 48 - 1 is divisible by 24.
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae150


Sol :
Page 8 Modulo Arithmetic Chap 1

EXAMPLE 1.51 of
Find the remainder when 1653 is divided by 7 (i) 2 400 (ii) 3 400


Sol :

Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae151 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae158

EXAMPLE 1.52
Show that 3247 - 11 is divisible by 17.


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae152

EXAMPLE 1.53
Show that 53103 + 10353 is divisible by 39.


Sol : EXAMPLE 1.59
What is the last digit of 1717 ?
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae153

Sol :

EXAMPLE 1.54 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae159

Show that 3287 - 3 is divisible by 23.


Sol : EXAMPLE 1.60
Find the last two digits of 21000 .
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae154

Sol :

EXAMPLE 1.55 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae160

Show that 232 + 1 is divisible by 641.


Sol : EXAMPLE 1.61
Find the last three digit of 2 40 .
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae155

Sol :

EXAMPLE 1.56 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae161

Show that 111333 + 333111 is divisible by 7.


Sol : 1.3.4 Equivalence Class
An equivalence class is the name that we give to the subset
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae156 of S which includes all elements that are equivalent to
each other. In modulo arithmetic an equivalence class
consists of those integers that have the same remainder.
EXAMPLE 1.57
Find remainder when 4444 4444 is divisible by 9.
EXAMPLE 1.62


Sol :
Find all the positive integers less than 30 forming the
equivalence class of 5 for modulo 7.
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae157

Sol :

EXAMPLE 1.58
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae162
What is the last digit in the ordinary decimal representation
Chap 1 Modulo Arithmetic Page 9

EXAMPLE 1.63 5. Find the remainder when 2102 is divided by 5.

Find all the positive integers less than 40 forming the Ans : 4
equivalence class of 7 for modulo 9.


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae163 6. Find the remainder when 3200 is divided by 13.
Ans : 9
EXAMPLE 1.64
Find all the positive integers less than 60 forming the
equivalence class of 8 for modulo 11.


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae164 1.4 Linear Congruence

An expression of the form ax / b (mod n), where a , b and
EXAMPLE 1.65 n are positive integers is called a linear congruence.
Find the positive integers less than 50 forming the For example, 4x / 2 (mod 6) is a linear congruence.
equivalence class 4 for modulo 6 The integral value(s) of x which satisfy the given
congruence are called its solutions. Thus, an integer x0 is


Sol :
said to be a solution of linear congruence ax / b (mod n)
if ax0 / b (mod n) i.e., if n .
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae165 (ax0 - b)
A linear congruence can have unique solution, many
solutions or no solution depending on the values of a , b
and n .
Consider a linear congruence
E X ERC I S E 1.2 4x / 2 (mod 6)
where x is any integer. ...(1)
1. Evaluate 510 (mod 3). We observe that x = 2 and x = 5 satisfy equation (1).
Ans : 1 Thus, 2 and 5 are the solutions of equation (1). Again, we
observe that –4, –1,  8, 11, 14, 17 and many more values of
x are also solutions of (1). Infact, every integer congruent
to 2 modulo 6 and congruent to 5 modulo 6 are solutions
of equation (1).
2. Evaluate 99 (mod 11). Thus, any integer of the form 2 + 6k and 5 + 6k ,
Ans : (i) 1, (ii) 5 where k is any integer, is a solution of (1).
Remark :
(i) All the congruent solutions 2 + 6k are considered
as single solution and similarly, all the congruent
3. Find the remainder when 212 is divided by 41. solutions (5 + 6k) are considered as another single
Ans : 37 solution since they are congruent.
(ii) Solutions are considered distinct if and only if they are
‘incongruent’ to each other (mod n) in a / b (mod n).
(iii) Solutions (unique or distinct) lie in the set {0, 1, 2,
3, ..., (n - 1)} for ax / b (mod n).
4. Find the remainder when 910 is divided by 11.
Ans : 1 1.4.1 Some Important Theorems on Linear
Congruence
1. If (a, n) = 1 i.e., a and n are co-prime, then the linear
congruence ax / b (mod n) has a unique solution.
Page 10 Modulo Arithmetic Chap 1

2. If (a, n) = d and db , then the linear congruence EXAMPLE 1.68

ax / b (mod n) has exactly d solutions which are Find the number of incongruent solutions of the following
incongruent (mod n). linear congruences :
3. If (a, n) = d and db , then the linear congruence (i) 8x / 12 (mod 20) (ii) 14x / 8 (mod 7)
ax / b (mod n) has no solution.

Sol :
Remark :
Two natural numbers a and b are said to be co-prime or
relatively prime to each other if g.c.d. (a, b) = 1. Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae168

1.4.2 Working Rule to Solve a Linear Congruence EXAMPLE 1.69

Consider a linear congruence ax / b (mod n) Solve the linear congruence 5x / 3 (mod 4).
1. Find the g.c.d. of a and n , and let d = g.c.d. (a, n).

Sol :
2. (i) If a and n are co-prime i.e., g.c.d. (a, n) = 1, then
the linear congruence will have a unique solution in
the set "0, 1, 2, ... (n - 1), which can be found by trial
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae169
method.
(ii) If gcd(a, n) = d (! 1) and d does not divide b EXAMPLE 1.70
, then there will be no solution of the congruence Find the least positive value of x such that
ax / b (mod n). (i) 71 / x (mod 8)
(iii) If gcd(a, n) = d (! 1) and d divides b , then (ii) 78 + x / 3 (mod 5)
congruence ax / b (mod n) will have exactly d (iii) 89 / (x + 3) (mod 4)
solutions which are incongruent (mod n).

Sol :
In this case, first we shall find the least positive
integral value x0 which satisfies
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae170
a x / b b mod n l by using trial method
d d d
EXAMPLE 1.71
Let x0 be the least solution of a x / b b mod n l ,
d d d Find the least positive value of x such that 96 / x (mod 5)
then the solution of the given congruence which are 7
incongruent (mod n) are

Sol :

x = x0, x0 + n , x0 + 2n , ..., x0 + (d − 1) n (mod n)

d d d Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae171

EXAMPLE 1.66 EXAMPLE 1.72

Find the number of incongruent solutions of the following Find the least positive value of x such that 5x / 4 (mod 6)
linear congruences :

Sol :
(i) 10x / 5 (mod 3) (ii) 7x / 2 (mod 4)


Sol : Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae172

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae166 EXAMPLE 1.73

If x is congruent to 13 modulo 17 then 7x - 3 is congruent
EXAMPLE 1.67 to which number modulo 17 ?
Find the number of incongruent solutions of the following

Sol :
linear congruences :
(i) 6x / 4 (mod 3)
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae173
(ii) 18x / 12 (mod 6)


Sol :
EXAMPLE 1.74
Solve 5x / 4 (mod 6).
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae167
Chap 1 Modulo Arithmetic Page 11

Sol : 3. 15x / 10 (mod 5)

Ans : Five solutions
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae174

EXAMPLE 1.75
Solve 3x - 2 / 0 (mod 11). 4. 8x / 4 (mod 3)
Ans : Unique solution


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae175

Solve the following linear congruences:
EXAMPLE 1.76 5. 7x / 13 (mod 11)
Solve : (x − 1) (x + 2) / (x − 2) (x + 7) (mod n), if n is odd. Ans : x = 5 (mod 11)


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ae176

6. 6x / 2 (mod 3)
Ans : No solution

7. 6x / 4 (mod 10)
Ans : x = 4, 9 (mod 10)

8. 12x / 4 (mod 7)
Ans : x = 5 (mod 7)

9. 8x / 5 (mod 6)
Ans : No solution

E X ERC I S E 1.3
Find the number of incongruent solutions of the following
10. 15x / 12 (mod 21)
linear congruences:
Ans : x = 5, 12, 19 (mod 21)
1. 9x / 2 (mod 5)
Ans : Unique solution

******
2. 10x / 3 (mod 2)
Ans : No solution
Page 12 Modulo Arithmetic Chap 1
Chap 2 Numerical Problems Page 13

CHAPTER 2

Numerical Problems

2.1 Alligation and Mixture litres of alcohol. Hence the concentration of this solution
is 0.2 (= 10/50) or 20%.
2.1.1 Mixture


Illustration 2
Mixing of two or more qualities of things If 30 litres of pure milk is mixed with 10 litres of water
produces a mixture. When two items of different the concentration of this solution can be expressed as 75%
qualities are thus mixed, the quality of the (= 30
40 ) milk or 25% water.
resultant mixture lies in between the qualities We can also have two solutions mixed together to
of the original constituent items, i.e., it will be give a new solution. Such problems can also be handled
higher than the lowest quality and lower than the highest in the same manner as other mixtures. In the weighted
quality of the items being mixed. average rule, the quality of the constituents (p1, p2, etc.)
If two types of a product of different prices per will then be the concentrations of various solutions mixed
unit are mixed, the unit price of the resultant mixture together.
will lie between the prices of the two types that form
the mixture. Here, the average quality is essentially the 2.1.2 Alligation
weighted average to the two constituent items. Alligation is a practical method which enables us to find
If q1 is the quantity (or number of items) of one the ratio in which two or more ingredients at the given
particular item of quality p1 and q2 be the quantity (or price must be mixed to produce a mixture of the desired
number of items) of the second item of quality p2 are price.
mixed together to give a new mixture, then the weight
Mean Price
average value (p) of the quality of the mixture is given by
p q + p2 q2 The cost price of a unit quantity of such a mixture is
p = 1 1 called it’s Mean Price/Average Price.
q1 + q2
Even if there are more than two groups of items According to the Weighted Average rule the quantity
mixed, the weighted average rule can be applied. We will terms come on one side and the price terms come on the
only have to take figures (as shown in the formula for the other side. If we do this we get the rule
two groups) for all the groups in the numerator as well as q1 p − p2
= .
the denominator and calculate the weighted average. For q2 p1 − p
example, if there are four groups of quantities q1, q2, q3 and This is called the RULE OF ALLIGATION. This rule
q 4 whose respective qualities are p1, p2, p3 and p 4 , then the connects quantities and prices in mixtures. This can also
weighted average quality of the group can be written as be written as
p q + p2 q2 + p3 q3 + p 4 q 4 q1 p −p
p = 1 1 = 2 .
q1 + q2 + q3 + q 4 q2 p − p1
A mixture can also be a solution i.e a liquid In a descriptive manner, the Rule of Alligation can be
mixed with another liquid which is normally water. The written as
concentration of the solution is expressed as the proportion Quantity of Cheaper Rate of Dearer − Average Rate
= .
Quantity of Dearer Average Rate − Rate of Cheaper
(or percentage) of the liquid in the total solution.
This rule is a very powerful rule and is useful in


Illustration 1 problems on weighted averages and mixtures. This rule is
If 10 litres of pure alcohol is mixed with 40 litres of also useful in a number of problems which can be treated
water, then in a total solution of 50 litres, there is 10 as mixtures and applied to parameters other than price
Page 14 Numerical Problems Chap 2

also. EXAMPLE 2.3

In actual practice, to apply alligation rule, we do In what ratio must water be mixed with milk to gain 10%
not need to remember the above formula at all. It can be by selling the mixture at cost price ?
made very simple by representing the rule pictorially. The

Sol :
above formula can be represented as follows:
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be103

EXAMPLE 2.4
A milkman mixed some water with milk to gain 20% by
selling the mixture at the cost price. Find the ratio of
water and milk.


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be104

We write the dearer and cheaper prices in one
line with some gap in between them. Then, we write the EXAMPLE 2.5
average price in between these two but in the line below In what ratio must turmeric powder at < 60 per kg be
the line in which dearer and cheaper prices are written. mixed with turmeric powder at < 65 per kg so that 10%
Then, take the differences of quantities as shown along may be gained by selling the mixture at < 68.20 per kg ?
the arrows continued, i.e., in a diagonally opposite corner.
The difference between the top left hand quantity (Dearer

Sol :
Price) and Average Price has to be written at the bottom
right hand corner. Similarly, the difference between the Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be105
top right hand corner (Cheaper Price) and the Average
Price has to be written at the bottom left hand corner. EXAMPLE 2.6
Now the ratio of the two quantities in the bottommost In an examination out of 500 students, 70% boy and 80%
line will give us the ratio of the quantities of Dearer and girls are passed. If total pass percentage was 76%, find the
Cheaper varieties. Please note that since we took Dearer number of girls.
Price on the top left corner, the ratio with the Bottom
Right figure in the numerator will give the ratio of Dearer

Sol :
Quantity to Cheaper Quantity.
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be106

EXAMPLE 2.1
Find the ratio in which the rice at < 17.20 a kg EXAMPLE 2.7
be mixed with rice at < 22.80 a kg to produce a A manufacturer mixes two kinds of red chilli powder
mixture worth < 20.40 per kg. costing < 35 per kg and < 40 per kg in the ratio of 8 : 7.
What is his profit/loss percent if he sells the mixture at


Sol :
the rate of < 37.50 per kg?

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be101

Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be107

EXAMPLE 2.2
In what ratio must a grocer mix two varieties of
salt costing < 7.20 and < 5.70 respectively so as EXAMPLE 2.8
to get a mixture worth < 6.30 per kg? How many kg of sugar costing < 18.30 per kg must be
mixed with 126 kg of sugar costing < 8.55 per kg so that


Sol :
20% may be gained by selling the mixture at < 14.40 per
kg?
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be102
Chap 2 Numerical Problems Page 15

Sol : that of water is 8 : 19. How much wine did the cask hold
initially?
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be108

Sol :

EXAMPLE 2.9 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be113

25 kg of type A sandal powder, which costs < 614 per
kg, was mixed with a certain amount of type B sandal EXAMPLE 2.14
powder, which costs < 695 per kg. Then the mixture was How much water must be added to a bucket which contains
sold at the rate of < 767 per kg and 18% profit was earned. 40 litres of milk at the cost price of < 35 per litre so that
What was the amount (in kg) of type B sandal powder in the cost of milk reduces to < 20 per litre?
the mixture?


Sol :


Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be114
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be109

EXAMPLE 2.15
EXAMPLE 2.10 40 litres of a mixture contains milk and water in the ratio
DK Sharma had < 28000. He lent a part of it at 8% simple 3 : 1. Find the amount of milk to be added to the mixture
interest and the remaining at 6 23 % simple interest. His so as to have milk and water in ratio 4 : 1.
total annual income was < 1960. Find the sum lent at
different rates.

Sol :

Sol : Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be115

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be110

EXAMPLE 2.16
A large vessel contains a mixture of orange, pineapple
EXAMPLE 2.11 and apple juices in the respective ratio of 4 : 6 : 5. Now
Two milk vessels A and B contain milk and water mixed 15 litres of this mixture is taken out and 8 litres of orange
in the ratio 5 : 2 and 8 : 5 respectively. Find the ratio juice and 2 litres of pineapple juice is added to the vessel.
in which these mixtures are to be mixed to get a new If the resultant quantity of orange juice in mixture is 10
mixture containing milk and water in the ratio 9 : 4. litres less than the resultant quantity of pineapple juice


Sol : mixture, what was the initial quantity of mixture in the
vessel ?
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be111

Sol :

EXAMPLE 2.12 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be116

A container contains 100 litre of milk. From this container,
10 litre of milk was taken out and replaced by water. This EXAMPLE 2.17
process was further repeated two times. How much milk is How many litres of water should be added to a 20 litres
now there in mixture in the container? mixtures containing milk and water in the ratio of 7 : 3


Sol : such that the resultant mixture has 40% water in it?


Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be112
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be117
EXAMPLE 2.13
8 litres are drawn from a cask full of wine and is then filled EXAMPLE 2.18
with water. This operation is performed two more times. The cost of Type 1 rice is < 60 per kg and Type 2 rice is
The ratio of the quantity of wine now left in the cask to < 80 per kg. If both Type 1 and Type 2 are mixed in the
Page 16 Numerical Problems Chap 2

ratio 2 : 3, find the price per kg of the mixed variety. 6. How many kgs. of rice costing < 36 per kg must be


Sol : mixed with 36 kg of rice costing < 27 per kg so that
20% gain may be obtained by selling the mixture at
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be118 < 36 per kg?
Ans : 10.8 kg

7. A butler stole wine from a butt of sherry which

contained 40% of spirit and he replaced what he had
stolen by wine containing only 16% spirit. The but
was then 24% strength only. How much of the butt
did he steal?
Ans : 23

8. Mahalaxmi General Store has 1000 kg of sugar, part

of which he sells at 8% profit and the rest at 18%
E X ERC I S E 2.1 profit. He gains 14% on the whole. Find the quantity
sold at 8% profit.
Ans : 400 kg
1. In what ratio must rice at < 18.60 per kg be mixed
with rice at < 21.60 per kg so that the mixture be
worth < 20 per kg ?
Ans : 8 : 7 9. Milk and water in two vessels A and B are in the
ratio 4 : 3 and 2 : 3 respectively. In what ratio the
liquids in both the vessels should be mixed to obtain
a new mixture in vessel C containing half milk and
2. In what ratio must a grocer mix two varieties of
half water?
pulses costing < 30 and < 40 respectively so as to get
Ans : 7 : 5
a mixture worth < 31 per kg?
Ans : 7 : 3

10. The respective ratio of milk and water in the mixture

is 4 : 3. If 16 litres of water is added to this mixture
3. In what ratio must water be mixed with milk to gain
the respective ratio of milk and water becomes 8 : 7.
16 23 % on selling the mixture at cost price?
What is the quantity of milk in the original mixture?
Ans : 1 : 6
Ans : 48 litre.

4. A milkman mixed some water with milk to gain 25%

by selling the mixture at the cost price. Find the ratio
of water and milk.
Ans : 1 : 4 2.2 Boats and Streams
In this section we will discuss numerical problems related
to boat and stream when they are rowing/sailing along the
5. If < 170 is divided among 100 students such that each direction of stream of opposite to it by using the concept
boy got < 2 and each girl each girl got one <, then find of speed, distance and time. In class X we have studied
the number of girls. speed, distance and time which are related as
Ans : 30 Distance = Speed # Time
Let us discuss some useful terms and result related
to the motion of boat.
Chap 2 Numerical Problems Page 17

1. Still water : The water of a river or any other water

Sol :

body which is not flowing is known as still water.
2. Stream : It is the flowing water of a river which is Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be120
moving at a certain speed.
3. Downstream : If the boat rows/sails along the
direction of stream, then it is said to move downstream EXAMPLE 2.21
and the speed at which the boat is moving is called The speed of a boat when travelling downstream is
downstream speed. 42 km/h, whereas when travelling upstream it is 34 km/h,
4. Upstream : If the boat rows/sails in the direction what is the speed of the boat in still water and the speed
opposite to that of the stream, then it is said to move of the stream?
upstream and the speed at which the boat is moving

Sol :
is called upstream speed.
5. When the boat is moving downstream, the speed of Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be121
the water aids (and thus adds to) the speed of the
boat. Thus, we have
Speed of the boat with the stream = Speed of the EXAMPLE 2.22
boat in still water + Speed of the stream. A boat covers a distance of 60 km in 5 hours running
6. When the boat is moving upstream, the speed of the downstream. While returning, it covers the same distance
water opposes (and hence reduces) the speed of the in 7 12 hours. What is the speed of the stream?
boat. Thus, we have

Sol :
Speed of the boat against stream = Speed of the
boat in still water - Speed of the stream. Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be122
7. The speeds of the boat against the stream and the
speed of the boat with the stream, are RELATIVE
SPEEDS. EXAMPLE 2.23
8. If u is the speed of the boat down the stream and v A boatman goes 8 km against the current of stream in 2
is the speed of the boat up the stream, then we have hour and goes 4 km along the current in 20 minutes. How
the following two relationships: long will he take to go 4 km in still water?

Speed of the boat in still water = u + v

Sol :

2
Speed of the water current = u − v Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be123
2
9. In problems instead of a boat, it may be a swimmer
but the approach is exactly the same. Instead of EXAMPLE 2.24
boats/swimmers in water, it could also be a cyclist A boat running upstream takes 8 hours 30 minute to cover
cycling against or along the wind. The approach to a certain distance, while it takes 4 hours to cover the same
solving the problems still remains the same. distance running downstream. What is the ratio between
the speed of the boat and the speed of water current
respectively?
EXAMPLE 2.19
A boat is rowed downstream at 15 km/hr and upstream at

Sol :
8 km/hr. Find the speed of the stream.
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be124


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be119 EXAMPLE 2.25

A man can row at 10 km/hr in still water. If the river is
running at 2 km/hr, it takes him 75 minutes to row to a
EXAMPLE 2.20
place and back. How far is the place?
A boat running downstream covers 48 km in 4 hours,
while for covering the same distance upstream it take 6

Sol :
hours. What is the speed of the boat in still water?
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be125
Page 18 Numerical Problems Chap 2

EXAMPLE 2.26 km downstream. Determine the speed of the man in still

A steamer goes downstream from one port to another in 4 water and the speed of the current.
hours. It covers the same distance upstream in 5 hours. If


Sol :
the speed of the stream is 4 km/hr, then find the distance
between the two ports.
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be131


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be126 EXAMPLE 2.32

Ritu can row downstream 20 km in 2 hours, and upstream
4 km in 2 hours. Find her speed of rowing in still water
EXAMPLE 2.27 and the speed of the current.
A boatman rows to a place 9 km distant and back in 4


Sol :
hours. He finds that he can row 12 km with the stream in
the same time as 4 km against the stream. Find the speed
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be132
of the stream.


Sol :
EXAMPLE 2.33
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be127 A boat goes 16 km upstream and 24 km downstream in 6
hours. It can go 12 km upstream and 36 km downstream
in the same time. Fine the speed of the boat in still water
EXAMPLE 2.28 and the speed of the stream.
The speed of a motor boat in still water to that of the


Sol :
current of water is as 35 : 5. The boat goes along with the
current in 5 hours 10 minutes. Find the time in which it
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be133
will come back.


Sol :
EXAMPLE 2.34
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be128 The speed of a boat in still water is 15 km/hr. It can go
15 km upstream and return down stream to the original
point in 2 hrs 15 minutes. Find the speed of the stream.
EXAMPLE 2.29


Sol :
A man can row by 6 km/hr in still water. It takes him
twice as long to row upstream as to row downstream the
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be134
river. Find the speed of stream.


Sol :
EXAMPLE 2.35
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be129 A motor boat whose speed is 18 km/hr in still water
takes 2 hour more to go 48 km upstream than to return
downstream to the same spot. Find the speed of the
EXAMPLE 2.30 stream.
A boat takes half time in moving a certain distance


Sol :
downstream than upstream. What is the ratio between
speed of boat in still water and speed of current?
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be135


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be130

EXAMPLE 2.31 E X ERC I S E 2. 2

A man can row 30 km upstream and 44 km downstream in
10 hours. In 13 hours, he can row 40 km upstream and 55
Chap 2 Numerical Problems Page 19

8. A boat goes 8 km upstream and then returns. Total

1. In a river, Mahesh takes 3 hours in rowing 3 km time taken is 4 hours 16 minutes. If the velocity of
upstream or 15 km downstream. What is the speed current is 1 km/hr , find the actual velocity of the
of the current? boat.
Ans : 2 km/hr Ans : 4 km/hr

2. A boat goes 2.4 km downstream in 10 hours. It takes 9. The speed of a boat in still water is 11 km/hr. It can
2 hours more to cover the same distance against the go 12 km upstream and return downstream to the
stream. What is the speed of the boat in still water? original point in 2 hours 45 minutes. Find the speed
Ans : 2.2 km/hr of the stream.
Ans : 5 km/hr

3. A boat goes 6 km in an hour in still water. It takes

thrice as much time in covering the same distance 10. Kritika can row her boat a speed of 5 km/hr in still
against the current. Find the speed of the current. water. If it takes her 1 hour more to row the boat 5.25
Ans : 4 km/hr km. upstream then to return downstream, find the
speed of the stream.
Ans : 2 km/hr

4. Raju can row 7 12 km/hr in still water. If in a river

running at 1.5 km an hour, it takes him 50 minutes
to row to a place and back, how far off is the place?
Ans : 3 km
2.3 Pipes and cisterns
Pipe is a hollow cylindrical tube, usually made of metal or
plastic, through which a liquid or gas can flow. Cistern is
5. Jethalal can row three-quarters of a kilometre against is an artificial reservoir, tank or a container which is used
the stream in 11 14 minutes and return in 7 12 minutes. for storing liquids such as water, chemicals, petroleum
Find the speed of the man in still water. products etc.
Ans : 5 km/hr Let us discuss some useful terms and result related
to the pipes and cisterns.
1. Inlet: A pipe which is connected to fill a tank is
6. Ambar can row 7 12 kms an hour in still water and he known as an inlet.
finds that it takes him twice as long to row down the 2. Outlet: A pipe which is connected to empty a tank is
river. Find the rate of the stream. known as an outlet.
Ans : 2.5 km/hr 3. If a pipe fills a tank in x hours, then part filled in 1
hour is 1x .
4. If a pipe empties a full tank in y hours, then part
emptied in 1 hour is y1 .
7. A boat covers 32 km upstream and 36 km downstream 5. If a pipe empties y1 part of a tank in 1 hour, then
in 7 hours. Also, it covers 40 km upstream and 48 km the time taken by the pipe to empty the full tank is
downstream in 9 hours. Find the speed of the boat in y hours.
still water and that of the stream. 6. If a pipe fills 1x part of a tank in 1 hour, then the
Ans : 10 km/hr, 2 km/hr time taken by the pipe to fill the tank completely is
x hours.
7. Two pipes can fill a tank in x and y hours respectively.
If both the pipes are opened simultaneously, then
time taken by both the pipes to fill the tank is xxy +y
Page 20 Numerical Problems Chap 2

hours. EXAMPLE 2.38

8. If two pipes A and B together can fill a tank in x If a pipe can fill a large tank in 4 hours and another pipe
hours and the pipe A alone can fill the tank in y fills the same tank in 12 hours, then how long will it take
hours, then time taken by pipe B alone to fill the if both the pipes are opened together?
tank is y xy- x hours.

Sol :
9 If a pipe A can fill a tank in x hours and a pipe B
can empty the full tank in y hours (where y > x ), Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be138
-x
then net part filled in 1 hour is y xy .
10. If a pipe A can fill a tank in x hours and a pipe B
can empty the full tank in y hours (where x > y ), EXAMPLE 2.39
-y
then net part emptied in 1 hour xxy Three different diameter pipes individually can fill a
11. Three pipes A, B and C can fill a tank in x, y and cistern in 5, 6 and 7 hours respectively. If all the three
z hours respectively. If all the three pipes are opened pipes are opened together, then how much time is required
simultaneously, then time taken by all the pipes to to fill the cistern.
fill it is xy +xyz
yz + zx hours.

Sol :
12. If two pipes are filing a tank at the rate of x hours
and y hours respectively and a third pipe is emptying Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be139
it at the rate of z hours, then in one hour the part of
the tank filled is x1 + y1 − z1 .
Time taken to fill the tank is yz +xyz
zx − xy EXAMPLE 2.40
Problems on pipes and cisterns are similar to A small tank can be filled by a pipe in 12 minutes. Another
problems on time and work. In pipes and cistern problems, pipe can empty the tank in 18 minutes. If both pipes are
the amount of work done is the part of the tank of filled or open, how long will it take to fill or empty the tank?
emptied. And, the time taken to do a piece of work is the


Sol :
time take to fill or empty a tank completely or to a desired
level. There is only one difference between the problems
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be140
on regular work and those in pipes and cisterns. In pipes
and cisterns, a filling pipe or tap does positive work and
an emptying pipe or a leak does negative work. EXAMPLE 2.41
A pipe can fill large tank in 15 hours. Due to a leak in
the bottom, it is filled in 20 hours. If the tank if full, how
EXAMPLE 2.36
much time will the leak take to empty it?
Two pipe can fill a small tank in 24 minutes and 30 minutes
respectively. If both the pipes are opened simultaneously

Sol :
in the empty tank, how much time will be taken by them
to fill it? Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be141


Sol :
EXAMPLE 2.42
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be136 A pipe can fill a large tank in 10 hours and another pipe
can empty in 15 hours. If both the pipes are opened in
an empty tank, find then the time taken to fill the tank
EXAMPLE 2.37
completely.
Two small diameter pipes can fill a large tank in 20 hour
and 30 hours respectively. If both the pipes are opened

Sol :
simultaneously, then find the time that the tank will be
filled. Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be142


Sol :
EXAMPLE 2.43
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be137 If a pipe can fill a large tank in 7 hours and another pipe
can empty the full tank in 13 hours, If both the pipes are
opened in the empty tank, then how long will it take to
Chap 2 Numerical Problems Page 21

fill the tank? Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be148

Sol :
EXAMPLE 2.49
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be143 Two pipes A and B can fill a small tank in 24 minutes
and 32 minutes respectively. If both the pipes are opened
EXAMPLE 2.44 together, after how much time after B should be closed so
A large pipe can fill a tank in 4 hours but there is a leakage that the tank is full in 18 minutes?
also, due to which it takes 4.5 hours for the tank to be

Sol :
filled. How much time will the leakage take in emptying
the tank, if the tank is filled initially? Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be149


Sol :
EXAMPLE 2.50
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be144 Two pipes can fill a cistern in 14 hours and 16 hours
respectively. The pipes are opened simultaneously and it
EXAMPLE 2.45 is found that due to leakage in the bottom it took 32
A pipe fills a tank in 2 hours and another pipe fills the minutes more to fill the cistern. When the cistern is full,
same tank in 4 hours. But a third pipe empties the full in what time will the leak empty it?
tank in 6 hours. If all of them are opened together, how

Sol :
much time will it take to fill the tank?


Sol : Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be150

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be145 EXAMPLE 2.51

Two pipes can fill a tank in 15 hours and 12 hours
EXAMPLE 2.46 respectively and a third pipe can empty it in 4 hours. If
Two pipes can fill a tank individually in 1 hour and 75 the pipes be opened in order at 10 AM, 11 AM and 12
minutes respectively. There is also an outlet pipe which AM respectively at what time the tank will be emptied.
empty the tank. If all the three pipes are opened together,

Sol :
the tank is full in 50 minutes. How much time will be
taken by C to empty the full tank? Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be151


Sol :
EXAMPLE 2.52
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be146 A pipe can fill a cistern in 6 minutes and another pipe can
fill that cistern in 7 minutes. Both the pipes are opened
EXAMPLE 2.47 alternatively for 1 minute each. In what time will they fill
A pump can fill a tank with water in 4 hours. Because of the cistern?
a leak in the tank, it takes 4 23 hours to fill the tank. How

Sol :
much time will be taken leak to empty the tank?


Sol : Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be152

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be147 EXAMPLE 2.53

Nine taps of same capacity can fill a water tank completely
EXAMPLE 2.48 in 20 minutes. How many taps of the same capacity are
In 1 minute 74 of a bucket is filled. Find the time in which required to fill up the same water tank in 15 minute?
the rest of the bucket can be filled.

Sol :


Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be153
Page 22 Numerical Problems Chap 2

EXAMPLE 2.54 2. A tap can fill a cistern in 8 hours and another tap can
Three pipes A, B, C can fill a tank in 12 hours. After empty it in 16 hours. Find the time taken to fill the
working at it together for 4 hours, C is closed, now A tank, if both the taps are open.
and B can fill the remaining part in 14 hours. Find the Ans : 16 hours
number of hours taken by C alone to fill the tank.


Sol :
3. A pipe can fill a tank in 12 hours. Due to leak in the
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be154 bottom, it is filled in 16 hours. If the tank is full, how
long will it take to empty from the leak.
Ans : 48 hours
EXAMPLE 2.55
A tap can fill a tank in 6 hours. After half the tank is
filled, three more similar taps are opened. What is the
total time taken to fill the tank completely? 4. Pipes A and B can fill a tank in 6 hours and 9 hours
respectively and pipe C can empty it in 12 hours. If


Sol :
all the pipes are opened together in the empty tank,
in how much time will it be full ?
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be155
Ans : 5 17 hours

EXAMPLE 2.56
A tank is three-fourths full. A pipe can fill the tank in 12 5. A cistern has two taps which fill it in 12 minutes and
minutes. Another pipe can empty it in 8 minute. If both 15 minutes respectively. There is also a waste pipe in
pipes are open, how long will it take to empty the tank? the cistern. When all the three are opened, the empty


Sol : cistern is full in 20 minutes. How long will the waste
pipe take to empty the full cistern?
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be156 Ans : 10 minutes

EXAMPLE 2.57
6. A cistern can be filled by two pipes filling separately
A tap can fill a tank in 20 minutes and another outlet
in 12 and 16 minutes respectively. Both the pipe are
pipe can empty it in 12 minutes. If the tank is already
opened together for a certain time but being clogged,
two-fifths full and both the taps are opened together, will
only 78 of the full quantity of water flows through
the tank be filled or emptied? how long will it take before
the former and only 56 through the later pipe. The
the tank is either filled completely or emptied completely,
obstructions, however, being suddenly removed, the
as the case may be ?
cistern is filled in 3 minutes from the moment. How


Sol : long was it before the full flow began?
Ans : after 4 12 minute
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be157

7. A cistern has three pipes A, B and C . A and B can

fill it in 3 hours and 4 hours respectively while C
can empty the completely filled cistern in 1 hour. If
E X ERC I S E 2.3 the pipes are opened in order at 3 P.M., 4 P.M. and
5 P.M. respectively, at what time will the cistern be
1. A pipe can fill a tank in 3 minutes and another pipe empty ?
can fill it in 4 minutes. How long would it take both Ans : 7 : 12 PM
pipes, working together, to fill it?
Ans : 127 minutes
8. A large tanker can be filled by two pipes A and B in
60 minutes and 40 minutes respectively. How many
Chap 2 Numerical Problems Page 23

minutes will it take to fill the tanker from empty state point, whereas, B starts 10 meters ahead of A. To
if B is used for half the time and A and B fill it cover a race of 100 meters in this case, A will have
together for the other half ? to cover 100 meters while B will have to cover only
Ans : 30 minutes (100 - x) .
2. A give B a start of t minutes: This statement implies
that A will start t minutes after B starts from the
starting point.
9. A pipe can empty a tank in 40 minutes. A second pipe
3. A beats B by x m : This statement implies that in
with diameter twice as much as that of the first is also
the same time, while A reached the winning point,
attached with the tank to empty it. How much time
whereas, B is behind A by x m. To cover a race of
will the two pipes together take to empty the tank ?
100 meters in this case, A has covered 100 meters
Ans : 8 minutes
while B has covered only (100 - x) .
4. A beats B by t second : This statement implies that
in the same time, while A finished the race t second
10. A tap can fill a tank in 40 minutes and another outlet before B finishes.
pipe can empty it in 24 minutes. If the tank is already 5. A can give B a start of t minutes: This statement
two-fifths full and both the taps are opened together, implies that A will start t minutes after B starts
will the tank be filled or emptied? How long will it from the starting point. Both A and B will reach the
take before the tank is either filled completely or finishing point at the same time.
emptied completely, as the case may be ? 6. A gives B x meters and t minutes: This statement
Ans : Empty in 24 minutes implies that A and B start from the starting point at
the same instant, but while A reaches the finishing
point, B is behind by x meters, and, B takes t
minutes compared to A to complete the race. So, B
covers remaining x meters in extra t minutes. This
gives the speed of B as xt .
2.4 Races and Games
2.4.2 Games
2.4.1 Race A game is structured form of play. The game may be
A race is a competition in which two or more the played by two or more players or by two or more teams.
competitors trying to cover a given distance in the least Winner of any game is usually based on points, goals or
time. Since Races and Games is a sub-topic of Time, Speed run scored by a player or team.
and Distance, all the formulas of time, speed and distance Let us examine some of the general statement and
are applicable to Races and Games questions. their mathematics meaning related to game :
Let us discuss some useful terms and result related 1. Game of 100 : A game of 100, means that the person
to the race. among the contestants who scores 100 points first is
1. Race course : The places like grounds, roads, rivers, the winner.
lakes, etc., where races take place are called the race 2. A beats B by 20 points : A score 100 point and B
course. score 80 point.
2. Starting point : The point from where the race starts 3. In a game of 100 A can give B 20 points : While
is known as the starting point. A need to score 100 point, B need to score only
3. Winning post : The point at which the race ends is (100 − 20) = 80 points.
called the goal or winning post.
4. Dead Heat : If in a race all the participants reach the
EXAMPLE 2.58
goal at the same time, the race is called dead heat.
In 4 km race, Abhas beats Lekh by 28 meters or 7 seconds.
Therefore, dead heat is that type of race which ends
Determine Abhas’s time over the course.
in a draw, i.e., no one is winner or loser.
Let us examine some of the general statement and

Sol :
their mathematics meaning related to race :
1. A gives B a start of x meters : This statement Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be158
implies that, while A starts the race from starting
Page 24 Numerical Problems Chap 2

EXAMPLE 2.59 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be164

In, a 500 m race, Amar beats Barun by 35 m or 7 seconds.
Find Amar’s time over the course.
EXAMPLE 2.65


Sol : In a race of 100 m, Adesh beats Bharat by 10 m and
Chandra by 13 m. Determine the distance by which
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be159 Bharat will beat Chandra in a race of 180 m.


Sol :
EXAMPLE 2.60
In a 500 metre, Sophia beats Anvi by 20 metres or 4 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be165
seconds. Find Sophia’s time over the course.


Sol : EXAMPLE 2.66
Lekhraj runs 4 times as fast as Gautam. If Lekhraj gives
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be160 Gautam a start of 60 m, how far must be the winning post
on the tracks so that Lekhraj and Gautam reach there at
the same time?
EXAMPLE 2.61
Abhas can run 1 km in 3 minutes 10 seconds and Sanket

Sol :
can cover the same distance in 3 minutes 20 seconds. By
what distance can Abhas best Sanket? Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be166

Sol :
EXAMPLE 2.67
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be161 In a 500 m race, the ratio of the speeds of Adesh and
Ekbal is 3 : 4. Adesh has a start of 140 m. Then, by how
many metres Adesh wins.
EXAMPLE 2.62
Aachrya runs 1 34 times as fast as Nachiket. If Aachrya

Sol :
gives Nachiket a start of 84 m, how far the winning post
be so that Aachrya and Nachiket might reach it at the Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be167
same time?


Sol : EXAMPLE 2.68
In a kilometre race, Amar beats Akbar by 30 seconds
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be162 and Akbar beats Anthony by 15 seconds. If Amar beats
Anthony by 180 m, then find the time taken by Amar to
run 1 kilometre.
EXAMPLE 2.63
In a 500 m race, Pranit reaches the finishing point in 28

Sol :
seconds and Samarth reaches in 35 seconds. By how much
distance does Pranit beat Samarth? Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be168

Sol :
EXAMPLE 2.69
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be163 In a km race, Ishwar, Tejas and Virat, each running a
uniform speed get the gold, silver and bronze medals
respectively. If Ishwar beats Tejas by 100 m and Tejas
EXAMPLE 2.64 beats Virat by 100 m, then by how much meters does
Dev and Tezas take part in 100 m race. Dev runs at a Ishwar beat Virat?
speed of 5 km/h. Dev gives Tezas a start of 8 m and still
beats him by 8 seconds. Determine the speed of Dev.

Sol :

Sol : Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be169

Chap 2 Numerical Problems Page 25

EXAMPLE 2.70 B can give C 30 points. How many points to make the
In a mile race, Aakarsh can be given a start of 128 m by game?
Girish. If Girish can give Rachit a start of 4 m in a 100


Sol :
m dash, then who out of Aakarsh and Rachit will win a
race of one and a half miles, and what will be the final
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be175
lead given by the winner to the loser? One mile is 1600 m.


Sol :
EXAMPLE 2.76
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be170 At a game of billiard, A can give B 12 points in a game of
40 and A can give C 10 Points in game of 50. How many
points can C and B in a game of 80?
EXAMPLE 2.71


Sol :
In a kilometre race, if Gaurang gives Hemang, a start of 40
metres, then Hemang wins by 19 seconds but if Gaurang
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be176
gives Hemang, a start of 30 seconds then Hemang wins by
40 metres. Find the time taken by each to run a kilometre.


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be171

E X ERC I S E 2. 4
EXAMPLE 2.72 1. In a kilometer race, Ram beats Bharat by 40 metres
In a game of 100 points, Darpan can give 20 points to or by 5 seconds. What is the time taken by Ram over
Gagan and 28 points to Parth. Find how many points can the course.
Gagan give Parth? Ans : 2 minute


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be172 2. In a 300 m race Amar beats Bhavya by 22.5 m or 6

seconds. Find Bhavya’s time over the course.
Ans : 80 seconds
EXAMPLE 2.73
In a game, Pranit can give 20 points to Reyansh and 32
points to Samrat. Reyansh can give 15 points to Samrat.
How many points make the game? 3. In a 100 m race, Seeta covers the whole distance in 36
seconds and Teena in 45 seconds. In this race, by how


Sol :
many metres Seeta beats Teena.
Ans : 20 m
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be173

EXAMPLE 2.74 4. Akbar runs 1 23 times as fast as Roshan. If Akbar gives

In a game of billiards of 60 points, Aarav can give Bhagya Roshan a start of 80 m. How far must the winning
15 points and in the same game, Aarav can give Chagan post be so that Akbar and Roshan might reach it at
20 points. How many points can Bhagya give to Chagan the same time?
in a game of 90 points? Ans : 200 m


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be174 5. In a 800 m race, Amar beats Akbar by 74 m and in a

600 m race, Akbar beats Anthony by 50 m. By how
many meters will Amar beat Anthony in a race of
EXAMPLE 2.75
500 m?
A can gives B 40 points, A can give C 64 points, and
Page 26 Numerical Problems Chap 2

Ans : 84.06 m According to Section 4 of the Indian Partnership Act,

1932,
Partnership is the relations between two or more
persons who have agreed to share the profits of a business
6. In a 800 metre race, Geeta defeated Lata by 15
carried on by all or any one of them acting for all.
seconds. If Geeta’s speed was 8 km/hr, then find the
According to L H Haney,
speed of Lata. Partnership is the relation between persons
Ans : 7 17
25 km/hr competent to make contracts who have agreed to carry on
a lawful business in common with a view to private gain.

7. Dheeraj and Fateh can cover a 200 m race in 22 2.5.2 Partnership Deed
seconds and 25 seconds respectively. When Dheeraj Since partnership is the outcome of an agreement, it is
finished the race then Fateh is at what distance from essential that there must be some terms and conditions
the finishing line? agreed upon by all the partners. Such terms and conditions
Ans : 24 m mat be either written or oral. The law does not make
it compulsory to have a written agreement. However, in
order to avoid all misunderstandings and disputes, it is
always the best course to have a written agreement duly
8. In a game of Snooker, Bhupesh can give Deepak 16
signed and registered under the Act.
Points in 80 and Bhupesh can give Narendra 15 point
Partnership deed can be defined as follows:
in 90. How many points can Narendra give Deepak in
The partnership deed is a written agreement
a game of 50?
among the partners which contains the terms of agreement.
Ans : 2 point
It is also called ‘ Articles of Partnership’.

2.5.3 Difference Between Active Partner and

9. In a game, Badal can give 20 points to Chandu, Badal Sleeping Partner
can give 32 points to Deepak and Chandu can give 15 1. Active Partner : An active partner is one who
points to Deepak. How many points make the game? contributes capital, participates in the management
Ans : 100 of the firm, shares its profits and losses, and is liable
to an unlimited extent to the creditors of the firm.
These partners take actual part in carrying out
10. In a game of billiards, Rajesh can give Shailesh 10 business of the firm on behalf of other partners.
points in 60 and he can give Tejendra 15 in 60. How 2. Sleeping or Dormant Partner : Partners who do not
many points can Shalelsh give Tejendra in a game of take part in the day to day activities of the business
90? are called sleeping partners. A sleeping partner,
Ans : 200 however, contributes capital to the firm, shares its
profits and losses, and has unlimited liability.

2.5.4 Types of Partnership

1. Simple partnership : If partners invest money for
the same time/equal period, it is called Simple
2.5 Partnership partnership.
If the partners of a firm invest a capital in
The term partnership, is used to mean a business
a business for equal periods, then the profits or
structure wherein two or more individuals, come together
losses of the business at the end of the year are
for undertaking a lawful business and have agreed to share
divided amongst the partners in the ratio of their
the profits and losses arising from it. The management and
capitals.
operation of the business should be performed either by
2. Compound Partnership : If partners invest money
all the partners or any of them, acting for all the partners.
for a different time/unequal period, it is called
2.5.1 Definition Compound partnership.
When the capitals of the partners are invested
Chap 2 Numerical Problems Page 27

in a business for unequal periods of time, then out of the profit, find the share of Raheem in the profits.
the capital should first be adjusted to a common

Sol :
period, say 1 month, by multiplying each partner’s
capital by the period for which it is invested. The
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be180
profit-sharing ratio is then determined from the
adjusted effective capitals.


Illustration EXAMPLE 2.81
Suppose x invests < 5000 for 6 months and y Bharati, Chitra and Divya are entered in a garment
invests < 6000 for 10 months in a year. Then x manufacturing bsuiness. Bharati being the working partner
’s investment of < 5000 for 6 months is equivalent receives 10% of the net profit as salary. The remaining
to his investment of < (6 # 5000) =< 30000 profit is divided amongst Bharati, Chitra and Divya in
for 1 month and y ’s investment of < 6000 for the ratio 4 : 5 : 7. If Bharati gets < 117000, find the shares
10 months is equivalent to his investment of of Chitra and Divya.
< (10 # 6000) =< 60000 for 1 month. Hence, the


Sol :
profit-sharing ratio will be in the ratio 30000 :
60000 i.e., 1 : 2.
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be181

EXAMPLE 2.77 EXAMPLE 2.82

Avinash and Bharat start a business by investing < 200000 Manthan, Nakul and Omkar invested < 90000, < 140000
and < 300000 respectively. Find the share of each out of a and < 180000 respectively to start a online business on
total profit of < 24000. amazon. At the end of 2 years, they earned a profit of


Sol : < 164000. What will be Nakul’s share in the profit ?


Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be177
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be182
EXAMPLE 2.78
Dev and Dhurv invest < 360000 and < 450000 respectively EXAMPLE 2.83
in a business for 2 years. Find the ratio of their profit. Nathu and Omveer started a small poultry business


Sol : by investing < 20000 and < 25000 respectively. After 4
months, Omveer left and Satyendra joined by investing
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be178 < 15000. At the end of the year, there was a profit of
< 69000. What is Satyendra’s share in profit?


Sol :
EXAMPLE 2.79
Akrosh, Bhavya and Chandra invested < 260000, < 340000
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be183
and < 100000 respectively in a small business. At the end
of the year, they earn a profit of < 35000. Find Bhavya’s
share of profit. EXAMPLE 2.84


Sol : Reshama, Shruti and Triveni enter into a partnership to
strat a boutique. Reshama invested < 12000 for 4 months,
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be179 Shruti invested < 14000 for 8 months and Triveni invested
< 10000 for 10 months. They gain < 58500 altogether.
Find the share of each.
EXAMPLE 2.80


Sol :
Raheem, Satyendra and Trilok entered into a online
business in partnership with a capital of < 3 lakhs, < 4
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be184
lakhs and < 9 lakhs respectively. The business yields a
profit of < 5 lakhs in a year. If an amount of < 10000 per
month is paid towards the rent of the business premises
Page 28 Numerical Problems Chap 2

EXAMPLE 2.85 EXAMPLE 2.90

Simran started a home based business by investing Mukesh, Nitin and Prateek are partners in a retail shop.
< 75000. After six months, Nanda joined her with a capital Mukesh receives 35 of the total profit while Nitin and
of < 120000. After 3 years, they earned a profit of < 245000 Prateek share the remaining profit equally. Mukesh’s
. What was Simran’s share in the profit? profit is increased by < 15000 when the rate of profit


Sol : increases from 10% to 12% in a year. Find Nitin’s share
in the total profit.
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be185

Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be190

EXAMPLE 2.86
Bhairavi, Chavi and Jyotsana and entered in to a
partnership to start a home made food business. They EXAMPLE 2.91
invested < 15400, < 18200 and < 12600 respectively. Chavi Bhupesh begins a business with < 170000. After 2 months,
left after 6 months. If after 8 months, there was a profit of Suman joined him with a certain capital. At the end of
< 357000 then what is the share of Jyotsana in the profit? the year, the profits were divided in the ratio of 5 : 2. How


Sol : much did Suman invest?


Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be186
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be191

EXAMPLE 2.87
A, B, C hire a shed for < 2190. A puts in 10 cows for 20 EXAMPLE 2.92
day; B 30 cows for 8 days and C 16 cows for 9 days. Find Kishan, Lalit and Mahipal enter into partnership to start
the rent by each one of them. a restaurant. Kishan advances one-fourth of the capital


Sol : for one-fourth of the time; Lalit one-fifth of the capital for
one-half of the time; Mahipal the remaining of the capital
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be187 for the whole time. How should they divide a profit of
< 1710000 ?


Sol :
EXAMPLE 2.88
Four milkman hired a pasture. A grazed 18 cows for 4 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be192
months, B 25 cow for 2 months C 28 cows for 5 months
and D 21 cows for 3 months. If A’s share of rent is < 360,
then find total rent of the field. EXAMPLE 2.93


Sol : Mayank and Gaurav started a online catering buisness.
Mayank puts in < 60000 more than Gaurav in the
business. Gaurav has invested his capital for 5 months
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be188
while Mayank has invested his capital for 4 months. If the
share of Mayank is < 4800 more than that of Gaurav out
EXAMPLE 2.89 of the total profits of < 52800; find the capital invested
Dev, Gaurav and Hemant start a food processing business by each.
jointly. Twice the capital of Dev is equal is equal to thrice

Sol :
the capital of Gaurav and the capital of Gaurav is four
times the capital of Hemant. Find the share of Gaurav in Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be193
an annual profit of < 286000.


Sol :
EXAMPLE 2.94
Simran, Varsha and Zara started a event management
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be189
business. They agree to receive profit from their business
each in the proportion to their investments. Simran and
Chap 2 Numerical Problems Page 29

Varsha put back into the business their shares of the

profit each year but Zara does not. Initially, investment of 2. Ramesh and Somesh invest < 150000 and < 200000
Simran, Varsha and Zara is < 10000, < 20000 and < 60000 respectively in a business for 3 years. Find the ratio
respectively. If the profit for the first year is < 18000 and of their profit.
for the second year is < 20000, calculate the amount of Ans : 3 : 4
money each has in the business during the third year.


Sol :

3. Amar is a working partner and Bharat is a sleeping

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be194
partner in a business. Amar puts in < 50000 and
Bharat puts in < 60000. Amar receives 12 12 % of the
EXAMPLE 2.95 profits for managing the business and the rest is
Lavanya and Taniya start a pickle making business in divided in proportion of their capitals. What amount
partnership, their capitals being in the ratio 4 : 3. At the does each get out of a profit of < 8800 ?
end of 3 months, Lavanya takes out a sum equivalent to Ans : < 4600 and < 4200
1
4 th of his capital and at the end of another 3 months,
Taniya puts in a sum equivalent to what Lavanya took
out. If Taniya’s profit at the end of the year is < 20000
more than that of Lavanya, then find the amount of 4. Amar Bharat and Chandu start a business, each
profits of each, profits and losses being divided on the investing < 20000. After 5 months Amar withdrew
basis of average investment. < 5000, Bharat < 4000 and Chandu invested < 6000
more. At the end of the year, a total profit of < 69900


Sol :
was recorded. What is the share of Bharat and
Chandu ?
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be195
Ans : < 21200 and < 28200

EXAMPLE 2.96
Falak, Manu and Oorvi made a self help group and started
a papad making business. They have invested < 200000, 5. Ram starts a business with a capital of < 400000.
< 180000 and < 120000 respectively in the business. Falak After 3 months, he is joined by Wilson who brings in
and Manu receive respectively 12% and 8% of the annual < 600000 and at the end of another 3 months, Rahim
profits for services, the remaining being divided among joins with < 1000000. If the year’s profit is < 540000,
Falak, Manu and Oorvi in proportion to their capitals. At what is the profit of each partner, if they share profits
the end of the year Falak receives altogether < 6480 more in the ratio of effective capitals invested by them?
than Manu. Find what each receives. Ans : < 160, 000, < 180, 000 and < 200, 000


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/be196 6. Geeta, Seeta and Teena enter into partnership to
start a business. Geeta invests some money at the
beginning, Seeta invests double the amount after 6
months and Teena invests thrice the amount after 8
months. If the annual profit be < 27000, then find
Teena’s share.
E X ERC I S E 2.5 Ans : < 9000

1. Three partners Amar Akbar and Anthony invest

< 160000, < 180000 and < 230000 respectively in a 7. Geeta, Seeta and Teena enter into partnership to start
business. How should they divide a profit of < 39900 a boutique. Geeta receives 109 of the profit; and Seeta
after one year ? and Teena share the remaining profit equally. Geeta’s
Ans : < 11200, < 12600 and < 16100 income is increased by < 2700 when the profit rises
Page 30 Numerical Problems Chap 2

from 12% to 15%. Find the capital invested by Seeta

and Teena each?
Ans : < 5000 and < 5000

8. Four friends enter into a partnership to start a online

retail business. The second has twice as large capital
as the first, and the third as much as half the sum
of the capital of the first two and the fourth has a
sum equal to the capital of the others. Distribute the
total profits of < 1800000 amongst the partners in
proportion to the capital.
Ans : < 200, 000, < 400, 000, < 300, 000 and < 900, 000

9. Aarti, Bharati and Chitralekha enter into a partnership

with Aarti investing < 70000 for the whole year. In the
beginning Bharati invests < 40000 and after 8 months
she increases her capital to < 60000. In the beginning
Chitralekha invests < 50000 and after 6 months she
increases her capital to < 70000. In an annual profit of
< 53000, find the share of each.
Ans : < 21, 000, < 14, 000 and < 18, 000

10. Simran, Varsha and Zara started a event management

business. They agree to receive profit from their
business each in the proportion to their investments.
Simran and Varsha put back into the business their
shares of the profit each year but Zara does not.
Initially, investment of Simran, Varsha and Zara is
< 150, 000, < 300, 000 and < 900, 000 respectively. If
the profit for the first year is < 270, 000 and for the
second year is < 300, 000, calculate the amount of
money each has in the business during the third year.
Ans : < 217, 500, < 435, 000 and < 900, 000
Chap 3 Numerical Inequalities Page 31

CHAPTER 3

Numerical Inequalities

3.1 Introduction in one variable because x is the only one variable

The word inequality means a mathematical expression in present in the expression.
which the sides are not equal to each other. Basically, an Similarly, 2x + 3y $ 6 is a linear inequality in two
inequality compares any two values and shows that one variables because there are two variables x and y are
value is less than, greater than, or equal to the value on the present in the expression.
other side of the equation. One property of real numbers

Note
is that they have order. This order allows us to compare 4x2 + 2x + 5 < 0 is not an example of linear inequality in
numbers and decide if they are equal to each other or one one variable, because the exponent of x is 2 in the first
is greater or less than the other. term. It is a quadratic inequality.
To show the inequality of numbers we use a symbolic
notation:
(i) Less than : The < sign stands for “less than.” So, 3.3 Properties of Inequalities
4 < 10 is true. Further, x < 10 means x can be any
If a, b, c are any real numbers, then
number less than 10.
1. a > b or a = b or a < b . [Law of Trichotomy]
(ii) Greater than : The > sign stands for “greater than”.
2. If a > b and b > c , then a > c . [Law of Trichotomy]
So, 11 > 10 is true. Further, x > 11 means x can be
3. If a < b and b < c , then a < c .
any number greater than 11.
4. The sign of an inequality remains the same on adding
(iii) Or equal to : Sometimes we want to show an inequality
the same real number to each of its side.
that is not strictly greater or less than. We use the
Thus, if a, b and c are any real numbers, then
same symbol, but with an underline, to show that
the number might also be equal to the value we are a > b
comparing to. So 4 $ 4 is true, and so is 5 $ 4. So, a + c > b + c
x # 3 means that x can be any number less than or a < b
equal to 3.
a + c < b + c
5. The sign of an inequality remains the same on
subtracting the same real number from each of its
3.2 Types of inequalities
side.
1. Numerical Inequalities: If only numbers are involved Thus, if a, b and c are any real numbers, then
in the expression, then it is a numerical inequality. a > b
Example: 10 > 8 , 5 < 7 . a - c > b − c
2. Literal Inequalities: x < 2 , y > 5 , z < 10 are the
a < b
examples for literal inequalities.
3. Double Inequalities: 5 < 7 < 9 read as 7 less than 9 a - c < b − c
and greater than 5 is an example of double inequality. 6. Sing of an inequality does not change when both sides
4. Strict inequality: Mathematical expressions involve of the inequality are multiplied or divided by the same
only ‘<’ or ‘>’ are called strict inequalities. positive real number.
Example: 2x + 3 < 6 , 2x + 3y > 6 . Thus, if p > 0 , then a < b
5. Slack inequality: Mathematical expressions involve pa < pb and a < b .
p p
only ‘#’ or ‘$’ are called slack inequalities. and if p > 0 , then a > b
Example: 2x + 3 # 6 , 2x + 3y $ 6 .
pa > pb and a > b .
In the above examples, 2x + 3 < 6 is a linear inequality p p
Page 32 Numerical Inequalities Chap 3

7. Sign of an inequality is reversed when both sides of EXAMPLE 3.3

the inequality are multiplied or divided by the same Is there any real number a for which a < 0 ?
negative real number.

Sol :
Thus, if p < 0 , then a < b
pa > pb and a > b Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce103
p p
and if p < 0 , then a > b

pa < pb and a < b EXAMPLE 3.4

p p
1 4
8. If a > b > 0 , then 1 < 1 . Does > 7 hold?
a b 5 − 223
9. If a, b are positive real numbers such that a < b and if


Sol :
n is any positive rational number, then
(i) an < bn . (ii) a−n > b−n .
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce104
1 1
(iii) a < b .
n n

10. For any real number a , - a # a # a .

EXAMPLE 3.5
Remarks:
Using the inequality 17 > 8 , show that:
1. Equal numbers may be added to (or subtracted from)
(i) 22 > 13 (ii) − 3 > − 12
both sides of an inequality.


Sol :
2. Both sides of an inequality can be multiplied (or
divided) by the same positive number. But when both
sides are multiplied or divided by a negative number, Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce105
then the sign of inequality is reversed.
3. If both the sides of an inequality are either positive or
EXAMPLE 3.6
negative, then on taking their reciprocal, the sign of
inequality reverses. Using the inequality 18 > 8 , show that:
(i) 9 > 4 (ii) − 9 < − 4


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce106

EXAMPLE 3.7
Using the inequality 17 > 8 , show that:
(i) 7 > 4 (ii) − 7 < − 4


Sol :

EXAMPLE 3.1
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce107
If 7 > 5 , then − 7 > − 5 . Is it true?


Sol :
EXAMPLE 3.8

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce101 If 2 < 3 , then show that 29 < 45 .

4 4


Sol :

EXAMPLE 3.2 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce108

If 9 < 13 then 1 > 1 . Is it true?
9 13


Sol :
EXAMPLE 3.9
Using the equality 7 2 4 prove that.
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce102 (i) 30 2 21 (ii) - 44 1 - 32


Sol :
Chap 3 Numerical Inequalities Page 33

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce109

Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce116

EXAMPLE 3.10
Using equality 15 2 21 show that
(i) 28 1 52 (ii) - 40 2 - 70 EXAMPLE 3.17


Sol : If a # b, b # c and c # a , then a = b = c


Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce110
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce117
EXAMPLE 3.11
Using inequality 47 2 19 show that EXAMPLE 3.18
(i) 6 2 2 (ii) - 20 1 - 6
If p, q, r, s are positive real numbers such that p > q and


Sol :
r > s then show that pr > qs .


Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce111

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce118

EXAMPLE 3.12
For any real a, b, c, d, e : EXAMPLE 3.19
(i) If a > b # c = d < e , then is b < e true?
(ii) If d # a $ b > c , then is c > a true? If a < b and c < 0 , then show that a > b .
c c


Sol :

Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce112 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce119

EXAMPLE 3.13 EXAMPLE 3.20

If a > 0 , b < 0 such that a > b . Does a2 > b2 always hold? If m, n are positive real numbers, then show that m # n


Sol : if m2 # n2 .


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce113

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce120

EXAMPLE 3.14
EXAMPLE 3.21
If α < β then show that α − γ < β − γ where α, β, γ d R


Sol : If b > a > 0 and c > 0 , then show that a + c > a .
b+c b


Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce114
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce121

EXAMPLE 3.15
If a > b, c > 0 then show that ac > bc for a, b, c d R EXAMPLE 3.22


Sol : If m > n > 0 , then prove that mn lies between m and n .


Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce115
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce122

EXAMPLE 3.16
If a < b, c < 0 then show that ac > bc for a, b, c d R .
Page 34 Numerical Inequalities Chap 3

EXAMPLE 3.23
If a, b are rationales such that a < b , then prove that
a < a + b − a < b , there n is a natural number > 1.
n


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce123

EXAMPLE 3.24
If a d R , show that a2 $ 0 .


Sol : E X ERC I S E 3 . 1
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce124 1. Using the inequality 23 > 9 , show that:
(i) 34 > 20 (ii) 10 > − 4
Ans : Proof
EXAMPLE 3.25
If p > q and r < s then p − r > q − s 6p, q, r, s d R


Sol : 2. Using the inequality 24 > 8 , show that:
(i) 12 > 4 (ii) − 6 < − 2
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce125 Ans : Proof

EXAMPLE 3.26
p q 3. Using the inequality 16 > 7 , show that:
If p > q > 0 and 0 < r < s , then > 6p, q, r, s d R . (i) 8 > 5 (ii) − 8 < − 5
r s


Sol : Ans : Proof

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce126

4. Using the inequality 4 < 5 , show that 49 81
4 < 4 .
EXAMPLE 3.27 Ans : Proof
If m < n then show that 1 > 1 for m > 0 , n > 0 ,
m n


Sol :
5. Using the inequality 4 < 5 , show that 13 < 21 .
Ans : Proof
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce127

EXAMPLE 3.28 6. Using the inequality 8 > 5 , show that 30 > 21 .

If m < n then show that 1 > 1 for m < 0 , n < 0 , Ans : Proof
m n


Sol :

7. Using the inequality 9 > 6 , show that − 22 < − 16 .

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce128
Ans : Proof

EXAMPLE 3.29
If m < n then show that 1 < 1 for m < 0 , n > 0
m n


Sol :
3.4 Linear inequalities
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce129 Inequalities ax + b 1 0 , ax + b 2 0 , ax + b # 0 , ax + b $ 0 when
a ! 0 , are called Linear inequalities of one variable x . Here
Chap 3 Numerical Inequalities Page 35

a and b are constant quantities. Inequalities ax + by 1 0 is obtained.

, ax + by 2 0 , ax + by # 0 , ax + by $ 0 when a ! 0 , b ! 0 are 4. The common solution set is the solution of the given
called linear inequalities of two variables x and y . system of inequalities.

3.4.1 Solution Of Inequalities

EXAMPLE 3.30
Solution of an inequality of single variable, is the value of Solve 24x 1 100 , then
that variable, for which it is justified. Solving an inequality (i) x is a natural number.
is the process of finding all the possible solutions of an (ii) x is an integer.
inequality.

Sol :
Solution Set :
A set of all the possible solutions of an inequalilty, is called Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce130
the solution set.

EXAMPLE 3.31
3.4.2 Interval
Solve - 12x 2 30 , when
If variable x can accept only those values which are (i) x is a natural number.
elements of set X , then set X is known as domain of x (ii) x is an integer.
. If the domain of x is the set then x d X . In most of

Sol :
applications the domain of our variables will be interval of
numbers as following:
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce131
Open Interval:
If variable x is such that its value lies between two fixed
numbers a and b then "x | a 1 x 1 b , is called the open EXAMPLE 3.32
interval. It is symbolically represented as @a, b 6 or Solve 5x - 3 1 7 , When
^a, b h .
Both a and b are not included in this. (i) x is an integer.
(ii) x is a real number.
Semi Open Interval:


Sol :
"x | a # x 1 b , is called semi-open interval. It consists of a
and numbers between a and b but not b . It is represented
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce132
by 6a, b 6
Similarly, "x | a 1 x # b , is also a semi-open interval. It
consists of all numbers between a & b including b but a is EXAMPLE 3.33
not contained in it. Symbolically it is represented as @a, b@. Solve 3x + 8 2 2 , when
This interval is also know s semi-closed interval. (i) x is an integer.
Closed Interval : (ii) x is a real number.
The interval "x | a # x # b , which consists of both a and

Sol :
b and numbers between a & b is called closed Interval. It is
represented by 6a, b@. Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce133

3.4.3 System of Linear Inequalities in One Variable

EXAMPLE 3.34
We have seen that the solution of an inequality will be the Solve the inequality 3x + 5 1 x − 7 when
set of all those values, that satisfies for a real value. So, (i) x is a natural number.
the solution of system is the set that has been found on the (ii) x is an integer.
intersection of the sets given as the solution of different (iii) x is a real number.
inequalities given in the system. Following is the process

Sol :
used to solve the given set of equations.
1. System of linear inequalities is taken.
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce134
2. The solution set of given inequalities is obtained
differently and represented on a number line.
3. With the help of number line the common solution set
Page 36 Numerical Inequalities Chap 3

EXAMPLE 3.35

Sol :

Solve for real x : 4x + 3 1 5x + 7


Sol : Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce142

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce135

EXAMPLE 3.43
Solve for real x : x 2 x + 1
2 2
EXAMPLE 3.36
Solve for real x : 5x - 3 $ 3x - 5

Sol :

Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce143
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce136
EXAMPLE 3.44
3 ^x - 2h 5 ^2 - x h
EXAMPLE 3.37 Solve for real x : #
5 3
Solve for real x : 3 ^1 − x h 1 2 ^x + 4h


Sol :


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce144

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce137

EXAMPLE 3.45
EXAMPLE 3.38
Solve for real x : 1 b 3x + 4 l $ 1 ^x − 6h
Solve for real x : 3x - 7 2 5x - 1 2 5 3


Sol :


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce145

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce138

EXAMPLE 3.46
EXAMPLE 3.39
Solve for real x : 2 ^2x + 3h − 10 1 6 ^x − 2h
Solve for real x : 3x − 2 1 2x + 1


Sol :


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce146

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce139

EXAMPLE 3.47
EXAMPLE 3.40
Solve for real x : 37 − ^3x + 5h $ 9x − 8 ^x − 3h
Solve for real x : 3 ^x - 1h # 2 ^x - 3h


Sol :


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce147

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce140

EXAMPLE 3.48
EXAMPLE 3.41
^5x - 2h ^7x - 3h
Solve for real x : 3 ^2 - x h $ 2 ^1 - x h Solve for real x : x 1
3
-
5
4


Sol :

Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce141 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce148

EXAMPLE 3.42 EXAMPLE 3.49

Solve for real x : x + x + x 1 11
2 3 ^2x - 1h ^3x - 2h ^2 - x h
Solve for real x : $ -
3 4 5
Chap 3 Numerical Inequalities Page 37

Sol : EXAMPLE 3.56

3 ^x − 2h
Solve for real x : 2x + 3 − 2 1
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce149 5 5


Sol :

EXAMPLE 3.50 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce156

^5x - 2h ^7x - 3h
Solve for real x : x $ -
2 3 5


Sol : EXAMPLE 3.57
Solve for real x : 2x + 3 − 3 2 x − 4 − 2
4 3
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce150


Sol :

EXAMPLE 3.51 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce157

3 ^x - 2h 5 ^2 - x h
Solve for real x : $
5 3


Sol : EXAMPLE 3.58
Solve for real x : 6x - 1 1 8
1-x
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce151


Sol :

EXAMPLE 3.52 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce158

Solve for real x : x + 3 $ 1
x+5


Sol : EXAMPLE 3.59
Solve for real x : 2 x − 3 + 3 x − 4 $ 4
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce152

Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce159

EXAMPLE 3.53
Solve for real x : 2 ^2x + 3h − 10 # 6 ^x − 2h


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce153 E X ERC I S E 3 . 2

1. Solve for real x :
EXAMPLE 3.54 (i) x − 3 > 0 (ii) x + 5 # 0
x+4 x−2
Solve for real x : 5x - 2 - 7x - 3 2 x
3 5 4 Ans : (i) (- 3, - 4) , (3, 3) (ii) [- 5, 2]


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce154

2. Solve for real x :
(i) 2 # 3x - 4 # 5 (ii) 6 #− 3 (2x − 4) < 12
EXAMPLE 3.55 Ans : (i) (2, 3] (ii) (0, 1]
Solve for real x : 4 + 2x $ x − 3
3 2


Sol :
3. Solve for real x : - 3 # 4 - 7x # 18 .
2
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce155 Ans : [- 4, 2]
Page 38 Numerical Inequalities Chap 3

3x - 4 3.5 Application of inequalities

4. Solve for real x : 2 # 5
12
Linear inequalities with one variable are applied to
Ans : : 18 , 18 D
19 29
solve many problems. These are vastly used in the field
of engineering, economics, science etc. Some of these
applications are mentioned in the following examples.
2x − 1
5. Solve for real x : x−1 > 2
Ans : ( 34 , 1) , (1, 3) EXAMPLE 3.60
Ravin obtained 70 and 75 marks in first two unit tests.
Find the minimum marks he should get in the third test
to have an average of at least 60 marks.
x+3 +x
6. Solve for real x : > 1.

Sol :
x+2
Ans : (- 5, - 2) , (- 1, 3)
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce160

7. Solve the following system of inequations : EXAMPLE 3.61

3x − 7 > 2 (x − 6) and 6 − x > 11 − 2x To receive grade A in a course, one must obtain an average
Ans : (5, 3) of 90 marks or more in five examination (each of 100
marks). If Sunita’s marks in first four examinations are
87, 92, 94 and 95, find minimum marks that Sunita must
obtain in fifth examination to get grade A in the course.
8. Solve the following system of inequations :
4x − 9 < x − 11 and x − 5 $ 2x + 7 .

Sol :

Ans : (- 3, - 12]
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce161

9. Solve the following system of inequations : EXAMPLE 3.62

2x − 3 + 6 $ 2 + 4x and 2 (2x + 3) − 10 < 6 (x − 2). Find the pairs of consecutive odd positive integers both
4 3
of which are smaller than 10 such that their sum is more
Ans : φ than 11.


Sol :

10. Solve the following system of inequations : Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce162

x $ 1 and 6x < 1 .
2x + 1 4 4x − 1 2
Ans : φ EXAMPLE 3.63
Find all pairs of consecutive even positive integers, both of
which are larger than 5 such that their sum is less than 23.


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce163

EXAMPLE 3.64
The longest side of a triangle is 3 times the shortest side
and the third side is 2 cm shorter than the longest side.
If the perimeter of triangle is at least 61 cm, find the
minimum length of the shortest side.


Sol :
Chap 3 Numerical Inequalities Page 39

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce164 the range of the selling price be for Sanjay to get at least
enough money to pay off his mortgage?


Sol :
EXAMPLE 3.65
A man wants to cut three length’s from a single piece of
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce169
board of length 91 cm. The second length is to be 3 cm
longer than the shortest and the third length is to be twice
as long as the shortest. What are the possible lengths of EXAMPLE 3.70
the shortest board if the third piece is to be at least 5 cm Shalvi is shopping for a new car. In addition to the price
longer than the second? of the car, there is an 8% GST and a Rs 6880 road tax.


Sol : If Shalvi decides that she will spend less than Rs 400,000
total, then what is the price range for the car?
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce165

Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce170

EXAMPLE 3.66
Find all pairs of consecutive even positive integers, both
of which are greater than 10, such that their sum is less EXAMPLE 3.71
than 50. Shivani made a score of 76 on her midterm exam. For her


Sol : to get a grade B in the course, the average of her midterm
exam and final exam must be between 80 and 89 inclusive.
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce166 What possible scores on the final exam would give Shivani
a grade B in the course?


Sol :
EXAMPLE 3.67
In drilling world’s deepest hole, it was found that the
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce171
temperature T in degree Celsius, x km below the surface
of earth, was given by
T = 30 + 25 ^x − 3h, 3 1 x 1 15 EXAMPLE 3.72
At what depth will be temperature be 200cC and 300cC ? Satish and Ramchandra both drive parcel delivery trucks
for United Express. Satish averages 20 mph less than


Sol :
Ramchandra. In fact, Satish is so slow that in 5 hours
he covered fewer miles than Ramchandra did in 3 hours.
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce167 What are the possible values for Satish’s rate of speed?


Sol :
EXAMPLE 3.68
Lavanya plans to spend less than Rs 5000 on an electric Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce172
dryer, including the 9% GST and a Rs 640 setup charge.
In what range is the selling price (without GST) of the
dryer that she can afford? EXAMPLE 3.73
The water temperature in a certain manufacturing process


Sol :
must be kept at 143°F. The computer is programmed to
shut down the process if the water temperature is more
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce168 than 7° away from what it is supposed to be. For what
temperature readings is the process shut down?
EXAMPLE 3.69

Sol :
Sanjay owns a piece of land on which he owes Rs 127,600
to a bank. He wants to sell the land for enough money Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce173
to at least pay off the mortgage. The real estate agent
gets 6% of the selling price, and his city has a Rs 4000
real estate transfer tax paid by the seller. What should EXAMPLE 3.74
Research at a major university has shown that identical
Page 40 Numerical Inequalities Chap 3

twins generally differ by less than 6 pounds in body weight. Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce177
If Lav weighs 127 pounds, then in what range is the weight
of her identical twin brother Kush?
EXAMPLE 3.78


Sol :
CBSE head quarter in Delhi can rent a copy machine for 5
years from Digital Business Supply for Rs 750 per month
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce174
plus 60 paisa per copy. The same copier can be purchased
for Rs 80000, but then it costs only 20 paisa per copy for
EXAMPLE 3.75 supplies and maintenance. The purchased copier has no
The function C = 0.00004x + 2 gives the cost in Rs value after 5 years.
per km for operating a company car and the function (i) Write a formula for the 5-year cost under each plan.
V = 200000 − 2x gives the value of the car, where x is the (ii) Find the number of copies for which the 5-year costs
number of km on the odometer. would be equal.
(i) A car is replaced if the operating cost is greater than (iii) If CBSE makes 120,000 copies in 5 years, which plan
Rs 4 per km and the value is less than Rs 120,000. For is cheaper and by how much?
what values of x is a car replaced? (iv) For what range of copies do the two plans differ by
(ii) If the company replaces any car for which the operating less than Rs 500?
cost is greater than Rs 4 per km or the value is less

Sol :
than Rs 120,000, then for what values of x is a car
replaced? Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce178


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce175

E X ERC I S E 3 . 3
EXAMPLE 3.76
The function S = 20 + 0.1x gives the amount of oil in 1. A man wants to cut three lengths from a single piece
millions of barrels per day that will be supplied to a small of board 95 cm. The second length is to be 3 cm longer
country and the function D = 30 − 0.5x gives the demand then the shortest, and third length is to be twice as
for oil in millions of barrels per day, where x is the price long as shortest. What are the possible length for the
of oil in dollars per barrel. shortest board if the third piece is to be at least 4 cm
(i) The president worries if the supply is less than 22 longer than the second.
million barrels per day or if demand is less than 15 Ans : 7 # x # 23
million barrels per day. For what values of x does the
president worry?
(ii) The country will be in recession if the supply of oil
2. In the first four papers each of 100 marks Reena got 90,
is greater than 23 million barrels per day and the
75, 73 and 85 marks. If she wants to have an average
demand is less than 14 million barrels per day. For
of grater than or equal to 75 marks and less than 80
what values of x will the country be in recession?
marks, find the range of marks she should score in


Sol :
fifth paper.
Ans : 52 # x 1 77
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ce176

EXAMPLE 3.77 3. The marks scored by Anshika in two test were 65 and
Trying to break his smoking habit, Virat calculates that he 70. Find the minimum marks she should scored in
smokes only three full cigarettes a day, one after each meal. third test to have an average of at least 60 marks.
The rest of the time he smokes on the run and smokes Ans : 45
only half of the cigarette. He estimates that he smokes the
equivalent of 5 to 12 cigarettes per day. How many times
a day does he light up on the run? 4. A solution is to be kept between 68c F and 77c F .


Sol : What is the range of the temperature in degree Celsius
Chap 3 Numerical Inequalities Page 41

(C) if the Celsius/Fahrenheit (F) conversion formula road tax. If Shalvi decides that she will spend less
is given by F = 95 C + 32 ? than Rs 800,000 total, then what is the price range for
Ans : Between 20c F and 25c F . the car?
Ans : Rs 728000

5. A solution of 8% boric acid is to be diluted by adding

a 2% boric acid solution to it. The resulting mixture is

******
to be more that 4% but less than 6% boric acid. If we
have 640 litres of the 8% solution, how many litres of
the 2% solution will have to be added ?
Ans : 2 % boric acid solution must be more than 320
litres but less than 1280 litres.

6. How many litres of water will have to be added to

1125 litres of the 45% solutions of acid so that the
resulting mixture will contain more than 25% but less
than 30% of acid content?
Ans : More than 562.5 litres and less than 900 litres
of water need to be added.

7. IQ of a person is given by the formula IQ = MA # 100

CA
where MA is mental age and CA is chronological
age. If 80 # IQ # 140 for a group of 12 years old.
Children, find the range of their mental age.
Ans : Minimum MA is 9.6 and maximum is 16.8.

8. The water acidity in a pool is considered normal when

the average pH reading in three daily measurements
is between 8.2 and 8.5. If the first two pH readings
are 8.48 and 8.35, find the range of pH value of the
third reading that will result in the acidity level being
normal.
Ans : The third pH value lies between 7.77 and 8.67.

9. A solution of 9% acid is to be diluted by adding 3%

acid solution to it. The resulting mixture is to be more
than. 5% but less than 7% acid. If there is 460 litres
of the 9% solution, how many litres of 3% solution will
have to be added?
Ans : Hence the required amount to be added is
more than 230 litres and less than 920 litres.

10. Lavanya is shopping for a new car. In addition to the

price of the car, there is an 8% GST and a Rs 13760
Page 42 Matrix Chap 4

CHAPTER 4

Matrix

4.1 Introduction general, a m # n matrix is written as

R V
System of linear equations occur in several areas of Sa11 a12 a13 f a1n W
important technical and scientific applications. The Sa21 a22 a23 f a2n W
A = S W
importance of linear system has led to the development of Sf f f f f W
numerous methods for their solution. Sam1 am2 am3 f amnW
T Xm#n
It can be written in compact form as A = 6aij@m # n ,
Systems of linear simultaneous equations can be
expressed in matrix form and then converted as a single
where 1 # i # m ; 1 # j # n and i, j ! N . The number
equation, and it is partly for this reason that matrices are
of elements in m # n matrix is equal to mn .
so valuable in applications to engineering and science. It
The element aij is the i th row and j th column, and it
is called ^i, j hth element.
is also used in numerous applications other than system
of equations, in fields such as business, economics, and
psychology, as well as in scientific and technical areas. Note :
Let p be a prime number. Since, p = 1 # p = p # 1.
Thus possible orders of a matrix having p elements are
4.2 Matrices 1 # p and p # 1.
A matrix (plural matrices) is an ordered rectangular array
(i.e., arrangement or display) of numbers or functions, EXAMPLE 4.1
such as If a matrix has 18 elements, what are the possible orders
it can have ? What if it has 5 elements ?
2 y 7
A = >
x 8 0H


Sol :

Matrices are represented by capital letters like A, B

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de101
, C , etc. The elements of a matrix are always enclosed in
the bracket 6 @ or parenthesis ^ h.

Element of Matrix
EXAMPLE 4.2
The numbers or functions in a matrix are called elements or R 3 5 19 − 7V
S W
entries of the matrix. The elements in the above examples Consider the matrix A = S 35 − 2 34 12W. Write
are 2, y , 7, x , 8 and 0. SS 3 1 − 5 17WW
(i) order of the matrix, T X
Row and Column of Matrix (ii) number of elements in the matrix,
A horizontal line of elements is called row of the matrix and (iii) elements a13 , a21 , a 33 , a24 , a23 .
a vertical line of elements is called column of the matrix.

Sol :
The matrix in above example has 2 rows and 3 columns.
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de102
4.2.1 Order of a Matrix

A matrix having m rows and n columns is called a matrix

of order m # n or simply m # n matrix (read as m by n EXAMPLE 4.3
matrix). Construct a 3 # 4 matrix A = 6aij@, whose elements are
given by aij = i .
The matrix in the above example has order 2 # 3 . In j
Chap 4 Matrix Page 43

Sol : elements a11, a22, ..., ann is called the principal diagonal of
6aij@. The elements a11, a22, ..., ann are called the diagonal
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de103 elements of square matrix 6aij@ n # n .

Illustration
R V
S1 4- 3W
EXAMPLE 4.4
Matrix S4 6 7 W is a square matrix, because number
Construct a 2 # 3 matrix B = 6bij@, whose elements are SS W R V
2 88W S1 4W
given by bij = 1 i − 3j . T
of rows and X
columns are equal. S4 6W is not a square
2


Sol : SS WW
2 8
matrix, because number of rows andTcolumns
X are not equal.
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de104
4.3.5 Diagonal Matrix
A square matrix is called a diagonal matrix if all its non-
EXAMPLE 4.5 diagonal elements are zero. A diagonal matrix 6aij@ of order
Construct a 3 # 4 matrix whose elements are given by aij n # n is usually written as diag ^a11, a22, ..., ann h.
i + j if i $ j
= *1 Illustration
2 _i − j i if i < j
. R V
S4 0 0W
Matrix S0 - 2 0W is a 3 # 3 diagonal matrix. This


Sol : SS W
0 0 6W
X also be written as diag 64, - 2, 6@.
diagonal Tmatrix can
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de105
4.3.6 Scalar Matrix

4.3 Type of Matrices A square matrix is called a scalar matrix if all its non-
diagonal elements are zero and all diagonal elements equal.


Illustration
4.3.1 Zero (or Null) Matrix R V
S4 0 0W
A matrix is called a zero matrix if all its elements are zero. Matrix S0 4 0W is a scalar matrix of order 3 # 3 .
For example, 60 0 0@ is a zero matrix of order 1 # 3 . A SS
0 0
W
4W
zero matrix is denoted by O . T X

4.3.7 Unit Matrix

4.3.2 Row Matrix
A square matrix is called a unit matrix if all its non-
A matrix is called a row matrix if it contains only one row.
For example, 61 5 4 3@ is a 1 # 4 row matrix and [4] is a
diagonal elements are zero and all diagonal elements unity.
A unit matrix is also known as an identity matrix.
1 # 1 row matrix.
Illustration
1 0
4.3.3 Column Matrix >0 1H is a unit matrix of order 2 # 2 . This matrix is
A matrix is called a column matrix if it contains only one
R V
S1W denoted by I2 .
column. For example, S4W is a 3 # 1 column matrix. Illustration
SS2WW R V
T X S1 0 0W
I 3 = S0 1 0W is a unit matrix of order 3 # 3 .
4.3.4 Square Matrix SS W
0 0 1W
A matrix is called a square matrix if the number of rows T X
and columns in the matrix are equal. A square matrix Note :
having n rows (or columns) is called a square matrix of Every identity matrix and null square matrix is a scalar
order n or an n -square. matrix. matrix and every scalar matrix is a diagonal matrix.
In the square matrix 6aij@ n # n , the line containing
Page 44 Matrix Chap 4

4.3.8 Triangular Matrices a22 and b22 of A and B .

There are two types of triangular matrices:

Sol :
(a) Upper Triangular Matrix : A square matrix is called
an upper triangular matrix if all its elements below Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de108
the principal diagonal are zero. Thus, 6aij@ m # n is an
upper triangular matrix if (i) m = n and (ii) aij = 0
for i > j .
R V
Sa11 a12 a13W
For example, S 0 a22 a23W is an upper triangular
SS W
matrix. 0 0 a 33W
(b) Lower Triangular T MatrixX : A square matrix
is called a lower triangular matrix if all its
elements above the principal diagonal are zero.
Thus, 6aij@ m # n is a lower triangular matrix if
(i) m = n and (ii) aij = 0 for i < j .
R V EXAMPLE 4.9
Sa11 0 0 W
Construct a 2 # 3 matrix whose elements aij are given by
For example, Sa21 a22 0 W is a lower triangular matrix.
SS W (i) aij = 2i − 3j (ii) aij = i $ j
a 31 a 32 a 33W
T X

Sol :

4.3.9 Equal Matrices Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de109

Two matrices are called equal if the matrices are of same
order and their corresponding elements are equal. Thus,
the matrices 6aij@ m # n and 6bij@ p # q are equal if
(a) m = p , EXAMPLE 4.10
(b) n = q and Construct a 3 # 2 matrix A, whose elements are given by
(c) aij = bij 6i, j . (6 means for all) ^i + 2 j h2
aij =
a b 4 0 3 y 2
For example, the matrices > H and >
6 7 zH
are equal

Sol :
c x 6
if a = 0 , b = 3 , y = 4 , c = 6 , x = 7 , z = 6 . Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de110

EXAMPLE 4.6
A is a matrix of the type 3 # 5 and R is a row of A, then
what is the type of R as a matrix ? EXAMPLE 4.11
R V R V


Sol : Sx + y + z W S9W
Find the value of x , y and z if S x + z W = S5W.
SS W S W
y + z W S7W
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de106 T X T X


Sol :
EXAMPLE 4.7
If a matrix has 12 elements, what are the possible orders Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de111
it can have ? What, if it has 7 elements ?


Sol :

EXAMPLE 4.12
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de107 Find the values of a , b, c and d from the matrix equation:
a − b 2a + c −1 5
>2a − b 3c + d H = > 0 13H

EXAMPLE 4.8

Sol :

3 7 −1 7 9 0
Let A = > H and B = >
3 − 5 6H
. Find the sum of
0 2 5
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de112
Chap 4 Matrix Page 45

EXAMPLE 4.13 EXAMPLE 4.18

R V R V
2x + y 4x 7 7y − 13 S x + 3 z + 4 2y − 7W S 0 6 3y − 2W
If > H =>
y x+6 H
, find the values of x and y .
5x − 7 4x If S4x + 6 a − 1 0 W = S 2x − 3 2c + 2W,
SS WW SS W
b − 3 3 b z + 2c 2b + 4 − 21 0 W


Sol : T X T X
Find the values of a , b, c , x , y and z .


Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de113
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de118

EXAMPLE 4.14
For what values of x and y are the following matrices
EXAMPLE 4.19
equal ?
Write the number of all possible matrices of order 2 # 2
2x + 2 y2 + 2 x + 4 3y
A = > H , B =>
5 − 6H
with each entry 1, 2 or 3.
2
5 y − 5y

Sol :


Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de119
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de114

EXAMPLE 4.20
EXAMPLE 4.15 What is the number of all possible matrices of order 3 # 3
Can you find the values of x and y so that the matrices with each entry 0 or 1 ?
3x + 7 5 0 y-2
> y + 1 2 − 3x H and >8 4 H may be equal ?

Sol :

Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de120
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de115

EXAMPLE 4.16
xy 4 8 w
If > H =>
0 6H
, find the values of x , y , z and w .
z+6 x+y


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de116

EXAMPLE 4.17
Find x , y , a and b if E X ERC I S E 4 . 1
3x + 4y 6 x − 2y 2 6 4
> a + b 2a − b − 3 H = >5 − 5 − 3H 1. For a 2 # 2 matrix A = [aij ], whose elements are given
by aij = ij , write the value of a12


Sol :
Ans : 12

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de117

2. If A is a 3 # 3 matrix, whose elements are given by

aij = 13 − 3i + j , then write the value of a23 .
Ans : 1
Page 46 Matrix Chap 4

3. Construct a 2 # 2 matrix A = [aij ], whose elements 4.4 Algebra of matrices

(i + j) 2
are given by aij =
2 4.4.1 Addition of Matrices
2 92
Ans : > 9 H Let A = 6aij@ m # n and B = 6bij@ m # n be two matrices of same
2 8
order, then we define sum of matrices A and B as A + B
= 6aij + bij@ m # n .
4. If a matrix has 8 elements, what are the possible In simple words, A + B is a matrix obtained by
orders it can have? adding the corresponding elements of matrices A and B .
Ans : 1 # 8 ,8 # 1,2 # 4 ,4 # 2
Note:
If A and B are not of same order, then A + B is not
defined.
5. Construct a 3 # 4 matrix, whose elements are given
by aij = 2i − j
R1 0 - 1 - 2V

Illustration
S W
1 −1
A = >
2 0H
Ans : S3 2 1 0W
SS5 4 Let ,
3 2WW
T X
4 −1
B = >
1 − 2H
x − y z −1 4
6. If > H =>
0 5H
find the value of x + y
2x − y w
3 5 3
C = >
0 1 2H
Ans : 3 and

1 −1 4 −1
A + B = > H +>
1 − 2H
Then,
2 0
7. Find the values of a ,b,c and d from the following
1 + 4 −1 − 1 5 −2
=> H =>
3 − 2H
equation:

2a + b a − 2b −1 5 2+1 0−2
>5c − d 4c + 3d H = > 0 13H But, A + C is not defined as A and C are not of same
Ans : a = 1,b = 2 ,c = 3 ,d = 4 order. Also, B + C is not defined as B and C are not of
same order.
Properties of Matrix Addition
2a − b c 0 4 The addition operation on matrices has the following
8. If > H =>
− 1 5H
, then find a ,b,c and d properties:
a −b d
Ans : a = 3 ,b =− 11 ,c = 13 ,d = 65 1. Matrix Addition is Commutative
5 5 19 19
If A and B are two matrices of same order, then
A + B = B + A.
a 3a − b 3 2
>2a + c 3c − d H = >4 7H,
PROOF :
Let A = 6aij@ and B = 6bij@ be two matrices of same order,
9. If then find the
values of a ,b,c and d . then
Ans : a = 3, b = 7 ,c =− 2 ,d =− 13 A + B = 6aij@ + 6bij@
= 6aij + bij@

= 6bij + aij@

10. Find the values of a ,b,c and d from the equation:
[Addition of real numbers is commutative]
a − b 2a + c −1 5
>2a − b 3c + d H = > 0 13H = 6bij@ + 6aij@

= B+A

Ans : a = 1, b = 2 , c = 3 , d = 4
2. Matrix Addition is Associative
If A, B and C are three matrices of same order, then
A + ^B + C h = ^A + B h + C .
Chap 4 Matrix Page 47

PROOF :
Let A = 6aij@, B = 6bij@ and C = 6cij@ be three matrices of 3 5 3
C = >
0 1 2H
same order, then and
A + ^B + C h = 6aij@ + ^6bij@ + 6cij@h
1 −1 4 −1
A - B = > H −>
= 6aij@ + 6bij + cij@ 1 − 2H
Then,
2 0
= 6aij + ^bij + cij h@
1 − 4 −1 + 1 −3 0
=> H =>
= 6^aij + bij h + cij@ 1 2H

2−1 0+2
[Addition of real numbers is associative]
But A - C is not defined as A and C are not of same
= 6aij + bij@ + 6cij@
order. Also, B - C is not defined as B and C are not of
= ^6aij@ + 6bij@h + 6cij@
same order.
= ^A + B h + C

3. Existence of Additive Identity 4.4.3 Scalar Multiplication
The null matrix is the additive identity for matrix addition. Let us now understand the operation of multiplication of
a matrix by a scalar.
Let A = 6aij@ m # n be a matrix and let k be a scalar (i.e.,
PROOF :
Let A = 6aij@ be a m # n matrix and let O be the m # n
null matrix, then real or complex number), then we define multiplication of
matrix A by a scalar k as kA = 6k aij@ m # n . In simple words,
A + O = 6aij@ + 6Oij@ = 6aij + 0@ = 6aij@ = A ,
kA is a matrix obtained by multiplying each element of A
O + A = 6Oij@ + 6aij@ = 60 + aij@ = 6aij@ = A by scalar k .
So, A + O = A = O + A Illustration
1 −1
A = >
2 0H
4. Existence of Additive Inverse Let .
For every matrix A = 6aij@, there exists a unique matrix
− A = 6− aij@ such that A + ^− Ah = O = ^− Ah + A . The 1 −1
2A = 2 >
2 0H
Then,
matrix - A is called the additive inverse of the matrix A.
2 ^1 h 2 ^− 1h 2 −2
=> H =>
4 0H
PROOF :
Let A = 6aij@ be a m # n matrix, then
2 ^2h 2 ^0h
A + ^− Ah = 6aij@ + 6− aij@ = 6aij − aij@ = O , Properties of Scalar Multiplication
^− Ah + A = 6− aij@ + 6aij@ = 6− aij + aij@ = O The scalar multiplication operation on matrices has the
So, A + ^− Ah = O = ^− Ah + A following properties:
Let A = 6aij@ and B = 6bij@ be matrices of same order.
4.4.2 Difference of Matrices Let k and l be two scalars, then
Let A = 6aij@ m # n and B = 6bij@ m # n be two matrices of same 1. k ^A + B h = kA + kB
order, then we define difference of matrices A and B as PROOF :
A - B = 6aij − bij@ m # n . We have, k ^A + B h = k ^6aij@ + 6bij@h
= k 6aij + bij@
In simple words, A - B is a matrix obtained by

subtracting the elements of B from the corresponding
elements of A. = 6k ^aij + bij h@

= 6k aij + k bij@

Note:
If A and B are not of same order, then A - B is not = 6k aij@ + 6k bij@

defined. = k 6aij@ + k 6bij@

= kA + kB

^k + l h A = kA + l A
Illustration :
2.
1 −1
A = >
2 0H
PROOF :
Let ,
^k + l h A = ^k + l h6aij@
We have,
B = >
4 −1 = 6^k + l h aij@
1 − 2H

Page 48 Matrix Chap 4

= 6kaij + laij@
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de125
= 6kaij@ + 6laij@

= k 6aij@ + l 6aij@

= kA + l A
EXAMPLE 4.26
x2 2x 7
If > 2H + 2 > H = 3 > H, find the values of x and y .
y 3y −3


Sol :
EXAMPLE 4.21
2 4 −2 5
If A = > H and B = > , then find ^3A - B h.
3 2 3 4H Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de126

Sol :

EXAMPLE 4.27
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de121 3 4 1 y 7 0
If 2 > H + > H = > , find ^x - y h.
5 x 0 1 10 5H


Sol :
EXAMPLE 4.22
2 3 1 2 3 1
Let A = > H , B => H , C = > H. Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de127
0 −1 −1 0 2 0

Verify that A + ^B + C h = ^A + B h + C


Sol : EXAMPLE 4.28
Find the value of x + y from the following matrix equation:
x 5 3 −4 7 6
2>
7 y − 3H >1 2 H >15 14H
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de122 + =

Sol :

EXAMPLE 4.23
1 2 3 0 −1 5 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de128
If A = > H and B = >
2 3 − 4H
, find 2A - 3B .
2 3 1


Sol :
EXAMPLE 4.29
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de123
x y x 6 4 x+y
Given 3 > H => H +>
z+w 3 H
,
z w − 1 2w

EXAMPLE 4.24 find the values of x , y , z and w .

If A = diagonal 61, - 2, 5@ and B = diagonal 63, 0, - 4@,

Sol :
then find 3A - 2B .


Sol : Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de129

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de124

EXAMPLE 4.30
Find the value of k , a non-zero scalar, if
EXAMPLE 4.25 2016 1 2 3 1 0 2 4 4 10
2> H + k> H = >
4 2 14H

0 3 0 4a −1 −3 2 3 4 5
If A = > H and kA = >
− 8 5bH
, then find the values
2 −5


Sol :
of k , a and b.


Sol : Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de130
Chap 4 Matrix Page 49

EXAMPLE 4.31 E X ERC I S E 4 . 2

Show that, if A, B and C are three matrices of the same
order, then B = C & A + B = A + C . 1 2 3 3 −1 3
1. If A = > H and B = >
2H
, then find


Sol : 2 3 1 −1 0
2A - B
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de131 -1 5 3
Ans : >
5 6 0H

EXAMPLE 4.32
5 2 3 6
2. Find X and Y , if X + Y = > H and X − Y = >
0 − 1H
Show that, if A, B and C are three matrices such that
0 9
A + B = A + C , then B = C .
4 4 1 −2
Ans : X = > H, Y = >
0 5H


Sol :
0 4
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de132

R V R V
S8 0 W S 2 − 2W
3. If A = S4 − 2W and B = S 4 2 W, then find
EXAMPLE 4.33 SS3 6 WW SS− 5 1 WW
Find a matrix A such that 2A − 3B + 5C = O , where B T 2AX + 3X = 5B T X
−2 2 0 2 0 −2 X such that
=> H and C = >
7 1 6H
R V
. S- 2 - 3 W
10
3 1 4
Ans : S 4 14 W
3


Sol : S 31 W
S- 3 - 73 W
T X
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de133 3 4 1 y 7 0
4. If 2 > H + > H = >
10 5H
, find (x - y).
5 x 0 1
Ans : 10
EXAMPLE 4.34
If X and Y are 2 # 2 matrices, then solve the following
matrix equations for X and Y : 5. Find the value of x + y from the following equation:
2 3
2X + 3Y = > H
x 5 3 −4 7 6
2> H +> H =>
15 14H

4 0 7 y−3 1 2
−2 2 Ans : 11
3X + 2Y = >
1 − 5H

Sol :
a c 1 −1 3 5
6. If 2 > H + 5> H = 3 > H, then find a, b,
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de134 b d 0 2 4 6
c and d
Ans : a = 2 , b = 6 , c = 10 , d = 4

4.5 Multiplication of Matrices

Let A = 6aij@ m # n and B = 6b jk@ n # p be two matrices, then we
define multiplication of matrices A and B as AB = 6cik@ m # p
, where cik is obtained by first taking the element-wise
products of elements of i th row of A and k th column of B ,
and then adding such products.
Page 50 Matrix Chap 4

Note : For every square matrix A, there exists an identity matrix

1. If the order of A and B are m # n and n # p of same order such that IA = AI = A .
respectively, then the order of AB is m # p . 4. Matrix Multiplication is not Commutative in General
2. The product AB is defined only if the number of For any two matrices A and B , if both AB and BA
columns of A is equal to the number of rows of B . are defined, it is not necessary that AB = BA . (i.e.,
3. In the product AB , the matrix A is called pre- Commutativity may hold in some cases, but may not hold
multiplier matrix and the matrix B is called post- in some other.)
multiplier matrix.
Illustration :
4. If AB is defined, then BA need not be defined.
1 2 3 0
A = > H and B = >
− 1 5H
5. If A and B are square matrices of same order, then
(i) Let
both AB and BA are defined. 0 4
Illustration 1 2 3 0 1 10
AB = > H >
0 4 − 1 5H >− 4 20H
Then, =
5 −1 4 2
A = >
− 2 0H
Let and B = > H
3 6 3 0 1 2 3 6
BA = > H > H =>
− 1 18H
2#2 2#2 and
c11 c12 −1 5 0 4
AB = 6cik@ 2 # 2 = >
c21 c22H
Then,
So, AB ! BA
To evaluate c11 (i.e., entry in first row and first column): 1 0 3 0
(ii) Let A = > H and B = > H
5 -1 4 2 ^5 h^4h + ^− 1h^3h * 17 * 0 4 0 5
>- 2 0H >3 6H = > * *
H =>
* *H 1 0 3 0 3 0
AB = > H > H = >
0 20H
Then,
0 4 0 5
To evaluate c12 (i.e., entry in first row and second column):
* ^5 h^2 h + ^− 1h^6 h
3 0 1 0 3 0
BA = > H > H = >
0 20H
5 -1 4 2 * 4
>- 2 0H >3 6H = >* H => H
and
0 5 0 4
* * *
To evaluate c21 (i.e., entry in second row and first column): So, AB = BA
5 -1 4 2 * * * * It can be observed from above example (ii) that
>- 2 0 H >3 6H = > − 2 4 + 0 3 *H = >− 8 *H
^ h^ h ^ h^ h
multiplication of diagonal matrices of same order will be
commutative.
To evaluate c22 (i.e., entry in second row and second
column): 5. Zero Matrix as the Product of Two Non-zero Matrices
5 -1 4 2 * * * * For real numbers, we have:
>- 2 0 H >3 6H = >* − 2 2 + 0 6 H = >* − 4H
^ h^ h ^ h^ h
Let a , b be any two real numbers. If ab = 0 , then
either a = 0 or b = 0 .
17 4
AB = >
− 8 − 4H
Thus, This result need not hold for the matrices. For
matrices, we have the following:
If the product of two matrices is a zero matrix, then
4.5.1 Properties of Matrix Multiplication it is not necessary that one of the matrices is a zero matrix.
The matrix multiplication operation on matrices has the Illustration
following properties: 0 2 −1 3
A = > H and B = >
0 0H
Let
1. Matrix Multiplication is Associative 0 1
For any three matrices A, B and C , we have ^AB h C = A ^BC h Then, both A and B are non-zero matrices, but
, whenever both sides of above equality are defined. 0 2 −1 3 0 0
AB = > H > H => H= O
2. Matrix Multiplication is Distributive Over Matrix 0 1 0 0 0 0
Addition
For any three matrices A, B and C , we have
A ^B + C h = AB + AC EXAMPLE 4.35
and ^A + B h C = AC + BC Compute AB and BA, whichever exists, in each of the
whenever both sides of above equality are defined. following cases:
1 2 3 1 −2
(i) A = > H and B = >
2 3H
3. Existence of Multiplicative Identity
2 3 1
Chap 4 Matrix Page 51

EXAMPLE 4.39
R V R V
S1 2W S1 2 2W
4 5 6
(ii) A = >
0 1 2H
and B = S1 0W If A = S2 1 2W, then prove that A2 − 4A − 5I = O .
SS W SS W
1 2W 2 2 1W
T XR V T X
S2W

Sol :
(iii) A = 81 − 1 − 2B and B = S4W
SS WW
0 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de139
T X


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de135 EXAMPLE 4.40

2 3
If A = >
2H
, then prove that A3 − 4A2 + A = O .
1

EXAMPLE 4.36

Sol :

Evaluate the following:
3 3 1 2 1 3 5 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de140
(i) * > H + > H 4 >
1 4 1 1 2 4 6H
R V
S1 - 1W 1 0 2 0 1 2 EXAMPLE 4.41
(ii) S0 2 W * > H 3 0 2H 4
-> R V
SS WW 4 0 1 S0 1 0W
2 3
T X If A = S0 0 1W, then prove that A3 = aI + bA + cA2 .
SS W
R V a b cW
Sa W T X
Sb W c
(iii) 8a b c dB S W + 8a bB > H


Sol :
Sc W d
Sd W Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de141
R T X VR V
S1 0 2W S 2 W
(iv) 81 2 3B S2 0 1W S 1 W
SS WS W
0 1 2W S- 3W EXAMPLE 4.42
T XT X
2 3 1 0
If A = >
2H


Sol : and I = > H, then find a and b so that
1 0 1
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de136
A2 = aA + bI .


Sol :

EXAMPLE 4.37 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de142

4 2
If B = > , then prove that ^B − 3I h^B − 2I h = O .
− 1 1H


Sol :
EXAMPLE 4.43
a 0 1 0
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de137 If A = > H and B = > H, then find the value(s) of a ,
1 1 5 1

if exist, for which A2 = B .

Sol :
EXAMPLE 4.38
1 4 0 1
If A = > H and B = >
− 1 2H
, then find 3A2 − 5B + 7I . Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de143
3 2


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de138

Page 52 Matrix Chap 4

EXAMPLE 4.44

Sol :

1 0
Solve the matrix equation 6x 1@ >
- 2 0H
= O for x .
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de149


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de144 EXAMPLE 4.50

0 0
If A = >
0H
, then find (i) A20 , (ii) A35 .
2


Sol :
EXAMPLE 4.45
R VR V
S1 0 2W Sx W Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de150
If 8x - 5 - 1B S0 2 1W S4W = O , find x .
SS WS W
2 0 3W S1W
T XT X


Sol :
EXAMPLE 4.51
i 0
If A = >
iH
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de145 , then find A19 .
0


Sol :

EXAMPLE 4.46 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de151

2 −2
If matrix A = >
−2 2 H
and A2 = pA , then write the value
of p.


Sol : EXAMPLE 4.52
R V
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de146 Sa 0 0W
If A = S0 a 0W, then find An .
SS W
0 0 aW


Sol : T X
EXAMPLE 4.47
R V Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de152
S2 3 1W
If A = S− 1 0 2 W and f ^x h = x2 − 5x + 7 , then find f ^Ah.
SS W
1 1 − 1W


Sol : T X

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de147

EXAMPLE 4.48
2 3
If A = >
− 1 2H
, then show that A is a root of the

polynomial f ^x h = x2 − 4x + 7 .


Sol : E X ERC I S E 4 . 3
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de148 R2 - 3V
3 -1 3 S W
1. Compute the product > HS1 0W
-1 0 2 S
S3 1WW
14 - 6
Ans : >
4 5H
T X
EXAMPLE 4.49
−5 −3
Show that the matrix B = >
− 12 − 7H
is a root of the
2
equation B + 12B − I = O .
Chap 4 Matrix Page 53

Ra h g VRx V
S WS W Ans : proof
2. Find the product 8x y z BSh b f WSy W
SSg f c WWSSz WW
T XT X
Ans : 6ax2 + by2 + cz2 + 2hxy + 2fyz + 2gzx @1 # 1
R 2 V R V
Sa ab acW S 0 c − bW
10. If A = Sab b2 bcW and B = S− c 0 a W,
S 2W SS b − a 0 WW
Sac bc c W
T
then show that BA =X O 3 # 3 $ T X
1 2
3. If A = > H, then show that A2 − 3I = 2A Ans : proof
2 1
Ans : Proof

R1 2 3VR- 1 1 0V R- 1 1 0VR1 2 3V
S WS W S WS W
4. Show that : S0 1 0WS 0 - 1 1W ! S 0 - 1 1WS0 1 0W 4.6 Transpose of Matrices
SS1 1 0WWSS 2 3 4WW SS 2 3 4WWSS1 1 0WW
T XT X T XT X Let A be a matrix of order m # n . The n # m matrix
Ans : Proof
obtained from A by interchanging its rows and columns is
called the transpose of A and is denoted by Al or by AT .
Thus, if A = 6aij@ m # n , then transpose of A, i.e.,
Al is given by 6b ji@ n # m , where b ji = aij , 1 # i # m and
1 # j # n . The ^ j, i h th element of Al is equal to ^i, j h th
R 1 − 4 1V
3 2 4 5 6 S W
5. If A = > H, B = > H and C = S− 2 5 − 3W. verify element of A.
1 0 0 1 2 SS 3 6 5WW
T X Note:
that (AB) C = A (BC).
Ans : 1. A is an m # n matrix, Al is n # m matrix.
2. ^i, j h th element of A, ^i, j h th element of Al.

Illustration:
R 1 3 2VR1V
S WS W R V
6. Find x , if 81 x x BS 2 5 1WS2W = O S2 3 6 8W
SS15 3 2WWSSx WW Let A = S5 − 3 − 7 4W, then transpose of A is the 4 # 3
SS W
T XT X 9 8 2 1W
Ans : - 2 , - 14 T X
R V
S2 5 9W
S3 - 3 8W
JR 0 6 7V R0 1 1VNR 2 V matrix S W. The rows (respectively columns) of Al
KS W S WOS W S6 - 7 2W
7. Evaluate: KS− 6 0 8W + S1 0 2WOS− 2W S8 4 1W
KSS 7 − 8 0WW SS1 2 0WWOSS 3 WW T X
R10V LT X T XPT X are the columns (respectively rows) of the matrix A.
S W
Ans : S20W
SS28WW
T X
EXAMPLE 4.53
R2 0 1V Find the transpose of the following matrices:
S W R V
8. If A = S2 1 3W, then find the value of A2 − 3A + 2I S5W
SS1 − 1 0WW (i) 81 2 6B (ii) S9W
RT1 - 1 X- 1V SS WW
0
S W T X
Ans : S 3 - 3 - 4W 2 3 5 8 -7 6
(iii) > H (iv) >
SS- 3 2 0 WW 0 8 2 3 - 1 0H
T X
R1 0 2V

Sol :
S W
9. If A = S0 2 1W, prove that A3 − 6A2 + 7A + 2I = O
SS2 0 3WW Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de153
T X
Page 54 Matrix Chap 4

4.7 Properties of Transpose and order of Bl = p # n

1. ^All
h = A , where A is any matrix. Order of BlAl = p # m
Thus ^AB hl and BlAl are of same order.
Al = 6c ji@ n # m and Bl = 6dk j@ p # n
PROOF :
Let A be m # n matrix. Let
Then Al is a n # m matrix. Now c ji = ai j and dk j = b jk
Then ^Alhl is a m # n matrix. For 1 # i # m , 1 # k # p ,
Then A and ^Alhl are of same order. ^k, i h th element of ^AB hl ^i, k h th element of AB
For 1 # i # m , 1 # j # n , n n n

^i, j h th element of ^Alhl = ^ j, i h th element of Al

= aij b jk = c ji dk j =
/ / /d kj c ji
j=1 j=1 j=1

= ^i, j h th element of A
= ^k, i h th element of BlAl

Thus ^Alhl = A Thus ^AB hl = BlAl
2. ^A + B hl = Al + Bl, where A and B are matrices of Property (4) is known as the reversal law for the
the same order. transpose of the product.
PROOF :

Let A = 6aij@ m # n and B = 6bij@ m # n

Then A + B is a matrix of order m # n . EXAMPLE 4.54
Then ^A + B hl is a matrix of order n # m . 2 1 9 0
If A = >
5H
Al and Bl are matrices of order n # m each and B = > H, then verify that:
3 6 8
Thus Al + Bl is a matrix of order n # m .
and ^A + B hl and Al + Bl are of same order. (i) ^Allh = A (ii) ^A + B hl= Al + Bl
For 1 # i # m , 1 # j # n , (iii) ^kAhl= kAl (iv) ^AB hl= BlAl
^ j, i h th element of ^A + B hl

Sol :
= ^i, j h th element of A + B
= ^i, j h th element of A + ^i, j h th element of B
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de154
= ^ j, i h th element of Al + ^ j, i h th element of Bl

= ^i, j h th element of Al + Bl
^A + B hl = Al + Bl
EXAMPLE 4.55
Thus
If matrix A = 61 2 3@, write AAl where Al is the transpose
3. ^kAhl = kAl, where A is any matrix and k is any
of matrix A.
number.


Sol :
PROOF :

Let A = 6aij@ m # n
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de155
Now kA = k 6aij@ = 6kaij@
For 1 # i # m , 1 # j # n ,
^ j, i h th element of ^kAhl = ^i, j h th element of kA

EXAMPLE 4.56
= k # ^i, j h th element of A −1 5 3 −2
If A = >
3 2H
and B = >
= k # ^ j, i h th element of Al 5 4H
, verify that

= ^ j, i h th element of kAl
(i) ^2Ahl= 2Al (ii) ^A + B hl= Al + Bl
Thus ^kAhl = kAl (iii) ^AB hl= BlAl
4. ^AB hl = BlAl, where A and B are matrices for which


Sol :
AB is defined.
PROOF :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de156
Let A = 6aij@ m # n and B = 6b jk@ n # p
Order of AB = m # p
and order of ^AB hl = p # m
Order of Al = n # m
Chap 4 Matrix Page 55

EXAMPLE 4.57 EXAMPLE 4.62

R V R V
S− 1W S 0 a bW
If A = S 2 W and B = 6− 2 − 1 − 4@, Find 1 ^A + Alh and 1 ^A - Alh, when A = S− a 0 cW.
SS WW 2 2 SS W
3 − b − c 0W
T X T X
verify that ^AB hl = BlAl.

Sol :


Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de162
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de157

EXAMPLE 4.63
R V
EXAMPLE 4.58 S0 2y z W
R V
S1 2 2 W Find the values of x , y , z if the matrix A = Sx y − z W
SS W
If A = S2 1 − 2W is matrix which satisfies AAt = 9I 3 , obeys the law AlA = I . x −y z W
SS W T X
a 2 b W

Sol :
T X
then find the values of a and b.


Sol : Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de163

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de158

E X ERC I S E 4 . 4
EXAMPLE 4.59
R V R1 2VW
S 3 4W −1 2 1 S
If Al = S− 1 2W and B = >
1 2 3H
, verify that 1. If A = S3 4W, verify that (Al)l = A .
SS WW SS5 6WW
0 1
T X Ans : T X
(i) ^A + B hl= Al + Bl (ii) ^A − B hl= Al − Bl


Sol :
R3 2 4V
S W
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de159 2. If A = S2 1 1W, verify that (5A)l = 5Al.
SS1 3 5WW
T X
Ans :
EXAMPLE 4.60
R V
S3W
Verify that ^AB hl= BlAl, where A = S 1 W, B = 61 − 5 7@ 4 0 2 4
SS WW 3. If A = > H and B = > H, then find:
−2 0 6 1 0
T X


Sol : (i) Al + Bl (ii) (A + B)l.
Verify (A + B)l = Al + Bl.
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de160
6 1 6 1
Ans : (i) > H (ii) > H
4 6 4 6

EXAMPLE 4.61 R 1V
2 3 1 0 −1
Verify that ^AB hl= BlAl, where A = > H, B = >
2 1 3H
S W
4 1 4. If A = S− 5W and B = 83 1 − 2B , then verify that
SS 7WW


Sol : T X
(AB)l = BlAl.
Ans :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de161
Page 56 Matrix Chap 4

R V R4 1 0V
S1 − 1 0W S W Illustration:
5. If A = S2 1 3W and B = S2 − 3 1W, then verify that R V
SS4 1 8WW SS1 1 − 1WW S3 5 9 W
Let A = S5 6 7 W is a symmetric matrix, because
T X T X SS W
(A + B)l = A + Bl. 9 7 11W
Ans : T X
a12 = a21 = 5 , a13 = a 31 = 9 , a23 = a 32 = 7 .
In a symmetric matrix, there is no restriction on
R− 2 3 4V elements on the principal diagonal.
S W The following matrices are symmetric matrices:
6. For matrix A = S 5 − 4 − 3W, find 1 (A - Al), R
R
V S4 3 6 9 W
V
SS 7 2 9WW 2
4 1 S- 5 6 9W S3 5 2 - 5W
T
where Al is the transpose X matrix A.
of the >1 5H, S 6 0 5W, S6 2 10 - 7W
R V SS W
9 5 3W SS W
S0 - 1 - 2 W
3
T X 9 - 5 - 7 0 W
Ans : S1 0 - 52 W T X
S3 5 W
S2 2 0W
T X

R− 1V EXAMPLE 4.64
S W Prove that the necessary and sufficient condition for the
7. If A = S 2W and B = 8− 2 − 1 − 4B , verify
SS 3WW matrix A to be symmetric is that Al = A .
T X

Sol :
that (AB)l = BlAl.
Ans :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de164

3 4
4.9 Skew-Symmetric matrix
8. If A = > H, find A + Al, where Al is the
2 3 A square matrix A = 6aij@ is said to be a skew-symmetric
transpose of matrix A. matrix if its ^i, j h th element is the negative of its ^ j, i h th
6 6
Ans : > H element, i.e., aij =− a ji 6i, j .
6 6 Illustration:

R V
R5 0V S 0 9 − 6W
−1 3 0 S W A = S− 9 0 8 W is a skew-symmetric matrix, because
9. If A = > H and B = S0 3W, verify that SS W
−7 2 8 SS1 − 8WW 6 −8 0 W
T X
(AB)l = BlAl. T X a12 =− a21 = 9 , a13 =− a 31 =− 6 , a23 =− a 32 = 8 ,
Ans :
a11 =− a11 = 0 , a22 =− a22 = 0 , a 33 =− a 33 = 0
In a skew-symmetric matrix, we have

1 2 2 5 4 3 aij =− a ji 6i, j
10. Given A = > H, B=> H and C = > H, Thus in particular, aii =− aii 6i
2 3 3 1 4 1
show that (ABC)l = C lBlAl. 2aii = 0 6 i
Ans : i.e., aii = 0 6 i
Therefore all the elements on the principal diagonal
of a skew-symmetric matrix must be zero.
The following matrix are skew-symmetric matrices:
R V
R V S 0 2 -3 7 W
S0 6 - 5W S
0 5 - 2 0 9 - 8W
4.8 Symmetric Matrix >- 5 0H, S- 6 0 17 W, S 3 - 9 0 5 W
SS W
5 - 17 0 W SS W
A square matrix A = 6aij@ is said to be a symmetric matrix T X - 7 8 - 5 0 W
if its ^i, j h th element is the same as its ^ j, i h th element, T X
i.e., aij = aij 6i, j .
Chap 4 Matrix Page 57

EXAMPLE 4.65 matrix.

Prove that the necessary and sufficient condition for a

Sol :
matrix A to be skew-symmetric is that Al =− A .


Sol : Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de170

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de165

EXAMPLE 4.71
R V
S4 3 7W
EXAMPLE 4.66 Express S6 5 - 8W as the sum of a symmetric matrix
2 4 SS W
If A = >
6H
1 2 6W
, show that: T X
5
and a skew-symmetric matrix.
(i) A + Al is symmetric.


Sol :
(ii) A - Al is skew-symmetric.


Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de171

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de166

EXAMPLE 4.72
4 1
If A = >
8H
EXAMPLE 4.67 , show that A + AT is a symmetric matrix,
5
Show that a matrix which is both symmetric as well as
where AT denotes the transpose of matrix A.
skew-symmetric is a null matrix.


Sol :


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de172

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de167

EXAMPLE 4.73
EXAMPLE 4.68 1 4
Show that positive odd integral powers of a skew-symmetric If A = > H, show that A - AT is skew-symmetric matrix,
3 7
matrix are skew-symmetric and positive even integral
powers of a skew-symmetric matrix are symmetric. where AT is the transpose of the matrix A.


Sol :

Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de168 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de173

EXAMPLE 4.69 EXAMPLE 4.74

R V
If A and B are symmetric matrices of the same order, S 0 1 − 1W
then show that AB is symmetric if and only if A and B Show that the matrix, A = S− 1 0 1W, is a skew-
SS W
commute i.e., AB = BA . symmetric matrix. 1 − 1 0W
T X


Sol :

Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de169 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de174

EXAMPLE 4.70 EXAMPLE 4.75

R V
Prove that every square matrix is uniquely expressible S 0 2b − 2W
as the sum of a symmetric matrix and a skew-symmetric (i) Matrix A = S 3 1 3 W is given to be symmetric,
SS W
3a 3 − 1W
T X
Page 58 Matrix Chap 4

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de179

find the values of a and b.

R V
S − 2 x − y 5W
(ii) If the matrix S 1 0 4W is symmetric, find the EXAMPLE 4.80
SS W
x + y z 7W If A is a square matrix and P is any square matrix of
T X order equal to that of A, prove that PlAP is symmetric
values of x , y and z . or skew-symmetric according as A is symmetric or skew-


Sol : symmetric.


Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de175
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de180

EXAMPLE 4.76
R V
S 0 1 − 2W EXAMPLE 4.81
(i) For what value of x , is the matrix A = S− 1 0 3 W a If a matrix is both symmetric and skew-symmetric, then
SS W
skew-symmetric matrix ? x −3 0 W show that it is a null matrix.
T X
R V

Sol :
S0 a 3 W
(ii) If the matrix S2 b - 1W is skew-symmetric, find the
SS W Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de181
c 1 0W
T X
values of a , b and c .


Sol :
EXAMPLE 4.82
If A, B are symmetric matrices of same order, prove that
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de176
AB - BA is a skew-symmetric matrix.


Sol :

EXAMPLE 4.77 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de182

If A is any square matrix, prove that AAl is symmetric.


Sol :

EXAMPLE 4.83
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de177
If A and B are square matrices of same order, then prove
that ABl - BAl is a skew-symmetric matrix.


Sol :
EXAMPLE 4.78
If A, B are square matrices of equal order and B is Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de183
symmetric, then show that AlBA is also symmetric.


Sol :

EXAMPLE 4.84
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de178
Show that all positive integral powers of a symmetric
matrix are symmetric.


Sol :
EXAMPLE 4.79
If A, B are square matrices of equal order and B is a skew- Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de184
symmetric matrix, then write whether the matrix ABAl is
symmetric or skew-symmetric.


Sol :
Chap 4 Matrix Page 59

EXAMPLE 4.85 2 4
R V 5. Define a symmetric matrix. Prove that for A = > H
S 0 a bW 5 6
Find 1 ^A + Alh and 1 ^A - Alh, where A = S− a 0 cW. t t
A + A is a symmetric matrix where A is the transpose
2 2 SS W
− b − c 0W of A.
T X


Sol : Ans :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de185

2 3
6. If A = > H, prove that A - AT is a skew- symmetric
4 5
matrix.
EXAMPLE 4.86 Ans :
Express the following matrix as the sum of a symmetric
matrix and a skew-symmetric matrix and verify your
result:
R V

******
S 3 - 2 - 4W
S 3 - 2 - 5W
SS W
-1 1 2 W
T X


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/de186

E X ERC I S E 4.5
−1 5
1. If A = >
3 7H
, determine whether A + A' is symmetric
or skew-symmetric
Ans : symmetric

5 −1
A=>
− 2 6H
2. If , determine whether A - AT is
symmetric or skew-symmetric
Ans : Skew-symmetric

0 6 − 5x
3. If the matrix > 2
x x+3H
is symmetric, find the value(s)
of x
Ans : 1, - 6

R 1 − 1 5V
S W
4. Show that matrix A, where A = S− 1 2 1W, is a
symmetric matrix. SS 5 1 3WW
Ans : T X
Page 60 Determinants Chap 5

CHAPTER 5

Determinants

5.1 Introduction 5.2.1 Rows

Determinants have many important applications. They The series of elements in the horizontal lines from left to
can be used to determine the area of a triangle, to verify right in a determinant are called rows of the determinant.
whether the given three points are collinear, to find the Different rows of the determinant are denoted by
equation of line passing through three collinear points, to R1, R2, R 3, .....
solve a system of simultaneous linear equations, etc. In In above determinant a11, a12 are the elements of the
this chapter, we shall discuss the concept of determinants first row R1 whereas a21, a22 are the elements of the second
in detail and study some of its applications. row R2 .

5.2.2 Columns
5.2 Determinants
The series of elements in the vertical lines of from top
Consider the two simultaneous homogeneous linear to bottom in a determinant are called columns of the
equations determinant. Different columns of the determinant are
a11 x + a12 y = 0 ...(1) denoted by C1, C2, C 3, .....
In above determinant a11, a21 are the elements of the
and a21 x + a22 y = 0 ...(2)
first column C1 whereas a12, a22 are the elements of the
From eqn. (1), we have
second column C2 .
a11 x =− a12 y

x =− a12 ...(3) 5.2.3 Order of the Determinant

y a11 A determinant having n row and n columns is called
Also, from eqn. (2), we have determinant of n th order.
a12 x =− a22 y a11 a12 a13
x =− a22 ...(4) Thus, a21 a22 a23

y a21 a 31 a 32 a 33
Hence, from eqns. (3) and (4), we get is an example of third order determinant.
- a12 =− a22
a11 a21
5.2.4 Notation
a11 a22 - a12 a21 = 0 Generally, a determinant is denoted by T or D .
This result can also be written as
a11 a12
= 0 5.2.5 Constituents of Principal Diagonal
a21 a22
The series of quantities (or elements) in the diagonal line
Hence, it is clear that
from left hand top corner to right hand bottom corner
a11 a12 are called the elements or constituents of the principal
= a11 a22 − a12 a21 ...(5)
a21 a22 diagonal. In the above third order determinant a11, a22, a23
The expression on the LHS of eqn. (5) is called a are the elements of the principal diagonal.
determinant, which has a definite numerical value. The
letters a11, a12, a21, a22 are called the constituents or elements
of the determinant.
Chap 5 Determinants Page 61

5.3 Second order Determinant EXAMPLE 5.6

What positive value of x makes the following pair of
Consider a determinant of second order, determinants equal ?
a11 a12 2x 3 16 3
,
a21 a22 5 x 5 2
Its value is a22 - a21 a12 , where a11, a22 are the elements

Sol :
of principal diagonal.
Value of the second order determinant Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee106
= Product of the elements of principal diagonal

- Product of the remaining elements. EXAMPLE 5.7
3 y 3 2
Let = . Find the possible values of x and y if
x 1 4 1
EXAMPLE 5.1
2 -3 x , y are natural numbers.
Find the value of the determinant .
4 9


Sol :


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee101 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee107

EXAMPLE 5.2 EXAMPLE 5.8

2 −1 0 4
If A = > H and B = >
− 1 7H
1 log b a , find the determinant of
Find the value of the determinant . 3 2
log a b 1


Sol :
the matrix 3A2 - 2B .


Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee102

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee108

EXAMPLE 5.3
-3 1
Evaluate the determinant :
5 6 5.4 Third order Determinants

Sol : Consider the three simultaneous homogeneous linear

equations.
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee103 a1 x + b1 y + c1 z = 0 ...(1)
a2 x + b2 y + c2 z = 0 ...(2)
EXAMPLE 5.4 a 3 x + b 3 y + c 3 z = 0 ...(3)
x + 3 −2 From eqns. (2) and (3) by cross multiplication
If x ! N and = 8 , find the value of x . x y z
− 3x 2x = = = k (say)


Sol : b2 c3 - b3 c2 a3 c2 − a2 c3 a3 c2 − a2 c3
x = k (b2 c 3 − b 3 c2)
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee104 y = k (a 3 c2 − a2 c 3)4 ...(4)

z = k (a2 b 3 − a 3 b2)
EXAMPLE 5.5 where, k ! 0 (because if k = 0 , then x = 0 , y = 0 , z = 0 ).
x - 2 -3 Putting the values of x, y and z from eqn. (4) in eqn (1),
If = 3 , find the value of x . we get
3x 2x


Sol : ka1 (b 2 c 3 − b 3 c 2) + kb1 (a 3 c 2 − a 2 c 3) + kc1 (a 2 b 3 − a 3 b2) = 0
a1 (b2 c 3 − b 3 c2) − b1 (a2 c 3 − a 3 c2) + c1 (a2 b 3 − a 3 b2) = 0
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee105 b2 b3 a2 a3 a2 a3
a1 − b1 + c1 = 0
c2 c3 c2 c3 b2 b3
Page 62 Determinants Chap 5

This result can also be written as

a1 b 1 c 1 with respect to the determinant (A) of third order.
a2 b 2 c 2 = 0 ...(5) Similarly,
a3 b3 c3 A12 = (− 1) 1 + 2 M12 =− M12 = M12
The expression on the L.H.S of eqn. (5) is called the a21 a23
determinant of third order. =−

a 32 a 33
Hence, A11 = M11 , A12 =− M12 , A13 = M13
5.5 Minors and cofactors A21 =− M21 , A22 = M22 , A23 =− M23
and A 31 = M 31 , A 32 =− M 32 , A 33 = M 33 .
5.5.1 Minor
The minor of any constituent (or element) is the determinant 5.6 Expansion of a Determinant
obtained by omitting from the original determinant, the
row and column to which it belongs.
a11 a12 5.6.1 Expansion of a Determinant of Second Order
Let T = ...(1)
a21 a22 a11 a12
be a determinant of second order, then minor of the Let T = be a given determinant of second order.
a21 a22
constituent a11 is Then the minors of the constituents a11, a12, a21, a22 are
M11 = a22 M11, M21, M22 respectively. The cofactors of a11, a12, a22 are
Similarly, minor of the constituent a12 is A11, A12, A21, A22 respectively.
M12 = a21 M11 = a22 , M12 = a21 , M21 = a12 , M22 = a11
Minor of the constituent a21 is A11 = a22 , A12 =− a21 , A21 =− a12 , A22 = a11
M21 = a12 Now expanding with respect to R1
and minor of the constituent a22 is
a11 a12
M22 = a11 T =
a21 a22
a11 a12 a13
= a11 a22 − a21 a12

Again, let T = a21 a22 a23 ...(2)
a 31 a 32 a 33 = a11 M11 − a12 M12

be a determinant of third, then minor of the constituent T = a11 A11 + a12 A12
a11 is Similarly, T =− a21 M21 + a22 M22
a22 a23 T = a21 A21 + a22 A22 .
M11 =
a 32 a 33
Minor of the constituent a12 is 5.6.2 Expansion of a Determinant of Third Order
a21 a23 a11 a12 a13
M12 =
a 31 a 33 Let T = a21 a22 a23
Minor of the constituent a13 is a 31 a 32 a 33
a21 a22 be a given determinant of third order. Then,
M13 = etc.
a 31 a 32 a22 a23 a21 a22 a21 a22
T = a11 − a12 + a3
a 32 a 33 a 31 a 32 a 31 a 32
5.5.2 Cofactor
If an element aij is located at i th row and j th column of [expanding with respect to R1 ]
the determinant, then the cofactor Aij of aij is the minor = a11 M11 − a12 M12 + a13 M13

of (− 1) i + j aij T = a11 A11 + a12 A12 + a13 A13
i+j
Thus, Aij = (− 1) Mij Hence, we see that the value of the determinant
Hence, A11 = (− 1) 1+1
M11 = M11 is equal to the sum of the products of the respective
constituents of the first row with their corresponding
a22 a23
= cofactors and this is true for every row and every column.
a 32 a 33
Chap 5 Determinants Page 63

Similarly, the expansion of the determinant with EXAMPLE 5.13

respect to the first column will be 3 7 13
T = a11 A11 + a21 A21 + a 31 A 31 Evaluate - 5 0 0 .
0 11 2
= a11 M11 − a21 M21 + a 31 M 31

a22 a23 a12 a13 a12 a13

Sol :
= a11
− a21 + a 31
a 32 a 33 a 32 a 33 a22 a23
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee113
Similarly, the expansion of the determinant with
respect to the other rows or column is possible as :
EXAMPLE 5.14
T = a21 A21 + a22 A22 + a23 A23 , [wrt second row]
2 3 -5
and T = a13 A13 + a23 A23 + a23 A23 [wrt third column] etc. Evaluate the determinant 7 1 - 2 :
-3 4 1


Sol :
EXAMPLE 5.9
In the determinant
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee114
3 -3 4
3 2 -2 ,
-1 1 1
EXAMPLE 5.15
find the cofactors of the elements 3, 3, - 1 and hence find R V
S1 0 1W
the value of the determinant.
If A = S0 1 2W, then show that 3A = 27 A .


Sol : SS W
0 0 4W
T X


Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee109

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee115

EXAMPLE 5.10
-1 2 3
Write all the cofactors of 2 - 3 1 . EXAMPLE 5.16


Sol : 3 -1 1 x2 x 1
Find the integer value(s) of x if 0 2 1 = 28 .
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee110 3 1 4


Sol :

EXAMPLE 5.11 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee116

1 2
Find the all cofactors of the determinant .
-1 -3


Sol : EXAMPLE 5.17
There are two values of x which make determinant ∆
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee111 1 −2 5
= 2 x − 1 = 86 , find the sum of these numbers.
0 4 2x
EXAMPLE 5.12


Sol :
0 2 0
What is the value of the determinant 2 3 4 ?
4 5 6 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee117


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee112 5.7 Area of Triangle

Let A ^x1, y1h, B ^x2, y2h and C ^x 3, y 3h be any three points in
the XY -plane. Consider the following determinant,
Page 64 Determinants Chap 5

x1 y1 1 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee120

1
∆ = x 2 y 2 1
2
x3 y3 1
EXAMPLE 5.21
= 1 7x1 ^y2 − y 3h − y1 ^x2 − x 3h + ^x2 y 3 − x 3 y2hA Using determinants, show that the points ^a, b + c h,
2
^b, c + a h and ^c, a + b h are collinear.
Then,


Sol :
1. Area of triangle with vertices A, B and C = ∆ sq.
units.
2. Points A, B and C are said to be collinear, if ∆ = 0 . Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee121
(It is called condition of collinearity of three points.)
EXAMPLE 5.22
5.7.1 Collinear Point Using determinants, find a so that the points ^a, 2h, ^1, 5h
Let A ^x1, y1h and B ^x2, y2h be any two points in the XY and ^2, 4h are collinear.
-plane. Let P ^x, y h be any point on the line joining A

Sol :
and B . Then, the points P , A and B collinear. By above
condition of collinearity, we have Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee122
x y 1
1
∆ = x1 y1 1 = 0
2 EXAMPLE 5.23
x2 y2 1
Using determinants, prove that α + β = αβ , if the points
x y 1 ^α, 0h, ^0, β h and (1, 1) are collinear.
x1 y1 1 = 0

Sol :
x2 y2 1
Thus, equation of line passing through A ^x1, y1h and Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee123
B ^x2, y2h is given by
x y 1 EXAMPLE 5.24
x1 y1 1 = 0 Using determinants, find the equation of the line joining
x2 y2 1 the points (1, 2) and (3, 6).


Sol :

EXAMPLE 5.18
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee124
Using determinants, find the area of the triangle whose
vertices are (0, 0), (4, 3) and (8, 0).


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee118 E X ERC I S E 5 . 1

1. Evaluate the following determinants:
EXAMPLE 5.19 5 4 17 6
Using determinants, find values of a if area of triangle, (i) (ii)
3 9 15 5
having vertices ^a, 0h, (4, 0) and (0, 2), is 4 sq. units.
Ans : (i) 33 (ii) - 5


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee119

3 x 3 2
2. Find the values of x for which = .
x 1 4 1
Ans : x = ! 2 2
EXAMPLE 5.20
Show that the points (1, 0), (6, 0), (0, 0) are collinear.


Sol :
3 0
A=>
− 1 4H
3. Verify that AB = A B if and
Chap 5 Determinants Page 65

2 −1
B=>
1 3H
.
αβ - α - β = 0
Ans : Proof
α + β = αβ
Ans : Proof

ad + bc bd − ac
4. Show that >
ac − bd ad + bcH
= (a2 + b2) (c2 + d2).
Ans :

5.8 Properties of determinants

1 2
5. If A = > H, then find the value of k if The following properties (enunciated as Theorems) are
4 2 very useful. They help in evaluating a given determinant
2A = k A . by converting it into an equal determinant which is easier
to evaluate. We shall prove these properties for third order
Ans : k = 4 determinants only though they are true for determinants
of any order.

0 2 0 5.8.1 Theorem 1
6. What is the value of the determinant 2 3 4 ?
Ans : 8 4 5 6 If each element in any row or in any column is zero, then
the value of the determinant is zero.


Illustration
0 0 0
7. Find the minor and co-factors of each element of 8 2 6 2 6 8
R2 − 3 5V 6 8 2 = 0 −0 +0 =0
S W 7 5 3 5 3 7
A = S6 0 4W and verify that 3 7 5
SS1 5 − 7WW
T X 5.8.2 Theorem 2
a11 A 31 + a12 A 32 + a13 A 33 = 0 .
Ans : M11 =− 20 , M12 =− 46 , M13 = 30 , The value of a determinant is not altered by inter changing
M21 =− 4 , M22 =− 19 , M23 = 13 , its rows and columns.
M 31 =− 12 , M 32 =− 22 , M 33 = 18 ;

Illustration
A11 =− 20 , A12 = 46 , A13 = 30 a1 b1 c1
A21 = 4 , A22 =− 19 , A23 =− 13 , Let T = a2 b2 c2
A 31 =− 12 , A 32 = 22 , A 33 = 18 a3 b3 c3

be the given determinant. Expanding T by means of 1st

row, we get
12 22 32 T = a1 ^b2 c 3 − b 3 c2h − b1 ^a2 c 3 − a 3 a2h + c1 ^a2 b 3 − a 3 b2h
8. Find the value of 22 32 42 by using co-factors of ...(i)
elements of C1 . 32 42 52
Let T' be the determinant obtained from T by changing
Ans : - 8
its rows into columns and columns into rows, so that
a1 a2 a 3
1 x yz T' = b1 b2 b 3
9. Evaluate by using co-factors of elements of C 3 : 1 y zx c1 c 2 c 3
1 z xy Expanding T' by means of 1st column, we get
Ans : (x - y) (y - z) (z - x) T' = a1 ^b2 c 3 − b 3 c2h − b1 ^a2 c 3 − a 3 c2h + c1 ^a2 b 3 − a 3 b2h
...(ii)
There is no difference between (i) and (ii)
10. Prove by expanding along R1 that T = T'
x+y y+z z+x Thus the value of a determinant remains unaltered if its
z x y =0 rows be changed into columns and columns into rows. We
1 1 1
Page 66 Determinants Chap 5

may change any row with any column. 2 −3 5

Illustration Let T = 6 0 4
2 −3 5 1 5 −7
Let T = 6 0 4 2 −3 5
1 5 −7 T = 6 0 4 =− 28
Expanding the determinant along first row, we get 1 5 −7
0 4 6 4 6 0
T = 2 − ^− 3h +5 (From Illustration of Theorem 2)
5 −7 1 −7 1 5
Interchanging rows R2 and R 3 , i.e., R2 ) R 3 , we get
= 2 ^0 − 20h + 3 ^− 42 − 4h + 5 ^30 − 0h
2 −3 5
=− 40 − 138 + 150 =− 28
T' = 1 5 − 7
Interchanging rows and columns, we get 6 0 4
Expanding the determinant T' along first row, we get
2 6 1
5 −7 2 −7 1 5
T' = − 3 0 5 T' = 2 − ^− 3h +5
5 4 −7 0 4 6 4 6 0
Expanding along first column, we get = 2 ^20 − 0h + 3 ^4 + 42h + 5 ^0 − 30h

0 5 6 1 6 1
=2
− ^− 3h +5 = 40 + 138 − 150 = 28

4 −7 4 −7 0 5
Clearly T =− T' . Hence theorem 3 is verified.
= 2 ^0 − 20h + 3 ^− 42 − 4h + 5 ^30 − 0h

=− 40 − 138 + 150 =− 28
5.8.4 Theorem 4
Clearly T = T' . Hence theorem 2 is verified If two rows or columns of a determinant are equal then
then value of the determinant is zero.
5.8.3 Theorem 3

Illustration
If two adjacent rows or columns of a determinant are a1 a1 c1
interchanged, the determinant changes in sign but its Let T = a2 a2 c2 ...(i)
numerical value is unaltered. a3 a3 c3
be the given determinant. Let T' be the determinant


Illustration
obtained form T by interchanging its first and second
a1 b1 c1 columns, where
Let T = a 2 b 2 c 2
a1 a1 c1
a3 b3 c3
T' = a2 a2 c2 = T ...(ii)
= 8a1 ^b2 c 3 − b 3 c2h − b1 ^a2 c 3 − a 3 a2h+ c1 ^a2 b 3 − a 3 b2hB


a3 a3 c3
be the given determinant. Let T' be the determinant from But by theorem 3, the value of a determinant changes in
T by interchanging its 1’st and 2nd columns. sign if its any two adjacent lines (rows or columns) are
b1 a1 c1 interchanged, therefore,
then T' = b2 a2 c2 T' =− T ...(iii)
b3 a3 c3 From (i), (ii) and (iii)
Expanding T' by means of 1st row, we get T =− T
T' = b1 ^a2 c 3 − c2 a 3h − a1 ^b2 c 3 − c2 b 3h + c1 ^b2 a 3 − a2 b 3h 2T = 0 & T = 0
=− {a2 ^b2 c 3 − c2 b 3h − b1 ^a2 c 3 − c2 a 3h Hence a determinant vanishes if it has two identical lines (rows or
+ c2 ^a2 b 3 − b2 a 3h} columns).
=− T
Corollary : 5.8.5 Theorem 5
If any row (or a column) of a determinant is passed over n If all the elements of a row (or column) of a determinant
parallel rows or columns, then the resulting determinant is are multiplied by a constant k , then the value of the
T' = ^− 1hn T determinant gets multiplied by k .


Illustration

Illustration
Chap 5 Determinants Page 67

a1 b1 c1 a1 + a 1 b1 c1
Let T = a2 b2 c2 Let T = a2 + a 2 b2 c2
a3 b3 c3 a3 + a 3 b3 c3
= a1 ^b2 c 3 − b 3 c2h − b1 ^a2 c 3 − a 3 c2h + c1 ^a2 b 3 − a 3 b2h Expanding it with respect to the elements of the 1st
be the given determinant. Let T' be the determinant column we get,
obtained from T by multiplying every element of the first b2 c2 b1 c1
row by the constant k , k ! 0 , so that T = ^a1 + a 1h − ^a2 + a 2h
b3 c3 b3 c3
b1 c1
ka1 kb1 kc1 +^a 3 + α 3h
T' = a2 b2 c2 b2 c2
a3 b3 c3 b2 c2 b2 c2 b1 c1
= a1
+ α1 − a2
b3 c3 b3 c3 b3 c3
Expanding T' with respect to the elements of first row,
we get b1 c1 b1 c 1 b1 c1
T' = ka1 ^b2 c 3 − b 3 c2h − kb1 ^a2 c 3 − a 3 c2h −a2
b3 c3
+ a3
b2 c2
+ a3
b2 c2
+ kc1 ^a2 b 3 − a 3 b2h
T' = k $a1 ^b2 c 3 − b 3 c2h − b1 ^a2 c 3 − a 3 c2h = *a1
b2 c2 b 1 c1
b2 c2 4
b1 c1
− a2 + a3
b3 c3 b3 c3
+ c1 ^a2 b 3 − a 3 b2h.

+ *a 1
b2 c2 b1 c1
b2 c2 4
or T' = kT b1 c1
− a2 + a3
Corollary : b3 c3 b3 c3
If the elements in a row or column of a determinant are a1 b1 c1 a 1 b1 c1
respectively equal to k times the corresponding elements T = a2 b2 c2 + a 2 b2 c2
in another row or column, the value of the determinant is a3 b3 c3 a 3 b3 c3
zero.
5.8.8 Theorem 8
5.8.6 Theorem 6 If to each element of a row (or column) of a determinant be
If each element on one side of principal diagonal is zero, added or subtracted the equimultiples of the corresponding
then the value of determinant is the product is the product elements of one or more rows (or columns), the determinant
of diagonal elements remains unaltered.
a11 a12 a13

Illustration
i.e., A = 0 a22 a23 a1 b1 c1
0 0 a 33 Let T = a2 b2 c2
a11 0 0 a3 b3 c3
or T = a21 a22 0 then T = a11 a22 = a 33 and T' be the determinant obtained by adding p tiems the
a 31 a 32 a 33 elements of the second column and subtracting q times the


Illustration elements of the third column from the first column of T
a11 a12 a13 , then.
Let T = 0 a22 a23 a1 + pb1 b1 c1
0 0 a 33 T' = a2 + pb2 b2 c2
Expanding along first column, we get a 3 + pb 3 b 3 c 3
a22 a23 Then by theorem 7,
T = a11 +0+0
0 a 33 a1 b1 c1 pb1 b1 c1 − qc1 b1 c1
T = a11 ^a22 a 33 − a23 # 0h & T = a11 a22 a 33 T' = a2 b2 c2 + pb2 b2 c2 + − qc2 b2 c 2
a3 b3 c3 pb 3 b 3 c 3 − qc 3 b 3 c 3
b1 b1 c 1 c1 b1 c 1
5.8.7 Theorem 7
= T + p b2 b2 c2 − q c2 b2 c2
If each constituent in any row (or column) consists of two b3 b3 c3 c3 b3 c3
terms, then the determinant can be expressed as the sum [By theorem 5]
of two determinants of the same order. = T + p ^0 h − q ^0 h = T
[By theorem 4]


Illustration
Page 68 Determinants Chap 5

5.8.9 Theorem 9 (Factor Theorem) Thus, | AB | = 18 19 =− 18 − 190 =− 208 ...(i)

10 − 1
If the elements of determinant T are polynomials in x and
T = 0 when we substitute a for x , then x - a is a factor
Again, |A || B |= (− 8) # (26) =− 208 ...(ii)
of T.
From eq (i) and (ii), we have


Illustration
| A || B | = | AB |
Since the constituents of variable x are polynomial in x,
hence the expansion of T will also be a polynomial in x .
Now, since the value of T becomes zero by putting x = a
5.9 Elementary operations
; hence ^x - a h will be a factor of the polynomial obtained
by the expansion of T. The main purpose behind the simplification of a
determinant lies in making maximum possible zeros in a
5.8.10 Theorem 10. row (or a column) by using the above properties and then
The sum of the product of co-factors of a particular row to expand the determinant by that row (or column).
or column and any other row or column of a determinant Elementary operations for determinants :
is zero. Let R1 , R2 , ..., Rn be first, second, ..., nth row and C1 ,
C2, ... Cn be first second, ... , nth column of a determinant


Illustration
T or order n . Then we may apply following elementary
a1 a2 a 3 operations :
Let T = b1 b2 b 3 (a) Interchanging of ith and jth row of T | Ri ) R j
c1 c 2 c 3 Interchanging of i and j column of T | Ci ) C j
th th

The co-factors of the elements a1 , a2 , a 3 of the first row are (b) Multiplication by a number k on each element of ith
b2 b3 b1 b 3 b1 b 2 row| Ri " kRi
respectively ,- , Multiplication by a number k on each element of ith
c2 c3 c1 c 3 c1 c 2
Hence the sum of the products of the above co-factors column| Ci " kCi
with the elements of second row b1 , b2 , b 3 is equal to (c) For i ! j , adding to each element of ith row of T,
k times the corresponding elements of jth row :
b2 b3 b1 b 3 b1 b 2
b1 − + b3 Ri " Ri + kR j
c2 c3 c1 c 3 c1 c 2
For i ! j , adding to each element of ith column of
= b1 ^b2 c 3 − b 3 c2h − b2 ^b1 c 3 − b 3 c1h + b 3 ^b1 c1 − b2 c1h
T, k times the corresponding elements of jth column
= b1 b 2 c 3 − b1 b 3 c 2 − b 1 b 2 c 3 + b 2 b 3 c1 + b 1 b 3 c 1
| Ci " Ci + kC j
− b 2 b 3 c1 = 0
EXAMPLE 5.25
Verify | AB | = | A || B |, where,
5.8.11 Theorem 11 R V R V
S1 − 3 2W S0 2 6W
If A and B are square matrices of same order, then A = S4 − 1 2W and B = S1 5 0W
SS W SS W
| AB | = | A |$| B | 3 5 2W 3 7 1W


Sol : T X T X


Illustration
Let A = ;2 5E and B = ; 4 − 3 E
21 2 5 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee125

Now | A | = 2 5 = 2 − 10 =− 8
21
EXAMPLE 5.26
| B | = 4 − 3 = 20 + 6 = 26 If A and B are square matrices of the same order 3, such
2 5 that | A | = 4 and AB = 4I . write the value of | B |.

AB = ; 2 5E ; 4 − 3E


Sol :
Also,
21 2 5
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee126
AB = ; 8 + 10 − 6 + 25 E = ;18 19 E
8 + 2 −6 + 5 10 − 1
Chap 5 Determinants Page 69

EXAMPLE 5.27
Using properties of determinates, prove that :

Sol :
^a + 1h^a + 2h a + 2 1
^a + 2h^a + 3h a + 3 1 =− 2 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee131
^a + 3h^a + 4h a + 4 1


Sol :
EXAMPLE 5.32
Using properties of determinants, prove that following :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee127
b+c a a
b c + a b = 4abc
EXAMPLE 5.28 c c a+b
Using properties of determinants, solve for x :

Sol :
a+x a−x a−x
a−x a+x a−x = 0 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee132
a−x a−x a+x


Sol :
EXAMPLE 5.33
Using properties of determinants, prove that :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee128
a+x y z
x a + y z = a2 ^a + x + y + z h
EXAMPLE 5.29 x y a+z
Using properties of determinants, prove that :

Sol :
1 1+p 1+p+q
3 4 + 3p 2 + 4p + q = 1 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee133
4 7 + 4p 2 + 7p + 4q


Sol :
EXAMPLE 5.34
Using properties of determinants, prove that :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee129
1 1 1 + 3x
1 + 3y 1 1 = 9 ^3xyz + xy + yz + zx h
EXAMPLE 5.30 1 1 + 3z 1
Without expanding the determinant prove that :

Sol :
0 2 −3
−2 0 4 = 0 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee134
3 −4 0


Sol :
EXAMPLE 5.35
Using properties of determinants, prove that :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee130
x + l 2x 2x
2x x + l 2x = ^5x + lh^l − x h2
EXAMPLE 5.31 2x 2x x + l
Using properties of determinants, rove the following :

Sol :
2
a a bc
b b2 ca = ^a − b h^b − c h^c − a h^bc + ca + ab h. Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee135
c c2 ab


o
EXAMPLE 5.36
Applying properties of determinants, prove that a2 bc ac + c2
a b c Prove a2 + ab b2 ac = 4a2 b2 c2 .
a2 b2 c2 = ^a − b h^b − c h^c − a h^ab + bc + ca h ab b2 + bc c2
bc ca ab
Page 70 Determinants Chap 5

Sol : EXAMPLE 5.41

Using properties of determinants, prove that :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee136 b+c c+a a+b a b c
q+r r+p p+q = 2 p q r
y+z z+x x+y x y z
EXAMPLE 5.37


o
Using properties of determinants, prove that :
Using properties of determinants, prove that
2y y−z−x 2y
b+c q+r y+z a p x
2y 2z z − x − y = ^x + y + z h3
c+a r+p z+x = 2 b q y
x−y−z 2z 2x
a+b p+q x+y c r z


o


Sol :
Applying properties of determinants prove that :
a−b−c 2a 2a
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee141
2b b−c−a 2b = ^a + b + c h3
2c 2c c−a−b


Sol : EXAMPLE 5.42
Using properties of determinants, prove that :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee137 1+a 1 1
1 1 + b 1 = abc + ca + ab
1 1 1+c
EXAMPLE 5.38


Sol :
Using properties of determinants, prove that :
a + b + 2c a b
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee142
c b + c + 2a b = 2 ^a + b + c h3
c a c + a + 2b


Sol : EXAMPLE 5.43
a b c
If a + b + c ! 0 and b c d = 0 , then using properties
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee138
c a b
of determinants, prove that a = b = c .
EXAMPLE 5.39

Sol :
Using properties of determinants, prove that :
x2 + 1 xy xz Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee143
xy y + 1 yz = 1 + x2 + y2 + z2
2

xz yz z2 + 1
EXAMPLE 5.44


Sol : Using properties of determinants, prove that :
1 a a3
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee139 1 b b3 = ^a − b h^b − c h^c − a h^a + b + c h
1 c c3
EXAMPLE 5.40

o
Using properties of determinants, prove that Using properties of determinants, prove that :
x+y x x 1 a 1
5x + 4y 4x 2x = x3 a b c = ^a − b h^b − c h^c − a h^a + b + c h.
10x + 8y 8x 3x a3 c c3


Sol :

Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee140 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee144

Chap 5 Determinants Page 71

EXAMPLE 5.45
Using properties of determinants, prove the following :

Sol :
2
1 x x
x2 1 x = ^1 − x3h2 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee149
x x2 1


o
EXAMPLE 5.50
Using properties of determinants, prove that
Using properties of determinants, prove the following :
1 a a2 a b c
a2 1 a = ^1 − a3h2 . a − b b − c c − a = a3 + b3 + c3 − 3abc
a a2 1 b+c c+a a+b


Sol :


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee145 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee150

EXAMPLE 5.46 EXAMPLE 5.51

Using properties of determinants, prove that following : x 3 7
x x + y x + 2y If x =− 9 is a root of 2 x 2 = 0 , find the other roots.
x + 2y x x + y = 9y2 ^x + y h 7 6 x
x + y x + 2y x

Sol :

Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee151
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee146
EXAMPLE 5.52
Using properties of determinants, prove that :
EXAMPLE 5.47
Using properties of determinants, prove the following : a b−c c+b
a + c b c − a = ^a + b + c h^a2 + b2 + c2h
1 + a2 − b2 2ab − 2b
a−c b+a c
2ab 2
1−a +b 2
2a = ^1 + a2 + b2h3
2b − 2a 1 − a2 − b2

Sol :

Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee152
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee147
EXAMPLE 5.53
Using the properties of determinants, show that :
EXAMPLE 5.48
Using properties of determinants, prove that following : a a+b a+b+c
2a 3a + 2b 4a + 3b + 2c = a3
α β γ
3a 6a + 3b 10a + 6b + 3c
α 2
β 2
γ2 = ^α − β h^β − γ h^γ − αh^α + β + γ h
β+γ γ+α α+β

Sol :

Sol : Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee153

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee148

EXAMPLE 5.54
1 a a2
EXAMPLE 5.49 If T = a a2 1 =− 4 then find the value of
Using properties of determinants, prove the following : a2 1 a
b+c a−b a a3 - 1 0 a - a4
c + a b − c b = 3abc − a3 − b3 − c3 0 a - a4 a3 - 1 .
a+b c−a c a - a4 a3 - 1 0
Page 72 Determinants Chap 5

find the value of f ^2x h - f ^x h.

Sol :


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee154 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee158

EXAMPLE 5.59
Ax x2 1 A B C
Show that T = T 1 , where T = By y 1 , T = x y z
2

. Cz z2 1 zy zx xy


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee159

EXAMPLE 5.55
Using properties of determinants, prove that EXAMPLE 5.60
2
a + 2a 2a + 1 1 Using properties of determinants, prove that
2a + 1 a + 2 1 = ^a − 1h3 3x − x + y − x + z
3 3 1 x−y 3y z − y = 3 ^x + y + z h^xy + yz + zx h


Sol : x−z y−z 3z


Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee155
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee160

EXAMPLE 5.56
Using properties of determinants show that EXAMPLE 5.61
1 1 1+x Using properties of determinants, prove that
1 1 + y 1 =− (xy + yz + zx + xyz) 5a − 2a + b − 2a + c
1+z 1 1 − 2b + a 5b − 2b + c = 12 ^a + b + c h^ab + bc + ca h
− 2c + a − 2c + b 5c


Sol :

Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee156
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee161
EXAMPLE 5.57
a b−y c−z
EXAMPLE 5.62
If a − x b c − z = 0 , then using properties of
Applying properties of determinants, prove that
a−x b−y c
− a2 ab ac
determinants find the value of a + b + c , where x , y z ! 0
x y z ba − b2 bc = 4a2 b2 c2
.
ca cb − c2


Sol :

Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee157 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee162

EXAMPLE 5.58 EXAMPLE 5.63

a −1 0 Using properties of determinants, prove that
If f ^x h = ax a − 1 , using properties of determinants, x y z
ax2 ax a x2 y2 z2 = xyz ^x − y h^y − z h^z − x h
x3 y3 z3
Chap 5 Determinants Page 73

12 22 32


Sol : 22 32 42 .
32 42 52
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee163 Ans : - 8 .

EXAMPLE 5.64
Using properties of determinants, solve the following for x −1 1 1
x − 2 2x − 3 3x − 4 3. Prove that 1 − 1 1 = 4.
x − 4 2x − 9 3x − 16 = 0 1 1 −1
x − 8 2x − 27 3x − 64 Ans : Proof


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee164 a b c y b q x y z

4. Prove that x y z = x a p = p q r .
p q r z c r a b c
EXAMPLE 5.65
Ans : Proof
Using properties of determinants, solve the following for x
x+a x x
x x+a x = 0
x x x+a x 1 1
5. Prove that: 1 x 1 = (x + 2) (x − 1) 2 .


Sol :
1 1 x
Ans : Proof
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee165

EXAMPLE 5.66 b+c a+b a

Without expanding, evaluate the determinant : 6. Prove that: c + a b + c b = a3 + b3 + c3 − 3abc .
^a + a h2 ^a − a h2 1 a+b c+a c
x −x x −x

^ay + a−y h2 ^ay − a−y h2 1 , Ans : Proof

^a + a h2 ^a − a h2 1
z −z z −z

where a 2 0 and x , y , d R .


Sol : y+z x y
7. Prove that: z + x z x = (x + y + z) (x − z) 2 .
x+y y z
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ee166
Ans : Proof

2−x 3 3
E X ERC I S E 5.2 8. Solve 3 4−x 5 = 0.
3 5 4−x
1. Evaluate using properties of determinant
7 9 79 Ans : x = 0, − 1, 11.
4 1 41 .
5 5 55
a2 + 1 b2 c2
Ans : 0
9. Prove that: a2 b2 + 1 c2 = 1 + a2 + b2 + c2 .
a2 b2 c2 + 1
Ans : Proof
2. Evaluate using properties of determinant
Page 74 Determinants Chap 5

10. Prove that:

1 + a2 − b2 2ab − 2b
2ab 1 − a2 + b2 2a = (1 + a2 + b2) 3 .
2b − 2a 1 − a2 − b2
Ans : Proof
Chap 6 Inverse of Matrix Page 75

CHAPTER 6

Inverse of Matrix

6.1 Minors and Cofactors

1 2
Let A = 6aij@ be a square matrix. The minor Mij of an
Minor of b23 = M23 = =− 6
7 8
element aij of A is the determinant of the matrix obtained 2 3
by deleting i th row and j th column of A. Minor of b 31 = M 31 = =− 3
5 6
Note :
Minor of an element of a square matrix of order n ^n $ 2h
1 3
Minor of b 32 = M 32 = =− 6
is a determinant of order ^n - 1h.
4 6
The cofactor Aij of an element aij of a square matrix 1 2
A = 6aij@ is defined as
Minor of b 33 = M 33 = =− 3
4 5
Aij = ^− 1hi + j Mij Cofactor of b11 = B11 = ^− 1h1 + 1 M11 =− 3
Illustration Cofactor of b12 = B12 = ^− 1h1 + 2 M12 = 6
1 2
Consider the matrix A = > H. Then, Cofactor of b13 = B13 = ^− 1h1 + 3 M13 =− 3
Cofactor of b21 = B21 = ^− 1h2 + 1 M21 = 6
3 4

Minor of a11 = M11 = 4 Cofactor of b22 = B22 = ^− 1h2 + 2 M22 =− 12
Minor of a12 = M12 = 3 Cofactor of b23 = B23 = ^− 1h2 + 3 M23 = 6
Minor of a21 = M21 = 2 Cofactor of b 31 = B 31 = ^− 1h3 + 1 M 31 =− 3
Minor of a22 = M22 = 1 Cofactor of b 32 = B 32 = ^− 1h3 + 2 M 32 = 6
Cofactor of b 33 = B 33 = ^− 1h3 + 3 M 33 =− 3
Cofactor of a11 = A11 = ^− 1h1 + 1 M11 = 4


Cofactor of a12 = A12 = ^− 1h1 + 2 M12 =− 3
Cofactor of a21 = A21 = ^− 1h2 + 1 M21 =− 2 6.2 Important Result
Cofactor of a22 = A22 = ^− 1h 2+2
M22 = 1
R V
S1 2 3W 6.2.1 Result 1
Now, consider the matrix B = S4 5 6W. Then,
SS W
7 8 9W Let Aij denote the cofactor of aij in A = 6aij@. Then, A =
T X Sum of product of elements (of any row or column) with
5 6 their corresponding cofactors.
Minor of b11 = M11 = =− 3
8 9
4 6 Illustration :
Minor of b12 = M12 = =− 6
7 9 Let A be a square matrix of order 3. Then,
4 5 A = a11 A11 + a12 A12 + a13 A13
Minor of b13 = M13 = =− 3
7 8 [Expanding along first row]
2 3 = a21 A21 + a22 A22 + a23 A23

Minor of b21 = M21 = =− 6
8 9 [Expanding along second row]
1 3 = a 31 A 31 + a 32 A 32 + a 33 A 33

Minor of b22 = M22 = =− 12
7 9 [Expanding along third row]
Page 76 Inverse of Matrix Chap 6

= a11 A11 + a21 A21 + a 31 A 31

6.2.6 Result 6
[Expanding along first column]
For any invertible square matrix A of order n , we have
= a12 A12 + a22 A22 + a 32 A 32

A-1 = 1 .
[Expanding along second column] A
= a13 A13 + a23 A23 + a 33 A 33
PROOF :

 [Expanding along third column] Given that A is an invertible square matrix of

order n .

6.2.2 Result 2 Then, AA-1 = In

AA-1 = In
If elements of a row (or column) are multiplied with A A-1 = 1 AB = A B
cofactors of any other row (or column), then their sum
is zero. A-1 = 1
A
Illustration :
R V
S1 2 3W EXAMPLE 6.1
Consider the matrix B = S4 5 6W. 1 -2
Write the minors and cofactors of the elements of >
4 3H
SS W
7 8 9W
T X
Then, product of elements of second row with cofactors of

Sol :
third column
= b21 B13 + b22 B23 + b23 B 33
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/fe101

= ^4h^− 3h + ^5 h^6 h + ^6 h^− 3h

=0
EXAMPLE 6.2
Write the minors and cofactors of the elements of
R V
6.2.3 Result 3 S2 - 3 5 W
S6 0 4 W.
SS W
For any square matrix A of order n , we have AT = A 1 5 - 7W
T X


Sol :

Illustration :
1 3 1 −1 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/fe102
Consider A = > H . Then, AT = >
3 4H
.
−1 4
1 3 EXAMPLE 6.3
So, A = =7
−1 4 Using cofactors of elements of first column, evaluate the
4 1
1 −1 determinant, ∆ = .
and AT = =7 −3 2
3 4


Sol :
Hence, AT = A

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/fe103

6.2.4 Result 4

EXAMPLE 6.4
n
For any square matrix A of order n , we have kA = k A Find minors and cofactors of each element of second row of
R V
. S2 - 4 3 W
S1 6 4 W and hence evaluate its determinant.
SS W
5 0 - 2W
6.2.5 Result 5
T

Sol : X

For any two square matrices A and B of same order, we Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/fe104
have AB = A B .
Chap 6 Inverse of Matrix Page 77

6.3 Singular Matrix EXAMPLE 6.8

If A is a square matrix of order 3, A ! 0 and 3A = k A
A square matrix A is said to be singular, if A = 0 . If , then write the value of k .
A ! 0 , then we say that A is non-singular.

Sol :

Illustration : Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/fe108

1 3 1 2
Let A = > H and B = > H
2 6 3 4
EXAMPLE 6.9
1 3 If a matrix A of order 3 # 3 has determinant 2, then find
the value of A ^8I h .
Then, A = =0
2 6
1 2

Sol :
and B = =− 2 ! 0
3 4
So, A is a singular matrix and B is a non-singular matrix. Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/fe109

EXAMPLE 6.5 EXAMPLE 6.10

Check whether the following matrices are singular or non- If A and B are square matrices of order 3 such that
singular. A =− 1 and B = 3 , then find the value of 7AB .
R V R V

Sol :
S5 4 - 9W S2 - 1 - 2W
(i) 2 1 - 3 (ii) S0 2
S W - 1W
SS W SS W Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/fe110
1 1 - 2W 3 -5 0W
T X T X


Sol :
EXAMPLE 6.11
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/fe105 If A and B are square matrices of the same order such
that A = 6 and AB = I , then write the value of B .


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/fe111

EXAMPLE 6.12
If A is a square matrix such that AT A = I , write the value
of A .


Sol :
EXAMPLE 6.6
R V
Sx 1 2W Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/fe112
Find the value(s) of x for which the matrix A = S1 0 3W
SS W
is singular. 5 − 1 4W
T X


Sol : EXAMPLE 6.13
If A is a square matrix and A = 2 , then write the value
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/fe106 of AAl , where Al is the transpose of matrix A.


Sol :

EXAMPLE 6.7
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/fe113
Let A be a square matrix of order 3 # 3 . Write the value
of 2A , where A = 4 .


Sol : EXAMPLE 6.14
If A is a non-singular square matrix such that A = 5 ,
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/fe107 then find A-1 .
Page 78 Inverse of Matrix Chap 6

Sol : EXAMPLE 6.17

2 -1
Find the adjoint of the given matrix >
4 3H
.
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/fe114


Sol :

EXAMPLE 6.15
x 2 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/fe117
If A = > H and A 4 = 625 , find the value(s) of x .
2 x


Sol : EXAMPLE 6.18
R V
S2 − 1 4 W
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/fe115 Find the adjoint of the given matrix B = S1 2 1 W
SS W
0 3 − 1W
T X


Sol :
EXAMPLE 6.16
If A is a skew symmetric matrix of order 3, write the value
of A . Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/fe118


Sol :

EXAMPLE 6.19
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/fe116 R V
S− 1 − 2 − 2W
If B = S 2 1 − 2W, then prove that adj B = 3BT .
SS W
2 −2 1W
6.4 Adjoint of a Matrix T X


Sol :
Let A = 6aij@ be a square matrix of order n . Then, we
define adjoint of A as Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/fe119
adj A = 7AijA T

where Aij denotes the cofactor of aij in A.

EXAMPLE 6.20
Illustration : R V
R V S1 − 1 2 W
Sa11 a12 a13W If the matrix A = S3 1 − 2W, find adj A without
Let A = Sa21 a22 a23W, then SS W
SS W computing adj A. 1 0 3W
a 31 a 32 a W T X
T R 33X VT R V

Sol :
SA11 A12 A13W SA11 A21 A 31W
adj A = SA21 A22 A23W = SA12 A22 A 32W
SS W SS W Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/fe120
A 31 A 32 A 33W A13 A23 A 33W
T X T X
Note :
EXAMPLE 6.21
For any square matrix A of order n , we have a b
a. A ^adj Ah = ^adj Ah A = A I If A = > H, find adj A and verify that
c d
b. adj A = A n − 1 A ^adj Ah = A I2 = ^adj Ah A .
c. A ^adj Ah = A n

Sol :
d. adj ^adj Ah = A ^n − 1h2

e. adj ^kAh = kn − 1 ^adj Ah, for any scalar k Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/fe121

f. adj ^adj Ah = A n−2

A
g. adj ^AT h = ^adj AhT EXAMPLE 6.22
R V
S3 − 2 3W
For any two square matrices A and B (for which AB is If A = S2 1 − 1W, find A ^adj Ah without computing
defined), we have SS W
4 − 3 2W
adj ^AB h = ^adj Ah^adj B h adj A. T X
Chap 6 Inverse of Matrix Page 79

Sol : R 1 − 1 1V
S W
5. For the matrix A = S 2 3 0W, show that
A (adjA) = O ] SS18 2 10WW
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/fe122
Ans : T X

EXAMPLE 6.23
2 −3 −1 3
If A = > H and B = >
4 0H
, verify that
R1
S 2 3WV
5 1
6. Find the adjoint of the matrix S2 3 2W. Also verify
adj ^AB h = ^adj B h^adj Ah.
SS3 3 4WW
T X


Sol : that: A (adjA) = (adjA) A = A I , where A is the
given matrix.
R 6 1 - 5V
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/fe123 S W
Ans : S- 2 - 5 4W
SS- 3 3 - 1WW
T X

7. For the following matrices, verify that:

A (adjA) = (adjA) A = A I 3 .
R V R1 - 1 2V
S 1 - 1 2W S W
(i) S 2 3 5W (ii) S3 0 - 2W]
AnsSS-: 2 0 1WW SS1 0 3WW
T X T X

8. If A is a square matrix of order 3 # 3 , then prove that

E X ERC I S E 6.1 A (adjA) = A I 3 .

3 4
1. Compute the adjoint of the matrix A = > H and
5 7 6.5 Inverse of a Matrix
verify that (adjA) A = A I .
Let A be a square matrix of order n . If there exists a
7 -4
Ans : >
- 5 3H
square matrix B of order n such that AB = BA = In ,
then B is called the inverse of A and we write B = A−1 .
It is clear from the definition that if B is inverse of
2 3 A, then A is inverse of B .
2. If A = >
− 4 − 6H
, verify that Note :
A (adjA) = (adjA) A = A I2 . 1. The concept of inverse of matrix is defined only for
Ans : square matrices.
2. If inverse of A exists, then A is called an invertible
matrix.
1 2 2 0 3. The inverse of a square matrix, if it exists, is unique.
3. If A = > H and B = > H, then verify that
3 5 1 5
adj (AB) = (adjB)(adjA). 6.5.1 Important Result
Ans : Result 1

If A is an invertible matrix, then ^A-1h-1 = A .

R− 1 − 2 − 2V
S W
4. If A = S 2 1 − 2W, show that adjoint A = 3Al.
SS 2 − 2 1WW PROOF :
Ans : Proof
T X We have AA-1 = I = A−1 A
This implies that the inverse of A-1 is A, i.e.
Page 80 Inverse of Matrix Chap 6

^A-1h = A .
-1 PROOF :

Since A is an invertible matrix, A-1 exists and we have
Result 2
AA-1 = A−1 A = I
If A, B , C are square matrices of same order and A is a ^AA-1hl = ^A−1 Ahl= I l
non-singular matrix, then ^A-1hlAl = Al^A−1hl= I
(i) AB = AC & B = C (Left cancellation law) ( ^AB hl= BlAl and I l = I )
(ii) BA = CA & B = C (Right cancellation law) By definition, ^A h is the inverse of Al,
-1 l

PROOF : Thus ^Alh-1 = ^A−1hl

(i) Since A is non-singular, A-1 exists. Result 5
We have AB = AC
The inverse of an invertible symmetric matrix is a
A ^AB h = A−1 ^AC h = ^A−1Ah B = ^A−1Ah C
-1
symmetric matrix.
IB = IC
B = C PROOF :
Let A be an invertible symmetric matrix.
(ii) We have BA = CA
^BAh A-1 = ^CAh A−1 = B ^AA−1h = C ^AA−1h
Then A ! 0 and Al = A

By Theorem V, we have ^Alh-1 = ^A−1hl.
BI = CI
A-1 = ^A−1hl ( Al = A )
B = C -1
Therefore A is a symmetric matrix.
Result 3

A square matrix is invertible if and only if it is non- Result 6

If A is an invertible matrix, then ^adj Ah-1 = adj A−1 .

singular.

PROOF : PROOF :
Let the square matrix A be invertible.
Necessity: adj A
Then there exists a square matrix B such that We have A-1 =
A
AB = BA = I .
adj A = A A−1 ...(1)
AB = BA = I
AA-1 = I
Determinant of the product of square matrices of same
order is the product of their determinants. Thus we have AA-1 = I

A $ B = B $ A = 1 A A-1 = 1

Here the number A is non-zero, for otherwise A $ B A-1 ! 0 and A-1 = 1

A
will become zero. Therefore the matrix A is non-singular. Thus A-1 in non-singular.
Sufficiency: Let A be non-singular. Since A is a square Now by replacing A by A-1 in (1), we have
matrix, we have
adj A-1 = A−1 ^A−1h−1 = 1 A ...(2)
A ^adj Ah = ^adj Ah A = A I

A
^ h ^ h
1 7A adj A A = 1 7 adj A AA = 1 AI Multiplying (1) and (2), we get
A A A #
^adj Ah^adj A-1h = _ A A−1id 1 A n
(Since, A ! 0 , we can divide by A ) A

Ad n = d nA = I
adj A adj A = A−1 A = I


Similarly, ^adj A-1h^adj Ah = I
A A
adj A
Therefore the matrix A is invertible and A-1 =
A
. ^ Ah-1 = adj A−1
Thus by definition, adj
Hence the result holds.
Result 4 Result 7

If A is an invertible matrix, then ^Alh-1 = ^A−1hl. If A and B are invertible matrices of same order, then
AB is also invertible and ^AB h-1 = B−1A−1 .
Chap 6 Inverse of Matrix Page 81

PROOF : EXAMPLE 6.24

Since the matrices A and B are invertible , A-1 and B-1 3 6
exist and AA-1 = A−1 A = I , BB-1 = B−1 B = I . And A Find the inverse of > H. Also verify your answer.
7 2
and B are square matrices of same order, therefore AB is


Sol :
defined.
Also, AB = A $ B ! 0 , because A and B are invertible
and so A ! 0 , B ! 0 . Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/fe124
Therefore AB is invertible, i.e., ^AB h-1 exists.
Now, ^AB h^B-1 A-1h = A ^BB−1h A−1 EXAMPLE 6.25
= A ^In h A = AA = I a b
If A = >
dH
−1 −1

such that ad - bc ! 0 , then find the inverse
^B-1 A-1h^AB h = B−1 ^A−1Ah B
c
and of A.
= B−1 ^In h B = B−1 B = I

Sol :
Thus ^AB h^B-1 A-1h = ^B−1 A−1h^AB h = I
Hence by definition, Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/fe125
^AB h-1 = B−1 A−1
^AB h-1 = B−1 A−1 is called the reversal law of inverse EXAMPLE 6.26
of product of matrices. 3 −5
If A = >
− 4 2H
, verify that A2 − 5A − 14I = O and
Result 8

If A and B are invertible matrices of some order, then hence find A-1 .
adj ^AB h = ^adj B h^adj Ah.

Sol :

PROOF : Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/fe126

A and B are square matrices of same order, therefore AB
is defined. Also, A ! 0 , B ! 0
EXAMPLE 6.27
Now AB = A B ! 0
Therefore ^AB h exists.
2 1
If A = > , verify that ^Alh-1 = ^A−1hl.
5H
-1
3
adj A
We have A-1 = ,

Sol :
A
adj B
B-1 = , Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/fe127
B
adj ^AB h
and ^AB h-1 =
AB EXAMPLE 6.28
adj ^AB h If A = >
2 3
adj ^AB h = 2H
Now, AB , verify that:
AB # 1

= ^AB−the
Working Steps for Finding
1
h^ A B h of Square Matrix
Inverse
(i) ^adj Ah-1 = adj A−1 (ii) ^A-1h-1 = A
= ^B−1 A−1h A B
A

Step I: adj B adj A

Sol :
= $ $A $ B
Find the value of A . B A
adj ^AB h = ^adj B h^adj Ah
Step II: Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/fe128
Hence
If A = 0 , then A cannot have its inverse.
Step III: EXAMPLE 6.29
adj A R V
If A ! 0 , then A has its inverse and is given by . S1 - 1 2 W
A Find the inverse of the matrix S0 2 - 3W and verify the
SS W
Step IV: result. 3 -2 4 W
T X
Find cofactors of all elements of A and compute adj A.

Sol :
Find A-1 by multiplying adj A by 1 .
A
Page 82 Inverse of Matrix Chap 6

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/fe129

A3 − 6A2 + 5A + 11I = O . Hence find A-1 .

EXAMPLE 6.30

Sol :
R V
S1 2 4W
Find the inverse of S3 - 19 7W, if exists. Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/fe135
SS W
2 4 8W


Sol : T X
EXAMPLE 6.36
R V
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/fe130 S1 2 2W
If A = S2 1 2W, find A-1 and hence prove that
SS W
2 2 1W
EXAMPLE 6.31 T X
2
3 1 4 0 A − 4A − 5I = O .
If A = > H and B = > H, verify that ^AB h-1 = B−1 A−1 .
4 0 2 5

Sol :


Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/fe136
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/fe131
EXAMPLE 6.37
R V R V
EXAMPLE 6.32 S1 p 0W S1 0 0W
R V R V Obtain the inverse of the matrices S0 1 pW and Sq 1 0W.
S1 1 2W S1 2 0 W SS W SS W
If A = S0 2 − 3W and B-1 = S0 3 − 1W, find ^AB h-1 . 0 0 1W 0 q 1W
SS W SS W T X T X
3 −2 4 W 1 0 2W R V
T X T X S1 + pq p 0W


Sol : Hence find the inverse of the matrix S q 1 + pq pW.
SS W
0 q 1W


Sol : T X
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/fe132
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/fe137
EXAMPLE 6.33
a b
Find the inverse of the matrix A = >c 1 + bc H and show
a
that:
aA-1 = ^a2 + bc + 1h I2 − aA E X ERC I S E 6 . 2


Sol :
1. Find the inverse (if it exists) of the following matrices:
-1 5 2 -2
(i) > H (ii) >
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/fe133 -3 2 4 3H
2 -5 3 2
Ans : (i) 1 > H (ii) 1 >
EXAMPLE 6.34 13 3 - 1 14 - 4 2H
R V
S0 1 1W 2
Find A-1 if A = S1 0 1W. Also show that A-1 = A − 3I .
SS W 2 3 2 6 7
1 1 0W 2. If A = > H and B = > H, find (AB) -1 .
T X 7 5 8 9


Sol :
- 47
Ans : >
41 - 17H
39
2

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/fe134

−4 2 0 3
3. If A−1 = > H and B = >
− 2 5H
EXAMPLE 6.35 , find (AB) -1 .
R V 3 −1
S1 1 1W - 296 13
= S1 2 − 3W, Ans : > 4 H
6
For the matrix A show that
SS W -3 2
2 − 1 3W 3

T X
Chap 6 Inverse of Matrix Page 83

4. Verify that (AB) −1 = B−1 A−1 , where: and hence find A-1 .
R- 3 2 2V
2 −1 S W
(i) A = > H and B = >
4 3 Ans : 1 S 2 - 3 2W
4 2 − 2 1H 5S
S 2 2 - 3WW
3 7 6 8 T X
(ii) A = > H and B = > H
2 5 7 9

Ans : Proof


******

5. f x , y , z are non-zero real numbers, then show that:

Rx 0 0V−1 Rx−1 0 0V
S W S W
S0 y 0W = S 0 y−1 0W
SS0 0 z WW S W
Ans : Proof S 0 0 z−1W
T X T X

6. Find the inverse (if it exists) of the following matrices:

R1 2 3V R1 0 0V
S W S W
(i) S0 2 4W (ii) S3 3 0W
SS0 0 5WW SS5 2 - 1WW
T X R T XR
S10 - 10 2VW S- 3 0 0VW
Ans : (i) 1 S 0 5 - 4W, (ii) - 1 S 3 - 1 0W
10 S 3S
S0 0 2WW S- 9 - 2 3WW
T X T X

7. Find the inverse (if it exists) of the following matrices:

R 2 1 3V R1 3 3V
S W S W
(i) S 4 - 1 0W (ii) S1 4 3W
SS- 7 2 1WW SS1 3 4WW
T RX- 1 5 3VW
T XR
7 - 3 - 3VW
S S
Ans : (i) - 1 S- 4 23 12W, (ii) S- 1 1 0W
3S
S 1 - 11 - 6WW SS- 1 0 1WW
T X T X
R3 0 2V
S W
8. If A = S1 5 9W and AB = BA = I , find B .
SS6 4 7WW
T R X
S -1 8 - 10VW
Ans : - 1 S 47 9 - 25W
55 S
S- 26 - 12 15WW
T X
R V
S2 0 − 1W
9. If A = S5 1 0W, show that
SS0 1 3WW
T X
A−1 = A2 − 6A + 11I .
Ans :

R1 2 2V
S W
10. If A = S2 1 2W, show that A2 − 4A − 5I = O
SS2 2 1WW
T X
Page 84 Application of Matrices Chap 7

CHAPTER 7

Application of Matrices

7.1 Introduction The same activity was carried out in section Q of class
Matrices and determinants are powerful tools in modern XII of the same school and the following information was
mathematics, which have a wide range of application. received.
Sociologists use matrices to study the dominance within Regular Honest Respectful
a social group or society. Demographers make use of
A 35 16 38
matrices to study survival of mankind, marriage and
decent structure. Business mathematics, economist, B 10 20 7
artificial intelligence coding and networking models are C 8 12 3
a few examples that function on the concept of matrix Represent the above information in the matrix form and
and determinant. The study of communication theory use matrices to find how many students got A grade in the
and electrical engineering as the network analysis is also three values ?
aided by the use of matrix representation. In this section

Sol :
we will study some application of matrix addition or
multiplication.
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe102

EXAMPLE 7.1
EXAMPLE 7.3
A publishing house has two branches. In each branch there
Two farmers Ramkishan and Gurcharan Singh cultivate
are three offices. In each office, there are 2 peons, 5 clerks
only three varieties of rice namely Basmati, Permal and
and 3 typists. In one office of a branch, 5 salesmen are also
Naura. The sale (in `) of these varieties of rice by both the
working. In each office of other branch 2 head-clerks are
farmers in the month of September and October are given
also working. Using matrix notations find :
by the following matrices A and B .
(i) the total number of posts of each kind in all the offices
September Sales (in `)
taken together in each branch.
Basmati Permal Naura
(ii) the total number of posts of each kind in all the offices
10000 20000 30000 Ramkishan
A = >
50000 30000 10000H Gurcharan Singh
taken together from both branches.


Sol :
October Sales (in `)
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe101 Basmati Permal Naura
5000 10000 6000 Ramkishan
B = >
10000H Gurcharan Singh

20000 10000
EXAMPLE 7.2
In section P of class XII of a particular school students (i) Find the combined sales in September and October
were asked to grade each student under value Regular, for each farmer in each variety.
Honest, Respectful. Grades are to be given as A, B, C. The (ii) Find the decrease in sales from September to October.
following information was received (iii) If both farmers receive 2% profit on gross sales,
compute the profit for each farmer and for each variety
Regular Honest Respectful
sold in October.
A 25 20 30


Sol :
B 12 10 10
C 7 15 5 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe103
Chap 7 Application of Matrices Page 85

EXAMPLE 7.4 Telephone Housecall Letter

There are two families A and B . There are 4 men, 6 women 1000 500 5000 " X
B = >
10000H" Y
and 2 children in family A and 2 men, 2 women and 4
3000 1000
children in family B . The recommended daily allowance
for calories is: Men : 2400 gm, Women : 1900 gm, Children Find the total amount spent by the group in the two cities
: 1800 gm and for proteins is: Men : 55 gm, Women : 45 X and Y .
gm, Children : 33 gm.

Sol :
Calculate the total requirement of calories and
proteins for each of the two families. Represent the above Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe107
information by matrices. Using the matrix multiplication,
calculate the total requirements of calories and proteins
for each of the two families.


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe104

EXAMPLE 7.5
Astha and Beena went to Big Bazar. Astha purchased
2 pairs of jeans, 5 tops and 2 pairs of footwears. Beena EXAMPLE 7.8
purchased 3 pairs of jeans, 4 tops and 1 pair of footwear. Three firms A, B and C supplied 40, 35 and 25 truck
If a pair of jeans costs ` 550, Top costs ` 145 and a pair of loads of stones and 10, 5, 8 loads of sand respectively to
footwear costs ` 125, calculate the total amount spent by a contractor. If the cost of stone and sand are ` 1200 and
Astha and Beena in the Big Bazar. ` 500 per truck load respectively, find the total amount
paid by the contractor to each these firm by using matrix


Sol :
method.


Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe105

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe108

EXAMPLE 7.6
The bookshop of a particular school has 10 dozen chemistry
books, 8 dozen physics books, 10 dozen economics books. EXAMPLE 7.9
Their selling prices are ` 80, ` 60 and ` 40 each respectively. There are two families A and B . In family A, there
Find the total amount the bookshop will receive from are 2 men, 3 women, and one child. In family B , there
selling all the books using matrix algebra. are 1 man, 2 women and 2 children. The recommended
daily allowance for calories is : Man-2400, Women-1900,


Sol :
Child-1800 and proteins : Man- 55 gm , Women- 45 gm ,
Child- 33 gm . Represent the above information by matrices.
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe106
Using matrix algebra, calculate the total requirement of
calories and protein for each of two families.
EXAMPLE 7.7

Sol :
In a legislative assembly election, a political group hired
a public relations firm to promote its candidate in three Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe109
ways : telephone, house calls, and letters. The cost per
contact (in paise) is given in matrix A as
cost per contact EXAMPLE 7.10
R V The weekly production figures of a motor corporation
S 40 W Telephone having two types of factories are as follows :
A = S100W Housecall
SS 50 WW Factory A Factory B
Letter
T X
The number of contacts of each type made in two cities X Buses 20 30
and Y is given by Trucks 40 10
Page 86 Application of Matrices Chap 7

The corporation has 5, A type factories and 7, B type 3 speed 5 speed 10 speed
factories. Buses and trucks sell at ` 50000 and ` 40000
Branch 2 60 175 100
respectively. Estimate the total weekly production of buses
and trucks and the total market value of vehicles produced Express the given information as a matrix. Using
each week. multiplication of a scalar times a matrix, find the new


Sol :
daily productions if production is to double.
80 240 300
Ans : >
120 350 200H
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe110

EXAMPLE 7.11 2. A man buys 8 dozen mangoes, 10 dozen of apples and

A manufacturer produces three products x , y , z which he 4 dozen of bananas. Mangoes cost ` 18 per dozen,
sells in two markets. Annual sales are indicated below: apples ` 15 per dozen and banana ` 12 per dozen.
Represent the quantities bought by a row matrix and
Market Product x Product y Product z prices by a column matrix. Using matrix multiplication,
I 10000 2000 18000 determine the total amount spent by the man.
II 6000 20000 8000 Ans : ` 342

(a) If unit sale prices of x , y and z are ` 2.50, ` 1.50

and ` 1.00, respectively. find the total revenue in each
market with the help of matrix algebra. 3. The prices of three commodities A, B and C in a shop
(b) If the unit costs of the above three commodities are are ` 5, ` 6 and ` 10 respectively. Customer X buy 8
` 2.00, ` 1.00 and 50 paise respectively. Find the gross units of A, 7 units of B and 8 units of C . Customer Y
profit. buys 6 units of A, 7 units of B and 8 units of C . Show,
in matrix notation, the prices of the commodities,


Sol :
quantities bought and the amount spent.
R V
S5W 8 7 8 162
Ans : S 6 W, > H, >152H
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe111
SS WW 6 7 8
10
T X
EXAMPLE 7.12
Three shopkeepers A, B and C go to a store to buy 4. A company has two plants. Plant 1 is capable of
stationery. A purchase 12 dozen note-books, 5 dozen pens producing 5 items of A, 10 items of B and 3 items
and 6 dozen pencils. B purchase 10 dozen note-books, of C per one hour of operation. Plant 2 is capable of
6 dozen pens and 7 dozen pencils. C purchase 11 dozen producing 5 items of A, 6 items of B and 6 items of
note-books, 13 dozen pens and 8 dozen pencils. A note C per one hour of operation. Express this information
book costs 40 paise, a pen costs ` 1.25 and a pencil costs in a 3 # 2 matrix. Using matrix multiplication,
35 paise. Use matrix multiplication to calculate each determine the total number of items A, B and C
individual’s bill. produced if Plant 1 is operated for 10 hours and Plant


Sol : 2 is operated for 5 hours.
Ans : A = 75 units, B = 130 units, C = 60 units
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe112

5. A factory produces 3 types of portable radio sets called

Audio 1, Audio 2 and Audio 3. Audio 1 contains 1
transistor, 10 resistors and 5 capacitors, while Audio
E X ERC I S E 7.1 2 contains 2 transistors, 18 resistors and 7 capacitors,
and Audio 3 contains 3 transistors, 24 resistors and 10
1. A bicycle company has two branches whose daily capacitors. Represent these information in the form of
productions are given below: a matrix. Using matrix multiplication, calculate the
3 speed 5 speed 10 speed factory’s weekly consumption of transistors, resistors
Branch 1 40 120 150 and capacitors, if weekly output of sales is 100 of
Audio 1250 of Audio 2 and 80 of Audio 3.
Chap 7 Application of Matrices Page 87

Ans : Transistors : 840, Registors : 7420, Capacitors sets. A sells weekly 48 radios, 20 tape recorders and
: 3050 12 television sets; B sells weekly 57 radios, 17 tape
recorders and 15 television sets, and C sells weekly 35
radios, 22 tape recorders and 18 television sets. Using
6. Three person buy cold drinks of different brands A, B matrices, calculate their individual profits, if the net
and C . The first person buys 12 bottles of A, 5 bottles revenue on a radio is ` 50, on a tape recorder ` 75 and
of B and 3 bottles of C . The second person buys 4 on a television set ` 250.
bottles of A, 6 bottles of B and 10 bottles of C . The Ans : ` 6900, ` 7875, ` 7900
third person buys 6 bottles of A, 7 bottles of B and 9
bottles of C . Represent these information in the form
of a matrix. If each bottle of brand A costs ` 4, each 10. Two television companies TV1 and TV2 , both televise
bottle of B costs ` 5 and each bottle of C costs ` 6, documentary programmes and variety programmes.
then using matrix operations, find the total sum of TV1 has two transmitting stations and TV2 has three
money spent individually by the three persons for the transmitting stations, all stations transmit different
purchase of cold drinks. programmes. On an average, each TV1 station
Ans : ` 91, ` 106, ` 113 broadcasts 1 hour of documentary and 3 hours of
variety programmes each day, whereas each TV2 station
broadcasts 2 hours of documentary and 1 12 hours
7. There are two families X and Y . Family X has 2 men, of variety programmes each day. The transmission
3 women and one child, while family Y has one of documentary and variety programmes costs
man, one woman and two children. Their approximately ` 50 and ` 200 per hour respectively.
individual daily requirements are as follows: Express, in matrix form and hence evaluate:
(i) the daily cost of transmission from each TV1 and
Calories Protein each TV2 station.
Man 2400 55 (ii) the total number of hours which are devoted daily
Woman 1900 45 to documentary and to variety programmes by both
companies.
Child 1800 33
(iii) the total daily cost of transmission incurred
Present the above information in the form of matrices. by both companies.
Using matrix multiplication, calculate the total daily Ans : (i) ` 650, ` 400, (ii) Documentary : 8 hours,
requirements of calories and protein for each of the Variety : 10.5 hours, (iii) ` 2500
two families.
Ans : Family X : 12300 calories and 278 gms protein;
Family Y : 7900 calories and 166 gms protein

7.2 Leontief input-output model

8. A student has 4 places where he can have his lunch.
The college canteen charges ` 9 for a cold drink, The economy of any country is the large set of inter-
` 6 for a cutlet and ` 5 for a sandwich. The coffee related production, consumption, and exchange activities.
house charges ` 10, ` 8 and ` 9 for the same items, It is dependent on many sectors which are interlinked with
while fast food joint charges ` 12, ` 15, ` 15 and the each other. In this section we try to learn whether the
restaurant charges ` 15, ` 25 and ` 20 for the above interlinks are viable or not. If the system is viable then try
items respectively. The student wants to have one cold to find the interlink inputs based on the demand in the
drink, two cutlets and one sandwich. Where should he market. Many sectors are sharing their resources and try
have his lunch so that the lunch costs him the least? to become self-sufficient and independent.
(Use of Matrix-Algebra is required). Input–Output analysis is a technique which was
Ans : College canteen invented by Prof. Wassily W. Leontief. Input–Output
analysis is a form of economic analysis based on the
interdependencies between economic sectors. The method
is most commonly used for estimating the impacts of
9. There are three electric dealers in a pure competition
positive or negative economic shocks and analyzing the
market who sell Radios, Tape recorders and Television
Page 88 Application of Matrices Chap 7

ripple effects throughout an economy.

*>0 1H - >a a H4>x H = >d H
1 0 a11 a12 x1 d1
The foundation of Input–Output analysis involves
21 22 2 2
input–output tables. Such tables include a series of rows
(1 - B) X = D
and columns of data that quantify the supply chain for
a11 a12
A = >
a21 a22H
sectors of the economy. Industries are listed in the heads where
of each row and each column. The data in each column
corresponds to the level of inputs used in that industry’s 1 0
production function. For example the column for auto I = > H
0 1
manufacturing shows the resources required for building
x1
automobiles (ie., requirement of steel, aluminum, plastic, X = > H
electronic etc.,). Input–Output models typically includes x2
separate tables showing the amount of labour required per d1
rupee unit of investment or production. and D = > H
d2
Consider a simple economic model consisting of two
Solving we get, X = (I − A) −1 D
industries A1 and A2 where each produces only one type
The matrix B is known as the technology matrix.
of product. Assume that each industry consumes part of
its own output and rest from the other industry for its The Hawkins–Simon Conditions
operation. The industries are thus interdependent. Further Hawkins–Simon conditions ensure the viability of the
assume that whatever is produced that is consumed. That system. If A is the technology matrix then Hawkins–Simon
is the total output of each industry must be such as to conditions are
meet its own demand, the demand of the other industry (i) The main diagonal elements in I - A must be positive
and the external demand (final demand). .
Our aim is to determine the output levels of each (ii) I - A must be positive.
of the two industries in order to meet a change in final
demand, based on knowledge of the current outputs of the
two industries, of course under the assumption that the EXAMPLE 7.13
structure of the economy does not change. The input-output coefficient matrix for 2-sector economy
0.10 0.5
is A = >
0.20 0.25H
Let bij be the rupee value of the output of Bi consumed
by B j , i , j = 1, 2 . Let x1 and x2 be the rupee value of the
current outputs of B1 and B2 respectively. Let d1 and d2 be If the final demands for two industries are 300 and 100
the rupee value of the final demands for the outputs of B1 units, find the total output.
and B2 respectively.

Sol :
The assumptions lead us to frame the two equations
b11 + b12 + d1 = x1 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe113
b21 + b22 + d2 = x2 ...(1)
b EXAMPLE 7.14
Let aij = ij , i, j = 1, 2
xj
0.4 0.1 400
Given A = > H and final demand D = > H. Calculate
Thus a11 = b11 , a12 = b12 , a21 = b21 and a22 = b22 0.7 0.6 200
x1 x2 x1 x2
x1
The equations (1) take the form the gross output > H using input output technique.
x2
a11 x1 + a12 x2 + d1 = x1

Sol :

a21 x1 + a22 x2 + d2 = x2
The above equations can be rearranged as Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe114
(1 - a11) x1 - a12 x2 = d1
− a21 x1 + (1 − a22) x2 = d2 EXAMPLE 7.15
The matrix form of the above equations is The input-output coefficient matrix for 2-sector economy
0.4 0.25
is A = >
0.2 0.5 H
1 - a11 - a12 x1 d1
> H> H = > H . The final demands for two industries
- a21 1 - a22 x2 d2
are 18 and 44 units respectively. Find the gross output of
Chap 7 Application of Matrices Page 89

these two industries. (i) Find the total output of sectors.

Sol : (ii) Find the technical coefficients.
(iii) Find the matrix of technical coefficients.
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe115 (iv) Find the Leontief matrix.
(v) Verify Simon-Hawkins conditions for the viability of
this system.
EXAMPLE 7.16

Sol :
For the following input-output table, calculate the
technology matrix and write the balance equations for the Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe118
two sectors :
Output Input Final Demand
A B
A 50 150 200
B 100 75 100
Does a solution exist for the system?


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe116

EXAMPLE 7.19
For a two-sector economy with production sectors X and
EXAMPLE 7.17 Y , the inter-sectoral demand and final demand are as
For a two-sector economy with production sectors X and follows:
Y , the inter-sectoral demand and final demand are as Receiving sectors
follows: Producing sectors Final demand
X Y
Input X 570 4000 1100
Output Final Demand
X Y Y 3400 2400 2200
X 30 40 50 (i) Find the total output of sectors X and Y .
Y 20 10 30 (ii) Find the technical coefficients.
(i) Find the total output of sectors X and Y . (iii) Find the matrix of technical coefficients.
(ii) Find the technical coefficients. (iv) Find the Leontief matrix.
(iii) Find the matrix of technical coefficients. (v) Verify Simon-Hawkins conditions for the viability of
(iv) Find the Leontief matrix. this system.
(v) Verify Simon-Hawkins conditions for the viability of

Sol :
this system.


Sol : Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe119

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe117

EXAMPLE 7.20
Suppose the inter-industry flow of the products of two
EXAMPLE 7.18 industries are given as under:
For a two-sector economy with production sectors steel Production Receiving sectors Domestic Total
and coal, the inter-sectoral demand and final demand are sector Demand Output
X Y
as follows:
X 30 40 50 120
Receiving Sectors Final Y 20 10 30 60
Producing Sectors
Steel Coal Demand
Determine the technology matrix and test Simon-
Steel 29.50 17.50 100 Hawkins conditions for the viability of this system.
Coal 58.25 8.75 20 If the domestic demand changes to 80 and 40 units
Page 90 Application of Matrices Chap 7

respectively, what should be the gross output of each sector Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe123
in order to meet the new demands?


Sol :
EXAMPLE 7.24
Find the demand vector which is consistent with the input-
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe120 1 3
output coefficient matrix given by A = > 1 H and output
4 8
1
2 4
200
EXAMPLE 7.21 vector = > H
200
Given the following transformation matrix


Sol :
Producing Receiving sectors Final Demand
Sectors Agriculture Industry Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe124
Agriculture 300 600 100
Industry 400 1200 400
Find the gross output to meet the final demand of 200 EXAMPLE 7.25
units of agriculture and 800 units of industry. The input-output coefficient matrix for a 2-industry
economy is given by :


Sol :
Input
Output
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe121 X1 X2
X1 0.3 0.3
EXAMPLE 7.22 X2 0.4 0.6
The following table gives the input-output coefficients Labour 0.3 0.1
for a two sector economy consisting of agriculture and If the final demand for two industries are 90 and 520 units,
manufacturing industry: find the gross output of each industry to meet the final
Input Agriculture Manufacturing demand. Also find the labour requirements.
Industry

Sol :
Agriculture 0.10 1.50
Manufacturing 0.20 0.25 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe125

The final demand for the two industries are 300 and
100 units respectively. Find the gross output of the two EXAMPLE 7.26
industries. The input-output coefficient matrix for 2-sector economy
0.1 0.3
is A = >
0 0.2H


Sol :
. The final demands for two industries

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe122 are 350 and 350 units respectively. Find the gross output
of these two industries.

EXAMPLE 7.23


Sol :
You are given the following technology matrix for a two
industry economy:
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe126
Output Input
Steel Coal
EXAMPLE 7.27
Steel 0.4 0.1 An economy produces only coal and steel. The two
Coal 0.7 0.6 commodities serve as intermediate inputs in each other’s
If the final demand targets are ` 50 crores in steel and production. 0.4 tonne of steel and 0.7 tonne of coal are
` 100 crores in coal, determine the output of each industry. needed to produce a tonne of steel. Similarly 0.1 tonne of
Also construct an input-output table for the economy. steel and 0.6 tonne of coal are required to produce a tonne


Sol : of coal. No capital inputs are needed. If the economy needs
Chap 7 Application of Matrices Page 91

400 tonnes of steel and 200 tonnes of coal, calculate the technology matrix. If 68 tonnes of A and 10.2 tonnes
gross output of the two commodities. of B are required, find the gross production of both


Sol : of them.
Ans : A = 27.82 tonnes, B = 98.91 tonnes
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe127

5. Suppose the inter-industry flow of the product of two

EXAMPLE 7.28 industries are given as under.
For the following input-output table, calculate the Production Consumption D o m e s t i c T o t a l
technology matrix and also write the balance equations sector sector demand output
for the two sectors:
X Y
Output Input Final Demand X 30 40 50 120
A B Y 20 10 30 60
A 50 150 200 Determine the technology matrix and test Hawkin’s-
B 100 75 100 Simon conditions for the viability of the system. If
the domestic demand changes to 80 and 40 units


Sol :
respectively, what should be the gross output of each
sector in order to meet the new demands.
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe128 Ans : 181.62, 84.32

6. You are given the following transaction matrix for a

E X ERC I S E 7.2 two sector economy.
Sector Sales Final demand Gross output
1. The technology matrix of an economic system of two 1 2
0.50 0.30
industries is >0.41 0.33H . Test whether the system is 1 4 3 13 20
2 5 4 3 12
viable as per Hawkins Simon conditions.
Ans : It is viable (i) Write the technology matrix
(ii) Determine the output when the final demand for
the output sector 1 alone increases to 23 units.
2. The technology matrix of an economic system of two Ans : 34.16, 17.31
0.6 0.9
industries is >0.20 0.80H . Test whether the system is

viable as per Hawkins-Simon conditions. 7. Suppose the inter-industry flow of the product of two
Ans : It is not viable sectors X and Y are given as under.
Production Consumption D o m e s t i c G r o s s
sector sector demand output
3. The technology matrix of an economic system of two
0.50 0.25 X Y
industries is >0.40 0.67H . Test whether the system is
X 15 10 10 35
viable as per Hawkins-Simon conditions. Y 20 30 15 65
Ans : It is viable Find the gross output when the domestic demand
changes to 12 for X and 18 for Y .
Ans : 42 and 78
4. Two commodities A and B are produced such that 0.4
tonne of A and 0.7 tonne of B are required to produce
a tonne of A . Similarly 0.1 tonne of A and 0.7 tonne of 8. The technology matrix of an economic system of two
B are needed to produce a tonne of B . Write down the
Page 92 Application of Matrices Chap 7

0.8 0.2
industries is >0.9 0.7H . Test whether the system is viable

as per Hawkins – Simon conditions.

Ans : It is not viable

9. The following inter – industry transactions table was

constructed for an economy of the year 2016.

Industry 1 2 F i n a l T o t a l
consumption output
1 500 1600 400 2500
2 1750 1600 4650 8000
Labours 250 4800
Construct technology co-efficient matrix showing
direct requirements. Does a solution exist for this
system.
0.2 0.2
Ans : >0.7 0.2H this system has a solution.

10. In an economy there are two industries P1 and P2 and

the following table gives the supply and the demand
position in crores of rupees.
Production Consumption F i n a l G r o s s
sector sector demand output
P1 P2
P1 10 25 15 50
P2 20 30 10 60
Determine the outputs when the final demand changes
to 35 for P1 and 42 for P2 .
Ans : The output of industry P1 should be ` 150
crores and P2 should be ` 204 crores.
Chap 8 Solution of Simultaneous Equations Page 93

CHAPTER 8

Solution of Simultaneous Equations

8.1 System of simultaneous equations

c1 b1
Let a system of simultaneous linear equations be D 1 =
c2 b2
a 1 x + b 1 y + c 1 z = d 1
a1 c 1
a2 x + b2 y + c2 z = d2 ...(1) and D 2 =
a2 c2
a 3 x + b 3 y + c 3 z = d 3
a1 b 1 a1 x b 1
A set of values of the unknowns x , y , z which satisfy Then, xD = x =
a2 b2 a2 x b2
all the three equations simultaneously is called a solution
(Operate C1 " C1 + yC 2 )
of the system (1). For example, x = 1, y = 2 , z = 1 is a
solution of the system of equations a1 x + b1 y b 1
=

a2 x + b2 y b2
6x + y − 3z = 5
x + 3 y − 2z = 5 c1 b1
=
(Using (1))
c2 b2
2x + y + 4z = 8
If d1 = d2 = d 3 = 0 in (1), then the system is said to be = D1
homogeneous, otherwise, it is called non-homogeneous. Similarly, we shall obtain yD = D2 .
If a system of linear equations has one or more This, if D ! 0 , then the system of linear equations
solutions, then the system is said to be consistent, (1) has a unique solution given by
otherwise, it is called inconsistent.
x = D1 and y = D2
A non-homogeneous system of linear equations may D D
have Conditions for Consistency of a (non-homogeneous) system
1. a unique solution, the system is consistent and of Two Linear Equations in Two Unknowns
independent. The following three cases arise :
2. infinite number of solutions, the system is consistent 1. If D ! 0 , the system is consistent and independent,
and dependent.
and has a unique solution given by x = D1 , y = D2 .
3. no solution, the system is inconsistent. D D
2. If D = 0 and either of D1 , D2 is non-zero, then the
system is inconsistent and it has no solution.
8.2 Determinant method (Cramer rule) 3. If D = D1 = D2 = 0 , then the system is consistent and
dependent, and has infinitely many solutions.
8.2.1 Solution of Two Linear Equations
Note :
Let the (non-homogeneous) system of two linear equations
in two unknowns be In fact, the given equations represent two straight
lines. Three cases arise :
3
a 1 x + b 1 y = c 1
1. If the lines intersect, the given system has unique
a2 x + b2 y = c2 ...(1) solution.
Let D be the determinant of the coefficients of x and y , and 2. If the lines are parallel, the given system has no
D1 , D2 be the determinants obtained from D by replacing solution.
the coefficients of x , y respectively by the constant terms 3. If the lines coincide, the given system has infinitely
i.e. many solutions.
a1 b 1
D =
a2 b2
Page 94 Solution of Simultaneous Equations Chap 8

EXAMPLE 8.1 8.2.2 Solution of Three Linear Equations

Using Cramer’s rule, solve the following systems of linear
Let the (non-homogeneous) system of three linear equations
equations:
in three unknowns be
2x + 3y = 10
a 1 x + b 1 y + c 1 z = d 1
x + 6y = 4
a2 x + b2 y + c2 z = d2 ...(1)


Sol :
a 3 x + b 3 y + c 3 z = d 3

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/he101 Let D be the determinant of the coefficients of x , y

and z and D1 , D2 and D 3 be the determinants obtained from
D by replacing the coefficients of x , y and z respectively
EXAMPLE 8.2
by the constant terms i.e.
Using Cramer’s rule, solve the following systems of linear
equations: a1 b 1 c1 d1 b 1 c1
D = a2 b2 c2 and D1 = d2 b2 c2
^a + b h x − ^a − b h y = 4ab


a3 b3 c3 d3 b3 c3
^a − b h x + ^a + b h y = 2 ^a2 − b2h


Sol : a1 d1 c 1 a1 b 1 d1
D 2 = a 2 d 2 c 2 , D 3 = a 2 b 2 d 2
a3 d3 c3 a3 b3 d3
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/he102
a1 b 1 c1 a1 x b 1 c1
Then, xD = x a2 b2 c2 = a2 x b2 c2
EXAMPLE 8.3
a3 b3 c3 a3 x b3 c3
Which of the following equations are consistent ? If
consistent, solve them: (Operate C1 " C1 + yC 2 + zC 3 )
2x - y = 5 a1 x + b1 y + c 1 z b1 c1
4x - 2y = 7 = a2 x + b2 y + c2 z
b2 c2


Sol : a3 x + b3 y + c3 z b3 c3

d1 b 1 c1
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/he103 = d2 b2 c2
(using (1))
d3 b3 c3
EXAMPLE 8.4 = D1
Which of the following equations are consistent ? If Similarly, we shall obtain
consistent, solve them: yD = D2 and zD = D 3
x + 2y = 5 Thus, if D ! 0 , then the system of linear equations (1) has
3x + 6y = 15 a unique solution given by


Sol : x = D1 , y = D2 and z = D 3
D D D
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/he104 Note :
1. The above method of solving a system of three linear
equations in three unknowns can be extended in the
EXAMPLE 8.5
same way to solve a system of n linear equations in n
Solve the equations by Cramer’s rule (OR using
unknowns.
determinants):
3 + 2 = 5 and 4 − 1 = 3 . 2. It may be noted that the constant terms in the given
x−2 y−3 x−2 y−3 equations are on the right hand side.


Sol : Conditions for Consistency of a (non-homogeneous)System
of Three Linear Equations in Three Unknowns :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/he105 The following three cases arise :
1. If D ! 0 , the given system is consistent and
independent, and has a unique solution given by
Chap 8 Solution of Simultaneous Equations Page 95

x = D1 , y = D2 and z = D 3 x - 2y - z = 1
D D D

Sol :
2. If D = 0 and atleast one of D1 , D2 , D 3 is non-zero,
then the system is inconsistent and it has no solution. Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/he110
3. If D = D1 = D2 = D 3 = 0 , then the system may or may
not be consistent. In case the system is consistent,
then it will have an infinite number of solution and EXAMPLE 8.11
the system is dependent. Using determinants, find whether the system x − 3y + 5z = 4
, 2x − 6y + 10z = 11, 3x − 9y + 15z = 12 is consistent or
not.
EXAMPLE 8.6
The following equations are obtained in an electrical

Sol :

experiment. Find I 3 by Cramer’s rules:

4I1 − 3I2 = 2 , 9I2 − 4I 3 = 3I1 , − 4I2 + 9I 3 = 0 . Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/he111


Sol :

EXAMPLE 8.12
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/he106 By using determinants, solve the following system of linear
equations.
EXAMPLE 8.7 x + y + z = 1
Find z using Cramer’s rule, if x + 2y + 3z = 4
x + 2y + 3z = 6 , 2x + 4y = 7 − z , 3x + 9z = 14 − 2y. x + 3y + 5z = 7


Sol :

Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/he107 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/he112

EXAMPLE 8.8
The voltages in an electric circuit are related by the
following equations:
V1 + V2 + V3 = 9 , V1 − V2 + V3 = 3 , V1 + V2 − V3 = 1. Find
V1 , V2 , V3 using Cramer’s rule.


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/he108

EXAMPLE 8.9
Using Cramer’s rule find the quadratic defined by
E X ERC I S E 8 . 1
f ^x h = ax2 + bx + c
if f ^1 h = 0 , f ^2 h =− 2 and f ^3h =− 6
Solve the following equations using Cramer’s rule
2x − y = 17


Sol : 1.
3x + 5y = 16
Ans : x = 7 , y =− 3
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/he109

EXAMPLE 8.10 x + 2y = 1
Using determinants, show that the following system of 2.
3x + y = 4
linear equations is inconsistent: Ans : x = 7/5 , y =− 1/5
3x − y + 2z = 3
2x + y + 3z = 5
Page 96 Solution of Simultaneous Equations Chap 8

8x − 3y = 14 8.3 Inverse Matrix method

3.
2x + 9y = − 3
Solution of a system of linear equations by using inverse
Ans : x = 3/2 , y =− 2/3 of a matrix is called matrix method. Let the system of
simultaneous linear equations be

5x + 7y = − 2 a 1 x + b 1 y + c 1 z = d 1
4.
4x + 6y = − 3 a2 x + b2 y + c2 z = d2 ...(1)
Ans : x = 9/2 , y =− 7/2 a 3 x + b 3 y + c 3 z = d 3

The system of linear equations can be written as a single

2x − y = − 2 matrix equation
5. AX = B
3x + 4y + 8= 0
R V R V R V
Ans : x =− 16/11, y =− 10/11 Sa1 b1 c1W Sx W Sd1W
where A = Sa2 b2 c2W, X = Sy W and B = Sd2W
SS W SS WW SS WW
a 3 b 3 c 3W z d3
T X T X T X
3x + ay = 4 The matrix A is called the coefficient matrix of the system
6.
2x + ay = 2, a ! 0 of linear equations.
Ans : x = 2 , y =− 2/a Solution of a System of Linear Equations
In particular, if A is non-singular i.e., A ! 0 , then the
given system has a unique solution X = A−1 B .
PROOF :
3x − 4y + 5z =− 6
7. x + y − 2z =− 1 As A is non-singular, A-1 exists.
2x + 3y + z = 5 Now AX = B & A-1 ^AX h = A−1 B
Ans : x =− 1, y = 2 , z = 1 (Pre-multiplying by A-1 )
^A-1 Ah X = A−1 B & In X = A−1 B
X = A−1 B
2x + 3y + 4z = 8 Uniqueness of Solution:
8. 3x + y − z =− 2 Let X1 , X2 be two solutions of AX = B , then
4x − y − 5z =− 9 AX1 = B and AX2 = B
Ans : x = 1, y =− 2 ,z = 3 AX1 = AX2
^A-1h^AX1h = A−1 ^AX2h
^A-1 Ah X1 = ^A−1 Ah X2
3x − 4y + 2z =− 1
9. 2x + 3y + 5z = 7 I n X1 = I n X 2
x+z = 2 X1 = X 2
Ans : x = 3 , y = 2 , z =− 1 However, if A is singular then A-1 does not exist.
But this does not mean that the system has no solution.
Illustration :

3x + 4y + 2z = 8 (i) Consider the system of equations

10. 2y − 3z = 3 x + 3y = 5
x − 2y + 6z =− 2
2x + 6y = 10
Ans : x =− 2 , y = 3 , z = 1 1 3
Here A = =0
2 6
i.e. A is singular but this system has infinite number of
solutions. For any arbitrary number k , y = k , x = 5 − 3k
is a solution of the system. So, the system is consistent.
(ii) Consider the system of equation
Chap 8 Solution of Simultaneous Equations Page 97

x + 3y = 5 x + 3y = 5
x + 3y = 8 2x + 6y = 8 is inconsistent.
1 3

Sol :
Here A = =0
1 3
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/he115
i.e. A is singular but this system has no solution. So, the
system is inconsistent.
Thus, if A is singular matrix, then the system of EXAMPLE 8.16
equations given by the matrix equation AX = B may be Solve the following system of equations by using matrix
consistent having infinitely many solutions or may be method:
inconsistent. 3x + 4y = 7
6x + 8y = 14
8.3.1 Criterion for Consistency or Inconsistency

Sol :
We given below criterion (without proof) for consistency
or inconsistency of a system of n non-homogeneous linear Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/he116
equations in n unknowns given by the matrix equation
AX = B .
1. If A ! 0 , then the system is consistent and it has a EXAMPLE 8.17
unique solution given by X = A−1 B . Using matrix method, determine whether the following
2. If A = 0 and ^adj Ah B = O , the system is consistent system of equations is consistent or inconsistent:
and has infinitely many solutions. 5x − y + 4z = 5
3. If A = 0 and ^adj Ah B !O , the system is inconsistent. 2x + 3y + 5z = 2
Note : 5x − 2y + 6z =− 1
In case 2 above, we assume that adj A !O . However, if

Sol :
adj A = O , then the system may or may not be consistent.
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/he117
EXAMPLE 8.13
Using matrices, solve the equations EXAMPLE 8.18
5x - 7y = 2 Using matrix method, determine whether the following
7x - 5y = 3 system of equations is consistent or inconsistent:


Sol : 3x - y - 2z = 2
2y - z =− 1
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/he113 3x - 5y = 3


Sol :

EXAMPLE 8.14
1 −2 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/he118
If A = >
2 1H
, then using A-1 , solve the following system

of equations: EXAMPLE 8.19

x - 2y =− 1, Examine the consistency of the system of equations:
2x + y = 2 x + y + z = 1


Sol : 2x + 3y + 2z = 2
ax + ay + 2az = 4 , a ! 0
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/he114

Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/he119

EXAMPLE 8.15
Use matrix method to show that the system of equations
Page 98 Solution of Simultaneous Equations Chap 8

EXAMPLE 8.20 x + 2y − 3z =− 4
Using matrices, solve the following system of equations: 4. 2x + 3y + 2z = 2
3x + 2y − 2z = 3 3x − 3y − 4z = 11
Ans : x = 1, y = 2 , z = 3
x + 2 y + 3z = 6
2x − y + z = 2


Sol :
2x − 3y + 5z = 11
5. 3x + 2y − 4z =− 5
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/he120 x + y − 2z =− 3
Ans : x = 1, y = 2 ,z = 3
EXAMPLE 8.21
Using matrices, solve the following system of equations:
4x + 3y + 2z = 60 x + y + z= 3
x + 2y + 3z = 45 6. 2x − y + z = 2
x − 2y + 3z = 2
6x + 2y + 3z = 70


Sol :
Ans : x = 1, y = 1, z = 1

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/he121

x + y − z= 1
7. 3x + y − 2z = 3
x − y − z =− 1
Ans : x = 2 , y = 1, z = 2

x + y + z= 6
8. x + 2z = 7
3x + y + z = 12
Ans : x = 3 , y = 1, z = 2

E X ERC I S E 8.2
2x − 3y + z =− 1
9. x − 2y + 3z = 6
Solve the following equations using matrix method:
− 3y + 2z = 0
x + 2y − 3z = 6
1. 3x + 2y − 2z = 3 Ans : x = 1, y = 2 , z = 3
2x − y + z = 2
Ans : x = 1, y =− 5 , z =− 5
4x + 3y + 2z = 60
10. x + 2y + 3z = 45
x−y = 3 6x + 2y + 3z = 70
2. 2x + 3y + 4z = 17 Ans : x = 5 , y = 8 , z = 8
y + 2z = 1
Ans : x = 6 , y = 3 , z =− 1

2x + y + 2z = 3
3. x + y + 2z = 2 8.4 Row Reduction method
2x + 3y − z = − 2
Ans : x = 1, y =− 1, z = 1 Here we start by writing the given linear equations as the
Chap 8 Solution of Simultaneous Equations Page 99

matrix equation AX = B . Then we perform suitable row Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/he125

transformations on the matrix A. Using the elementary
row transformations, we reduce matrix A into an diagonal
matrix. The same row transformations are performed EXAMPLE 8.26
simultaneously on matrix B. After this we get the value Solve the following system of simultaneous linear equation
of variable. The required solution is obtained in this way. by row reduction method :
2x − 3y + z =− 9
− 2x + y − 3z = 7
EXAMPLE 8.22
Solve the following system of simultaneous linear equation x − y + 2z =− 5
by row reduction method :

Sol :

x + y + z = 6
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/he126
x − y + z = 2
x - y - z =− 4


Sol : EXAMPLE 8.27
Solve the following system of simultaneous linear equation
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/he122 by row reduction method :
2x − 5y + 2z = 16
3x + 2y − 3z =− 19
EXAMPLE 8.23
Solve the following system of simultaneous linear equation 4x − 3y + 4z = 18
by row reduction method :

Sol :

x + y + z = 2
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/he127
x + 2y − z = 6
2x + y − z = 5


Sol : EXAMPLE 8.28
Solve the following system of simultaneous linear equation
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/he123 by row reduction method :
x + y − z = 2
− x − y + z =− 2
EXAMPLE 8.24
Solve the following system of simultaneous linear equation 2x + 2y − 2z = 4
by row reduction method :

Sol :

x − 2 y + 4z = 3
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/he128
x + 3 y − 2z = 6
x − 4y + 3z =− 5


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/he124 E X ERC I S E 8 . 3

Solve the following equations using row reduction method.
EXAMPLE 8.25
Solve the following system of simultaneous linear equation x + 2y − 3z = 6
by row reduction method : 1. 3x + 2y − 2z = 3
2x − y + z = 2
2x − y + z = 10
Ans : x = 1, y =− 5 , z =− 5
3x - 2y - 2z = 7
x - 3y - 2z = 10


Sol : x−y = 3
2. 2x + 3y + 4z = 17
y + 2z = 1
Page 100 Solution of Simultaneous Equations Chap 8

Ans : x = 6 , y = 3 , z =− 1 Ans : x = 5 , y = 8 , z = 8

2x + y + 2z = 3
3. x + y + 2z = 2
2x + 3y − z = − 2
8.5 Real life problems
Ans : x = 1, y =− 1, z = 1
In real life, the applications of linear equations are vast.
To tackle real-life problems using algebra, we convert the
x + 2y − 3z =− 4 given situation into mathematical statements in such a
4. 2x + 3y + 2z = 2 way that it clearly illustrates the relationship between the
3x − 3y − 4z = 11 unknowns (variables) and the information provided. The
Ans : x = 1, y = 2 , z = 3 following steps are involved while restating a situation into
a mathematical statement:
(i) Translate the problem statement into a mathematical
2x − 3y + 5z = 11 statement and set it up in the form of algebraic
5. 3x + 2y − 4z =− 5 expression in a manner it illustrates the problem aptly.
x + y − 2z =− 3 (ii) Identify the unknowns in the problem and assign
variables (quantity whose value can change depending
Ans : x = 1, y = 2 ,z = 3 upon the mathematical context) to these unknown
quantities.
(iii) Read the problem thoroughly multiple times and
x + y + z= 3 cite the data, phrases and keywords. Organize the
6. 2x − y + z = 2 information obtained sequentially.
x − 2y + 3z = 2 (iv) Frame equations with the help of the algebraic
Ans : x = 1, y = 1, z = 1 expression and the data provided in the problem
statement
(v) Solve simultaneous equitation using following matrix
x + y − z= 1 methods
7. 3x + y − 2z = 3 1. Cramer Rule
x − y − z =− 1 2. Matrix Inverse Method
3. Row reduction Method
Ans : x = 2 , y = 1, z = 2

x + y + z= 6 EXAMPLE 8.29
8. x + 2z = 7 The monthly incomes of Aryan and Babban are in the
3x + y + z = 12 ratio 3 : 4 and their monthly expenditures are in the ratio
5 : 7. If each saves ` 15000 per month, find their monthly
Ans : x = 3 , y = 1, z = 2
incomes using matrix method.?


Sol :

2x − 3y + z =− 1
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/he129
9. x − 2y + 3z = 6
− 3y + 2z = 0
Ans : x = 1, y = 2 , z = 3 EXAMPLE 8.30
On Monday Manish paid Rs 170 for two cups of coffee and
one doughnut, including the tip. On Tuesday he paid Rs
4x + 3y + 2z = 60 165 for two doughnuts and a cup of coffee, including the
10. x + 2y + 3z = 45 tip. On Wednesday he paid Rs 130 for one coffee and one
6x + 2y + 3z = 70
Chap 8 Solution of Simultaneous Equations Page 101

doughnut, including the tip. If he always tips the same Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/he134
amount, then what is the amount of each item?


Sol :
EXAMPLE 8.35
An amount of < 5000 is put into three different investments
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/he130
at the rate of 6%, 7% and 8% per annum respectively.
The total annual income is < 358. If the combined annual
EXAMPLE 8.31 income from the first two investments is rupees 70 more
Harry has $2.25 in nickels, dimes, and quarters. If he had than the income from the third, find the amount of each
twice as many nickels, half as many dimes, and the same investments by using matrix algebra.
number of quarters, he would have $2.50. If he has 27 coins

Sol :
altogether, then how many of each does he have?


Sol : Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/he135

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/he131

EXAMPLE 8.36
An amount of < 65000 is invested in three investments at
EXAMPLE 8.32 the rate of 6%, 8% and 9% per annum, respectively. The
Big Bazar Fruit Mart sells variety packs. The small pack total annual income is < 4800. The income from the third
contains three bananas, two apples, and one orange for Rs investment is < 600 more than the income from the second
180. The medium pack contains four bananas, three apples, investment. Using matrix algebra determine the amount
and three oranges for Rs 305. The family size contains six of investment.
bananas, five apples, and four oranges for Rs 465. What

Sol :
price should Big Bazar charge for his lunch-box special
that consists of one banana, one apple, and one orange? Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/he136


Sol :

EXAMPLE 8.37
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/he132
To control a certain crop disease it is necessary to use 8
units of chemical A, 14 units of chemical B and 13 units
EXAMPLE 8.33 of chemical C . One barrel of spray P contains one unit of
The sum of the digits of a three-digit number is 11. If the A, 2 units of B , and 3 units of C . One barrel of spray Q
digits are reversed, the new number is 46 more than five contains 2 units of A, 3 units of B and 2 units of C . One
times the old number. If the hundreds digit plus twice barrel of spray R contains one unit of A, 2 units of B and
the tens digit is equal to the units digit, then what is the 2 units of C . Find how many barrels of each type of spray
number? be used to just meet the requirement.


Sol :

Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/he133 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/he137

EXAMPLE 8.34 EXAMPLE 8.38

Rajkumar has invested a part of his investment in 10% Amar purchases 4 units of Z and sells 3 units of X and
bond A and a part in 15% bond B . His interest income 5 units of Y . Akbar purchases 3 units of Y and sells 2
during first year is < 4000. If he invests 20% more in 10% units of X and 1 unit of Z . Anthony purchases 1 unit of
bond A and 10% more in 15% bond B , his income during X and sells 4 units of Y and 6 units of Z . In this process
second year increases by < 500. Find his initial investment Amar. Akbar and Anthony earn < 6000, < 5000 and < 13000
and the new investment in bonds A and B , using matrix respectively. Using matrices, find the prices per unit of the
method. three commodities.
(Note that selling the units is positive earnings and buying


Sol :
the units is negative earnings).


Sol :
Page 102 Solution of Simultaneous Equations Chap 8

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/he138 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/he141

EXAMPLE 8.39 EXAMPLE 8.42

An automobile manufacture uses three different types of A firm produces three products P1, P2 and P3 processed on
trucks T1, T2 and T3 to transport the number of station 3 machines M1, M2, M 3 . Before completion M1 can process
wagons, sedan cars and hatchback cars as shown in the 25 units of P1 or 50 units of P2 or 75 units of P3 per hour.
following matrix: M2 can process 50 units of any product per hour. M 3 can
Trucks process 50 or 25 or 100 units per hour of the products P1, P2
T1 T2 T3 and P3 respectively. The processing hours available on the
Stations Wagons RS2 6 9 WV machines M1, M2 and M 3 are 12, 12 and 13 respectively.
Sedan S3 7 12W Using matrix notations, find
Hatchback SS6 6 8 WW 1. How many units of three products can be produced
Using the inverse of the T matrix,
X determine the number of with the available time?
trucks of each type required to supply 58 stations wagons, 2. The production cost per unit if costs per hour of
75 sedan cars and 62 hatchback cars to a dealer in Kanpur. operating machines M1, M2 and M 3 are < 500 < 1000
If a dealer in Jaipur orders 46 station wagons, 60 full size and < 1500 respectively.
care and 64 intermediate-size cars, how many trucks of 3. The total cost of production.
each type does the factory need to make this delivery.

Sol :


Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/he142
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/he139

EXAMPLE 8.43
EXAMPLE 8.40 The Sunrise Bakery Pvt Ltd produces three basic pastry
The daily cost of operating a hospital C , is a linear function mixes A, B and C . In the past the mix of ingredients has
of the number of in-patients I , and out-patients P , plus a shown in the following matrix:
fixed cost a, i.e., C = a + bP + dI Flour Fat Sugar

Given the following data from 3 days, find the values of ASR 5 1 1VW
(All quantities in kg)
a, b and d by setting up a linear system of equations and Type B S6.5 2.5 0.5 W
using the matrix inverse: C SS4.5 3 2WW
T X
Days Cost (in <) No. of In- No. of out- Due to changes in the consumer’s tastes it has been decided
Patients, I Patients, P to change the mixes using the following amendment matrix:
Flour Fat Sugar
1 6950 40 10 ARS 0 1 0VW
2 6725 35 9 Type B S- 0.5 0.5 0.5W
3 7100 40 12 C SS 0.5 0 0WW
T X


Sol : Using matrix algebra you are required to calculate:
1. the matrix for the new mix:
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/he140 2. the production requirement to meet an order for 50
units of type A, 30 units of type B and 20 units of
type C of the new mix;
EXAMPLE 8.41 3. the amount of each type that must be made to totally
A firm produces two products P1 and P2 , passing through use up 370 kg of flour, 170 kg of fat and 80 kg of sugar
two machines M1 and M2 before completion. M1 can that are at present in the stores.
produce either 10 units of P1 or 15 units of P2 per hour.

Sol :
M2 can produce 15 units of either product per hour. Find
daily production of P1 and P2 if time available is 12 hours
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/he143
of machine M1 and 10 hours of M2 per day using matrix
inversion.


Sol :
Chap 8 Solution of Simultaneous Equations Page 103

EXAMPLE 8.44 Cross, using Cramer’s Rule.

An amount of < 10000 is put into three investments of the

Sol :
rate of 10, 12 and 15 per cent per annum. The combined
income is < 1310 and the combined income of the first and
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/he147
second investment is < 190 short of the income from the
third. Find the investment in each, using determinant
method (Cramer’s Rule). EXAMPLE 8.48


Sol : The purchase officer of the Pfizer informs the production
manger that during the month, following supply of three
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/he144 chemicals, Asprin (A), Caffieine (C) and Decongestant (D)
used in the production of three types of pain-killing tablet
will be 16, 10 and 16 kg respectively. According to the
EXAMPLE 8.45 specification, each strip of 10 tables of Paingo requires 2
A company produces three products everyday. Their total gm of A, 3 gm of C and 1 gm of D . The requirements for
production on a certain day is 45 tons. It is found that other tables are:
the production of third product exceeds the production
X -prene 4 gm of A 1 gm of C 3 gm of D
of first product by 8 tons while the total production of
first and third products is twice the production of second Relaxo 1 gm of A 2 gm of C 3 gm of D
product. Determine the production level of each product, Use matrix inversion method to find the number of strips
using Cramer’s Rule. of each type so that raw materials are consumed entirely.


Sol :

Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/he145 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/he148

EXAMPLE 8.46
The total sales S in thousands of rupees of a firm selling
two products X and Y is given by the relationship: E X ERC I S E 8 . 4
S = a + bX + cY . Data for the first three months are given
as under:
Months X Y Total Sales S 1. Weekly expenditure in an office for three weeks is
given as follows. Assuming that the salary in all the
January 2 3 12
three weeks of different categories of staff did not vary,
February 6 2 13 calculate the salary for each type of staff, using matrix
March 5 3 15 inversion method.
Using determinant method, determine the sales in april Week Number of Employees Total weekly
when he sells 4 units of X and 5 units of Y . A B C salary


Sol : 1st week 4 2 3 4900
2nd week 3 3 2 4500
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/he146
3rd week 4 3 4 5800

EXAMPLE 8.47 Ans : 700, 600 and 300

A company earns before tax profits of < 100000. It is
committed to making a donation to the Red Cross 10%
of its after-tax profits. The Central Government levies
2. The cost of 4 kg onion, 3 kg of wheat and 2 kg rice
corporate taxes of 50% of profits after deducing charitable
is ` 60. The cost of 2 kg onion, 4 kg wheat and 6 kg
donations and any local taxes. The company must also
rice is ` 90. The cost of 6 kg onion, 2 kg wheat and 3
pay local taxes of 10% of its profit less the donation to
kg rice is ` 70. Find the cost of each item per kg by
the Red Cross. Compute how much the company pays in
matrix method.
corporate taxes, local taxes and as a donation to the Red
Ans : Cost of 1 kg onion = ` 5 , Cost of 1 kg wheat
Page 104 Solution of Simultaneous Equations Chap 8

= ` 8 and Cost of 1 kg rice = ` 8 7. The sum of three numbers is 6. If we multiply third

number by 3 and add it to the second number, we
get 11. By adding first and third numbers, we get
3. A mixture is to be made of three foods A, B and C a number which is double the second number. Use
. The three foods A, B , C contain nutrients P , Q , R this information and find a system of linear equations.
as shown below: Find the three numbers using matrices.
Ans : 1, 2 and 3
Grains per kg of Nutrients
Food P Q R
A 1 2 5 8. The cost of 4 pencils, 3 pens and 2 books is ` 150. The
B 3 1 1 cost of 1 pencil, 2 pens and 3 books is ` 125. The cost
C 4 2 1 of 6 pencils, 2 pens and 3 books is ` 175. Find the cost
How to form a mixture which will have 8 grams of P , 5 grams of of each item by using Matrices.
Q and 7 grams of R ? Ans : The cost of 1 pencil is ` 10, 1 pen is ` 20 and
Ans : 1 kg of each foods A, B and C 1 book is ` 25.

4. An amount of ` 5000 is put into three investments 9. The sum of three numbers is 6. Thrice the third
at the rate of interest of 6%, 7% and 8% per annum number when added to the first number gives 7. On
respectively. The total annual income is ` 358. If the adding, three times the first number to the sum of
combined income from the first two investments is second and third number, we get 12. Find the three
` 70 more than the income from the third, find the numbers by using Matrices.
amount of each investment by matrix method.
Ans : 3, 5 , 4
Ans : ` 1000, ` 2200, ` 1800 3 3

10. An amount of ` 5000 is invested in three types of

5. A school wants to award its students for the values
investments, at interest rates 6%, 7%, 8% per annum
of honesty, regularity and hardwork with a total cash
respectively. The total annual income from these
award of ` 6000. Three times the award money for
investment is ` 350. If the total annual income from
hardwork added to that given for honesty amounts
first two investment is ` 70 more than the income
to ` 11000. The award money given for honesty and
from the third, find the amount of each investment
hardwork together is double the one given for regularity.
using matrix method.
Represent the above situations algebraically and find
Ans : ` 1750, ` 1500, ` 1750
the award money for each value, using matrix method.
Ans : Award money for honesty = ` 500 , Award
money for regularity = ` 2000 , Award money
for hardwork = ` 3500

6. A shopkeeper has 3 varieties of pens A, B and C .

Meenu purchased 1 pen of each variety for a total of
` 21. Jeevan purchased 4 pens of A variety, 3 pens
of B variety and 2 pens of C variety for ` 60. While
Shikha purchased 6 pens of A variety, 2 pens of B
variety and 3 pens of C variety for ` 70. Using matrix
method, find cost of each variety of pen.
Ans : Cost of 1 pen of variety A = ` 5 , Cost of 1 pen
of variety B = ` 8 , Cost of 1 pen of variety C
=`8
Chap 9 Higher Derivatives Page 105

CHAPTER 9

Higher Derivatives

9.1 Implicit differentiation Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ie101

If y be a function of x defined by an equation such as

y = 7x 4 − 5x3 + 11x2 + 2x − 3 ...(1) EXAMPLE 9.2

dy dx
y is said to be defined explicitly in terms of x and we write If ax2 + 2hxy + by2 = c2 , verify that $ =1
dx dy
y = f (x) where

Sol :
4 3 2
f (x) = 7x − 5x + 11x + 2 x − 3.
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ie102
However, if x and y are connected by an equation of the
form
x 4 y3 − 3x3 y5 + 7y3 − 8x2 + 9 = 0 ...(2) EXAMPLE 9.3
of x2 + y2 = log ^xy h
dy
Find
i.e. f (x, y) = 0 , then y cannot be expressed explicitly in dx


Sol :
terms of x . But, still the value of y depends upon that of x
and there may exist one or more functions f connecting y
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ie103
with x so as to satisfy equation (2) or there may not exist
any of the functions satisfying equation (2).
For example, consider the equations EXAMPLE 9.4
2 2
x + y − 25 = 0 ...(3) dy 1
Find of x = y +
dx y+ 1
and x2 + y2 + 25 = 0 ...(4) 1
y+
y + ......
In equation (3), y may be expressed explicitly

Sol :
in terms of x , but y is not a function of x . Here, we
have two functions of x (or two functions of y if y were Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ie104
considered to be independent variable) f1 and f2 defined
by f1 (x) = 25 − x2 and f2 (x) =− 25 − x2 which satisfy
equation (3). EXAMPLE 9.5
2
y2 dy
In equation (4), there are no real values of x that If x2 + 2 = 11, then find
a b dx
can satisfy it. In cases (2), (3) and (4), we say that y is

Sol :
an implicit function of x (or x is an implicit function of
y ) and in all such cases, we find the derivative of y with Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ie105
regard to x (or the derivative of x with regard to y ) by the
process called implicit differentiation. Of course, wherever
we differentiate implicitly an equation that defines one EXAMPLE 9.6
variable as an implicit function of another variable, we dy
If (x2 + y2) 2 = xy , then find
shall assume that the function is differentiable. dx


Sol :

EXAMPLE 9.1 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ie106

dy
Find when x3 + 24xy + y3 = 8 .
dx


Sol :
Page 106 Higher Derivatives Chap 9

EXAMPLE 9.7 3. (x2 + y2) 2 = xy

dy y − 4x (x2 + y2)
If x2/3 + y2/3 = a2/3 , then find Ans :
dx


Sol : 4y (x2 + y2) − x

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ie107 dy

4. If x2/3 + y2/3 = 2 , find at (1, 1).
dx
Ans : - 1
EXAMPLE 9.8
dy
If x3 + x2 y + xy2 + y3 = 81, then find
dx


Sol : dy dx
5. Use implicit differentiation to verify that . =1
dx dy
, when
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ie108 (i) y2 = 4ax (ii) x3 + y3 = 3axy .
Ans : Proof
EXAMPLE 9.9
dy
If ex − y = log a x k, then find
y dx dy log x


Sol : 6. If y log x = x − y , prove that =
dx (1 + log x) 2
Ans : Proof
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ie109

dy
7. If ex + ey = ex + y , prove that =− ey − x .
EXAMPLE 9.10 dx
dy Ans : Proof
If xy = c2 , then find
dx


Sol :

dy y (1 − x)
8. If ex + y = xy , show that = .
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ie110 dx x (y − 1)
Ans : Proof

9. If y x2 + 1 = log ^ x2 + 1 − x h, prove that

dy
(x2 + 1) + xy + 1 = 0 .
dx
Ans : Proof

10. 29. If y= 1 + 1 + x4 , prove that

dy
y (y2 − 1) = x3
E X ERC I S E 9.1 dx
Ans : Proof
dy
For the following implicit function find .
dx
1. xy2 − x2 y = 3
2xy - y2
Ans :
2xy - x2
9.2 Logarithmic differentiation
In order to simplify the differentiation of some functions,
2. xy3 − x3 y = x we first take logarithms and then differentiate. Such a
2xy
Ans : 2 process is called logarithmic differentiation. This is usually
3y - x2
done in two types of problems:
Chap 9 Higher Derivatives Page 107

1. When the given function is a product of some functions, EXAMPLE 9.15

then the logarithm converts the product into a sum dy log x
If xy = ex − y , prove that =
dx (1 + log x) 2
and this facilitates the differentiation.

Sol :
2. When the variable occurs in the exponent i.e. the
given function is of the form (f (x)) g (x) .
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ie115
Derivative of uv where u, v are Differentiable Functions
of x
EXAMPLE 9.16
Let y = uv dy x..... to 3

Taking logarithm of both sides, we have Find of y = xx

dx
log y = v log u

Sol :
Differentiating wrt x , we have
1 $ dy = d (v log u) Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ie116
y dx dx
dy
= y d (v log u) EXAMPLE 9.17
dx dx
x
x ...to 3
dy y2
If y = x , prove that x =
= uv d (v log u)
dx 2 − y log x
dx

Sol :

Thus, d (uv) = uv d (v log u)

dx dx Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ie117

EXAMPLE 9.11
EXAMPLE 9.18
x2 − 1 (3x + 7) 5/3
of x2 y3 = ^2x + y h5 .
Differentiate the following function wrt x : dy
(x2 + 3) 2/3 Find
dx


Sol :


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ie118

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ie111

EXAMPLE 9.19
EXAMPLE 9.12 dy
Differentiate xx wrt x : Find of y = xx + x1/x
dx


Sol :


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ie112 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ie119

EXAMPLE 9.13 EXAMPLE 9.20

dy y (1 − x) Differentiate (xx ) x wrt x
If ex + y = xy , show that =
dx x (y − 1)

Sol :


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ie120

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ie113

EXAMPLE 9.21
EXAMPLE 9.14 Differentiate xx wrt x .
x

of x p yq = ^x + y hp + q
dy
Find

Sol :
dx


Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ie121
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ie114
Page 108 Higher Derivatives Chap 9

EXAMPLE 9.22 dy y2
6. If y = xy , prove that x =
If y = e sinx + ^tan x hx , then find
dy dx 1 − y log x
dx Ans : Proof


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ie122 dy x−y

7. If x = ex/y , prove that =
dx x log x
Ans : Proof
EXAMPLE 9.23
dy
Find when xy + yx = ab
dx dy 2 − log x


Sol : 8. If xy = ey − x ,prove that =
dx (1 − log x) 2
Ans : Proof
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ie123

dy y (y + x log y)
EXAMPLE 9.24 9. If xy yx = 5 , show that =−
dx x (x + y log x)
Differentiate xa + ax + aa + xx wrt x Ans : Proof


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ie124

x dy
10. If (x − y) e x − y = a , prove that y + x = 2y
dx
Ans : Proof

E X ERC I S E 9.2
Differentiate the following functions wrt x : 9.3 Derivatives of Functions in parametric
form
1. (x + 1) 2 (x + 2) 3 (x + 3) 4
If x and y are two functions in a single variable θ , say
Ans : (x + 1) 2 (x + 2) 3 (x + 3) 4 b 2 + 3 + 4 l y = f (θ) and x = g (θ), then the functions x and y are
x+1 x+2 x+3
called parametric functions and θ is called the parameter.

2
Working Rule :
2. x x +2/13 , x > 0 .
(x + 1) Step 1
2
Ans : x x +2/13 ; 1 + 2 x − Write the given parametric form of the function, say
x + 1 3 (x + 1)E
2 , x>0
(x + 1) x
y = f (θ), x = g (θ)
Step 2
x−5 dy
3. (2x + 3) Find and dx
2 (x − 5) dθ dθ
Ans : (2x + 3) x − 5 ; + log (2x + 3)E Step 3
2x + 3
dy
Find using the formula given below,
dx
_ dq i
dy
4. xx (1 + log x) dy
= dx , provided dx ! 0 .
Ans : xx b 1 + (1 + log x) 2 l
dx ^ dq h dθ
x
EXAMPLE 9.25
dy
5. x logx + (log x) x If x = 2at2 ; y = at 4 , then find
dx
2 log x
Ans : x logx . + (log x) x ;log (log x) + 1 E

Sol :
x log x
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ie125
Chap 9 Higher Derivatives Page 109

EXAMPLE 9.26 E X ERC I S E 9 . 3

dy 2
Find when x = a 1 − t2 , y = 2bt 2 .
dx 1+t 1+t dy


Sol : For the following parametric equation find .
2 dx
1. x = 3at 2 and y = 3at 2
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ie126 1+t 1+t
Ans : 2 t
1 - t2
EXAMPLE 9.27
2
dy
If x = 3t 2 ; y = 3t 2 , then find 2. x = e bt + 1 l and y = e−t bt − 1 l
1+t 1+t dx t t


Sol : 2 3
( t − t + t + 1)
Ans : e−2t 3
(t + t 2 + t − 1)
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ie127

3. x = 2t and y = 1 − t 2
EXAMPLE 9.28 1 + t2 1 + t2
−t −t
dy t t
Find when x = e + e and y = e − e in terms of x 2
Ans : t - 1
dx 2 2 2t
and y .


Sol :
4. x = at2 , y = 2at
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ie128
Ans : 1
t
EXAMPLE 9.29
If x = a bt + 1 l and y = a bt − 1 l, prove that
dy
=x.
t t dx y 5. x = 4t , y = 4


Sol : t
Ans : - 12
t
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ie129

6. x = 2t , y = 5 − t2
EXAMPLE 9.30 5 + t2 5 + t2
If x = bt + 1 l and y = a t + t , find
a
dy
Ans : 210t
1
.
t dx t -5


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ie130

EXAMPLE 9.31
1 + log t 3 + 2 log t dy
If x = ,y= , find .
t 2 t dx


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ie131

EXAMPLE 9.32 9.4 Higher order differentiation

dy
Find
dx
when x = et log t and y = t log t . If y = f ^x h is a differentiable function of x , then its


Sol : derivative dxdy
i.e., f l^x h is also a function of x .
If the function f l^x h of x also differentiable, then its
derivative is denoted by ddxy or by f m^x h. The symbol ddxy is
2 2

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ie132 2 2

Page 110 Higher Derivatives Chap 9

called the second order derivative of y = f ^x h wrt x ddxy is Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ie137
2

also denoted by ym or by y2 .
In general, if y = f ^x h is a differentiable function of x
, then for n ^> 1h ! N , the n th order derivative of y wrt x
EXAMPLE 9.38
exists if the ^n - 1hth order derivative of y is differentiable If y = ax + b , show that 2y1 y 3 = 3 ^y2h2
cx + d
wrt x . For example, the 3 rd order derivative of y = f ^x h
2

Sol :
exists if ddxy is differentiable. If 3 rd order derivative of
y = f ^x h is differentiable, then we can talk of 4 th order
2

derivative of y . Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ie138

The n th order derivative of y ^= f ^x hh is denoted by
any one of the following symbols: EXAMPLE 9.39
n , f ^n h ^x h, yn , d n ^ f ^x hh or Dn y
dn y n
d2 y 2a3 xy
If y3 + x3 − 3axy = 0 , show that 2 =−
^y2 − ax h
dx dx 3.
dx


Sol :
EXAMPLE 9.33
Find the second derivative of loglog x . Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ie139


Sol :

EXAMPLE 9.40
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ie133 Find the third derivative of the x5 .


Sol :
EXAMPLE 9.34
If y = x log x , show that x3 2 = c x − y m .
d2 y dy 2
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ie140
a + bx dx dx


Sol :
EXAMPLE 9.41
Find the third derivative of the (x2 + 1) (x − 2).
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ie134


Sol :

EXAMPLE 9.35 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ie141

2 − y c dx m − x = 0 .
2
d y 1 dy 2
y
If y = xx , show that
dx
EXAMPLE 9.42


Sol :
Find the third derivative of the (2x3 − 7) (9x5 + 2x2 − 3).


Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ie135
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ie142
EXAMPLE 9.36
If y = log ^x + a2 + x2 h then show that
EXAMPLE 9.43
^a2 + x2h y2 + xy1 = 0 .
d2 y dy
If y = (x + 1 + x2 ) n , then find (1 + x2) +x .


Sol : dx2 dx


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ie136

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ie143

EXAMPLE 9.37
d2 y dy EXAMPLE 9.44
If y = log ^x + a2 + x2 h then show that ^a2 + x2h y2 + xy1 = 0.
2x 3x
If y = 3e + 2e , prove that 2 − 5 + 6y = 0 .
dx dx


Sol :


Sol :
Chap 9 Higher Derivatives Page 111

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ie144 functions.

1. 1 4x3 + x + 7
Ans : 24x
EXAMPLE 9.45
d 2y − 24y
If y3 − y = 2x , prove that 2 =
dx (3y 2 − 1)3


Sol : 2. log x
Ans : - 1/x2
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ie145

3. y = x3 log x
EXAMPLE 9.46 Ans : x (5 + 6 log x)
If y = e 2x (ax + b), show that y 2 − 4y1 + 4y = 0 .


Sol :

4. y = log (x2 /ex )

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ie146 Ans : - 2/x2

EXAMPLE 9.47
d2 y dy 2
2 = b dx l .
d 4y
If y = x 3 log x , prove that = 6. 5. If ey (x + 1) = 1, show that
dx
dx 4 x


Sol :
Ans : Proof

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ie147

log x d2 y 2 log x − 3
6. If y = , show that 2 = .
EXAMPLE 9.48 x dx x3
d 2y 2 Ans : Proof
Find 2 , if x = at , y = 2at .
dx


Sol :

7. If y = Aemx + Benx , show that

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ie148
d2 y dy
− (m + n) + mny = 0 .
dx2 dx
EXAMPLE 9.49 Ans : Proof
d2 y
If y = t10 + 1 and x = t8 + 1, then find .
dx2


Sol :
8. If y = x3 log x , find y 3 .
Ans : 11 + 6 log x
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ie149

EXAMPLE 9.50 x
n 9. If y = , find y 3 .
Find d n (log x) 1 − x2
dx


Sol : 3 (4x2 + 1)
Ans :
(1 − x2) 7/2
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ie150

******

E X ERC I S E 9.4
Find the second order derivative wrt x of the following
Page 112 Application of Derivatives Chap 10

CHAPTER 10

Application of Derivatives

10.1 Introduction The gradient of a curve at a point is defined as the

Differentiation has applications to nearly all quantitative slope of the tangent to the curve at that point.
disciplines. For example, in physics, the derivative of the
displacement of a moving body with respect to time is
the velocity of the body, and the derivative of velocity
with respect to time is acceleration. The derivative of the
momentum of a body equals the force applied to the body;
rearranging this derivative statement leads to the famous
F = ma equation associated with Newton’s second law
of motion. The reaction rate of a chemical reaction is a
derivative. In operations research, derivatives determine
the most efficient ways to transport materials and design
factories.
Derivatives are frequently used to find the maxima
and minima of a function. Equations involving derivatives Figure 10.1
are called differential equations and are fundamental
in describing natural phenomena. Derivatives and their
generalizations appear in many fields of mathematics, 10.2.1 Tangent to the Curve y = f (x) at Given Point
such as complex analysis, functional analysis, differential Let P (x1, y1) be any point on the curve y = f (x), then the
geometry, measure theory, and abstract algebra. slope of the tangent to the curve y = f (x) at the point
dy
P (x1 y1) is the value of dx at P . So, the slope of tangent to
the curve y = f (x)at P is _ dxdy
ix , y .
10.2 Tangents and Normals 1 2

dy
Therefore, by co-ordinate geometry, the equation
We have learned that dx (if it exists) geometrically of the tangent to the given curve y = f (x) at the point
represents the slope of the tangent to the curve y = f (x) P (x1 y1) is
at any point P (x, y). Thus, if ψ ^! π2 h is the angle which
y - y1 = _ dx
dy
ix , y (x − x1)
the tangent to the curve at P makes with the positive 1 2

direction of x -axis, then the slope of the tangent to the If _ dx

dy
ix , y does not exist, then the tangent at P is
curve y = f (x) at the point P = tan ψ = _ dx dy
iP . 1 1

parallel to y -axis and its equation is x = x1 .

If the tangent to the curve y = f (x) at the point
P (x, y) is parallel to x -axis, then Working Rule :
y = 0 & tan y = 0 & _ dx iP = 0
dy
dy 1. Find dx from the given equation y = f (x).
dy
2. Find the value dx at the given point P (x1 y1), let
m = _ dx ix , y
and if the tangent to the curve y = f (x) at the point P (x, y) dy

is parallel to y -axis, then 1 2

3. The equation of the tangent at P is y − y1 = m (x − x1)

ψ = π & cot ψ = 0 & _ dx dy iP = 0 .
2
Further, if the tangent at P is not parallel to x -axis
i.e. ψ ! 0 i.e. ψ ! _ dx
dy
iP ! 0 , then the slope of the normal
to the curve at P =− 1
^dy/dx hP
. 10.2.2 Normal to the curve y = f (x) at a Given Point
Chap 10 Application of Derivatives Page 113

Let P (x1, y1) be any point on the curve y = f (x), then the EXAMPLE 10.3
slope of the tangent to the curve at P (x1, y1) = _ dx
dy
ix , y at Prove that the tangents to the curve y = x 2 − 5x + 6 at the
points (2, 0) and (3, 0) are at right angles.
1 2
dy
the point P (x1 y1) is the value of dx at P .
So, the slope of normal to the curve y = f (x) at

Sol :
P =− 1 .
_ dx ix , y
dy
1 2 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/je132
Therefore, by co-ordinate geometry, the equation
of the normal to the given curve y = f (x) at the point
P (x1 y1) is
EXAMPLE 10.4
y - y1 =− dy 1
Find the point curve at point on the parabola y = (x − 2) 2
_ dx ix , y (x − x1) where the tangent is parallel to the chord joining (2, 0)
(x − x1) + _ i
1 2

dy
or dx x , y (y − y1) = 0 and (4, 4).
If _ dx ix , y = 0 then, the equation of the normal at P
1 2

dy


Sol :
is x = x1 and if _ dx ix , y does not exist, then the equation at
1 2
dy
1 2

P is y = y1 . Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/je133

Procedure to find the equation of the normal to the curve
y = f (x) at the given point P (x1 y1)
EXAMPLE 10.5
Working Rule :
dy Find the points on the curve y = x 3 − 3x 2 + 2x at which
1. Find dx from the given equation y = f (x).
dy tangent to the curve is parallel to the line y − 2x + 3 = 0
2. Find the value dx at the given point P (x1 y1).


Sol :
3. If m is slope of the normal to the given curve at P ,
then
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/je134
m =− 1
_ dx ix , y
dy
1 2

4. The equation of the normal at P is y − y1 = m (x − x1)

EXAMPLE 10.6
If y = (4x − 5) is a tangent to the curve y2 = px3 + q at (2,
3), find p and q .
EXAMPLE 10.1

Sol :
(a) Find the slope of the tangent to the curve y = 3x 4 − 4x
at x = 4 . Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/je135
(b) Find the slope of the tangent to the curve
y = x − 1 , x ! 2 at x = 10 .
x−2


Sol : EXAMPLE 10.7
Find the point on the curve y = x 3 − 11x + 5 at which the
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/je130 tangent is y = x − 11.


Sol :

EXAMPLE 10.2 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/je136

(a) Find the slope of the tangent to the curve
y = x 3 − 3x + 2 at the point whose x -co-ordinate is 3.
(b) Find the equation of the tangent to the curve EXAMPLE 10.8
y = x2 + 4x + 1 at the point whose x co-ordinate is 3. Find the equation of tangent at (- 4, - 4) on the curve


Sol : x 2 =− 4y .


Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/je131
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/je137
Page 114 Application of Derivatives Chap 10

EXAMPLE 10.9 EXAMPLE 10.15

Find the points on the curve 4x 2 + 9y 2 = 1 where the Find the equation of the tangent to the curve x 2 + 3y = 3,
tangents are perpendicular to the line 2y + x = 0 which is parallel to the line y = 4x + 5


Sol :

Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/je138 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/je144

EXAMPLE 10.10 EXAMPLE 10.16

Find the equation of all lines having slope 2 which is Show that the equation of tangent to the parabola y 2 = 4ax
tangent to the curve y = 1 , x ! 3 . at (x1, y1) is yy1 = 2a (x + x1)
x−3


Sol :

Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/je139 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/je145

EXAMPLE 10.11 EXAMPLE 10.17

Find the points on the curve 4x2 + 9y2 = 1 where the (a) Find the equation of the tangent to the parabola
tangents are perpendicular to the line 2y + x = 0 . y 2 = 4ax at (at 2, 2at).


Sol :
(b) Find the equation of the normal at the point (at 2, 2at)
for the curve y 2 = 4ax .


Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/je140

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/je146

EXAMPLE 10.12
Determine the equation of the normal line to the curve
y = 3 5 − x at the point (- 3, 2). EXAMPLE 10.18


Sol :
If the tangent to the curve y = x 3 + ax + b at P (1, - 6) is
parallel to the line y − x = 5 , find the values of a and b.


Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/je141

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/je147

EXAMPLE 10.13
Find the coordinates of the points on the curve
9x2 + 4y2 = 36 where the tangent are perpendicular to y EXAMPLE 10.19
axis. At what points will the tangents to the curve


Sol :
y = 2x 3 − 15x 2 + 36x − 21 be parallel to the axis? Also,
find the equations of tangents to the curve at these points.


Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/je142

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/je148

EXAMPLE 10.14
At what points on the curve, x2 + y2 − 2x − 4y + 1 = 0 is
tangent parallel to the y -axis? EXAMPLE 10.20


Sol :
Find the equation of the normal to the hyperbola
2
x 2 − y = 1 at the point (x , y ).
0 0
a2 b2
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/je143

Sol :
Chap 10 Application of Derivatives Page 115

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/je149 EXAMPLE 10.26

2
2
y
Find the equation of the tangent to x + 2 = 1 at (3, 4).
a b


Sol :
EXAMPLE 10.21
Find the equation of normal at the point (am2, am3) for the Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/je155
curve ay 2 = x 3 .


Sol :

EXAMPLE 10.27
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/je150 Find the equations of the tangent and normal to the given
curves 16x 2 + 9y 2 = 144 at (x1, y1) where x1 = 2 and y1 2 0 .


Sol :
EXAMPLE 10.22
2
y2
Find the points on the curve x + = 1 at which tangents Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/je156
4 25
are
(a) Parallel to the x -axis
(b) Parallel to the y -axis EXAMPLE 10.28


Sol : Show that the tangent to the curve y = be−x , where it
crosses the axis of y , makes intercept of lengths 1 and b on
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/je151 the axis of x and y respectively.


Sol :

EXAMPLE 10.23 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/je157

Find the equation of tangent to the curve y = 3x − 2
which is parallel to the line 4x − 2y + 5 = 0 .


Sol : EXAMPLE 10.29
Show the equation of the tangent to the hyperbola
2
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/je152 x 2 − y = 1 at (x , y ) is xx 0 + yy 0 = 1.
0 0
a2 b2 a2 b2


Sol :

EXAMPLE 10.24 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/je158

Find the equation of the tangent and normal to the given
curves at the points given
(a) y = x 4 − bx 3 + 13x 2 − 10x + 5 at (0, 5)
(b) y = x 4 − 6x 3 + 13x 2 − 10x + 5 at (1, 3)


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/je153

EXAMPLE 10.25
2
y2
Find the equation of the tangent to the ellipse x 2 + 2 = 1
a b
, at (x1, y1). E X ERC I S E 1 0 . 1


Sol :
1. Find the point on the curve x2 + y2 − 2x − 3 = 0 at
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/je154 which the tangents are parallel to the x -axis
Ans : (1, 2) and (1, - 2)
Page 116 Application of Derivatives Chap 10

2. Find the equations of tangent and the normal to the 10.3 Increasing and Decreasing Function
curve y = x2 + 2x + 6 at the point (2, 18)
Ans : 6x − y + 6 = 0 , x + 6y − 110 = 0
10.3.1 Introduction
The first derivative of a function is a source of much
3. Find the equation of the tangent to the curve useful information about the behaviour of the function.
As we have already seen, the sign of fl tells us whether
x + y = a at the point b a , a l.
2 2

4 4 fl is increasing or decreasing. In this section, we use this

Ans : 2x + 2y = a2
information to find maximum and minimum values of
function.
The significance of the sign of the derivative of a
4. Show that the tangents to the curve y = 2x3 − 4 at the function is simple but crucial. Intervals on which the graph
points x =− 2 are parallel. of a function f has positive or negative slope provide
Ans : Proof useful information about the behaviour of f . The graph of
y = f (x) is shown in Fig 10.1.

5. Find the points on the curve 2y = 3 − x2 at which the

tangent is parallel to the line x + y = 0
Ans : ^1, 1h

6. Find the equation of the tangent line to the curve

y = 5x − 3 − 2 which is perpendicular to the line
5y + 2 2x = 13
Ans : 2 2y − 5x + 4 2 + 1 = 0
Figure 10.2

The graph of y = f (x) is shown in the Fig 10.1 and

7. Find the equation of the normal to the curve
tangents are drawn at the point A, B, C and D . If we think
y = 2 sin2 3x at x = π/6
of a point as moving along the curve from left to right,
Ans : p = p we notice that the moving point would be rising at some
6
positions and falling at others. At points on the curve
where the moving points is rising, we say that y = f (x)
8. Find the point on the curve y = x3 − 11x + 5 at which is an increasing function. At these points y increases as
the equation of tangent is y = x − 1 x increases. At points where the moving points is falling,
Ans : (2, - 9) y = f (x) is a decreasing function. At the point A, the
function is increasing. Here the slope of the tangent is
positive. At the point C , the function is decreasing and
9. Show that the curves xy = a2 and x2 + y2 = 2a2 touch the slope of the tangent is negative. At B and also at D
each other. , the slope of the tangent is zero. The point B and D
Ans : Proof separate rising and falling portions of the curve.
It the recall that the derivative yields the slope of
the tangent, or the slope of the curve, it appears that
a function is increasing at point where the derivative is
10. For the curve y = 4x3 − 2x5 , find all the points at which positive and decreasing at points where the derivative is
the tangent passes through the origin negative.
Ans : (0, 0), (1, 2), (- 1, - 2)

10.3.2 Steps to find Increasing and Decreasing

Function
Let f be continuous on 6a, b@ and differentiable on the
Chap 10 Application of Derivatives Page 117

open interval (a, b). increasing on R.

Then

Sol :
1. f is increasing in 6a, b@ if f l (x) 2 0 for each x d 6a, b@
2. f is decreasing in 6a, b@ if f l (x) 1 0 for each x d 6a, b@ Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/je161
3. f is a constant function in 6a, b@ if f l (x) = 0 for each
x d 6a, b@
PROOF : EXAMPLE 10.33
Let x1 , x2 d 6a, b@ be such that x1 1 x2 . Determine whether function f (x) = x + x1 , is increasing or
By Lagrange’s Theorem, we have decreasing for x $ 1.
f (x2) - f (x1)

Sol :
= f l (c), where x1 1 c 1 x2
x 2 - x1
f (x2) - f (x1) = (x2 − x1) f l (c) Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/je162
i.e. f (x2) - f (x1) 2 0 [a f l (c) 2 0 (given)]
i.e. f (x2) 2 f (x1)
So, we have x1 1 x2 EXAMPLE 10.34
Determine whether function f (x) = x3 − 12x , is increasing
f (x1) 1 f (x2), 6x1 , x2 d 6a, b@
or decreasing for x 1- 2 or x 2 2 .
Thus f is an increasing function in 6a, b@.


Sol :
Similarly, we can prove part (2) and part (3).
Remark
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/je163
1. If f l (x) 2 0 for each x d (a, b), f is strictly increasing
in (a, b).
2. If f l (x) 1 0 for each x d (a, b), f is strictly decreasing
EXAMPLE 10.35
in (a, b).
Find the least value of a so that the function
3. A function will be increasing or decreasing in R if it is
f (x) = x 2 + ax + 5 is increasing on [1, 2].
so in every interval of R.


Sol :
Note
The function can be an increasing function in a certain
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/je164
interval and decreasing function in certain other interval.

EXAMPLE 10.36
EXAMPLE 10.30
Show that the function f (x) = x2 − 3x + 1 is neither
Prove that the function f (x) = ax + b is increasing iff
increasing nor decreasing on (0, 3).
a 2 0.


Sol :


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/je165

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/je159

EXAMPLE 10.37
EXAMPLE 10.31
Find the interval in which the function 2x 3 + 9x 2 + 12 + 20
Prove that 2 + 5 is a decreasing function. is increasing or decreasing :
x


Sol :

Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/je160 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/je166

EXAMPLE 10.32 EXAMPLE 10.38

Prove that the function f (x) = x 3 − 6x 2 + 15x − 18 is Find the interval in which the function 8 + 36x + 3x 2 − 2x 3
Page 118 Application of Derivatives Chap 10

is increasing or decreasing : 9. f ^x h = x3 − 8 in 61, 2@

Sol :

Ans : Increasing

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/je167

10.4 COST AND REVENUE FUNCTION
Any manufacturing company has to deal with two types of
costs, the one which varies with the cost of raw material,
E X ERC I S E 10.2 direct labour cost, packaging etc. is the variable cost. The
variable cost is dependent on production output. As the
1. Prove that the function f ^x h = ax + b is decreasing if production output increases (decreases) the variable cost
a < 0. will also increase (decrease). The other one is the fixed
Ans : Proof cost, fixed costs are the expenses that remain the same
irrespective of production output. Whether a firm makes
sales or not, it must pay its fixed costs. Marginal cost and
2. Prove that f ^x h = 1 − 1 is an increasing function. marginal revenue
x
Ans :
10.4.1 Cost Function
If V (x) is the variable cost of producing x units and k the
3. Prove that f ^x h = x − 1 is an increasing function.
fixed cost then, the total cost C (x) is given by
x
Ans : Proof C (x) = V (x) + k

Marginal Cost
In economics the variation of one quantity with respect to
4. Show that f ^x h = x − 6x + 15x + 7 is an increasing
3 2
another quantity may be described by a marginal concept.
function for all x εR . The marginal concept is the instantaneous rate of change
Ans : Proof of one quantity with respect to another quantity.
For example, if C (x) gives the total cost of producing
and marketing x units of a product, then marginal cost,
5. Prove that the function f ^x h = 100 − 3x + 3x2 − x3 is MC , is defined to be the rate of change of C with respect
decreasing on R. to x . Thus
Ans : Proof dC (x)
MC =
dx
We interpret marginal cost as the approximate cost
of one additional unit of output.
Determine whether the following functions are increasing
or decreasing for the stated values of x :
10.4.2 Revenue Function
6. f ^x h = 1 , x < 0
x If R (x) is the total revenue a company receives by selling
Ans : Decreasing x units at price p per unit produced by it then the revenue
function is given by
R (x) = px

7. f ^x h = 1 , x$0 Marginal Revenue
1 + x2
The marginal revenue is defined to be the rate of change
Ans : Decreasing
of total revenue with respect to quantity demanded. Hence
marginal revenue is merely the derivative of R (x) with
respect to x .
8. f ^x h = x2 − 6x + 3 in 64, 6@ dR (x)
Ans : Increasing Marginal Revenue MR =
dx
Marginal revenue indicates the rate at which revenue
changes with respect to units sold. It is interpreted as the
Chap 10 Application of Derivatives Page 119

approximate revenue received from selling one additional EXAMPLE 10.43

unit of output. The rate of change of total cost C (x) of a commodity per
unit change of output x is called the marginal cost of
the commodity. If there exists a relation between C (x)
EXAMPLE 10.39 and x in the form : C (x) = 3x d x + 7 n + 5 . Prove that the
x+5
If a manufacturer’s total cost function is C (x) = 0.1x 2 + 3 marginal cost
find falls continuously as the output increases.
(i) the marginal cost function, and


Sol :
(ii) the marginal cost when 4 units are produced. Interpret
the result.
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/je172


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/je168

EXAMPLE 10.44
A stationery company manufactures x units of pen in a
EXAMPLE 10.40
given time, if the cost of raw material is square of the pens
The cost of producing x tons of steel is given by produced, cost of transportation is twice the number of
C (x) = 101 x 2 + 5x + 1000 . pens produced and the property tax costs ` 5000. Then,
(i) Find the marginal cost function. (i) Find the cost function C (x) .
(ii) Find marginal cost when x = 1000 tons. (ii) Find the cost of producing 21st pen.
(iii) Interpret C l^1000h and compare with the actual cost (iii) The marginal cost of producing 50 pens.
of 1001th ton.

Sol :


Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/je173
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/je169

EXAMPLE 10.45
EXAMPLE 10.41 The price per unit of a commodity produced by a company
2
The total cost of a firm is given by 3000 + 60x + x , where is given by p = 200 − 5x, where x is the quantity demanded.
x is the output. Determine : Find marginal revenue.
(i) the marginal cost,

Sol :
(ii) the marginal cost when 30 units are produced, and
(iii) the actual cost of producing twenty first unit. Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/je174


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/je170 EXAMPLE 10.46

The quantity demanded of a product is given by x = 10 − 2p
where p is the price per unit. Find marginal revenue.
EXAMPLE 10.42

Sol :
The total cost C (x) of a firm is given be
0.005x 3 − 0.02x 2 − 30x + 5000 , where x is the output. Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/je175
Determine :
(i) The marginal cost.
(ii) The rate of change of MC with respect to x .
EXAMPLE 10.47


Sol :
The price per unit of a commodity produced by a company
is given by p = 30 − 2x and x is the quantity demanded.
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/je171 Find the revenue function R (x) , the marginal revenue
when 5 commodities are in demand (or produced).
Page 120 Application of Derivatives Chap 10

Sol : 2. The cost function of a firm is given by 2x2 − 4x + 5 .

Find the marginal cost, when x = 10 .
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/je176 Ans : 36

EXAMPLE 10.48 3. Given the total cost function for x units of a commodity
The total revenue from the sale of x units of a product is as 13 x3 + x2 − 15x + 3 . Find the marginal cost function.
given by R (x) = 20x − 12 x2 . Find : Ans : x2 + 2x − 15

(i) The marginal revenue,

(ii) The marginal revenue when x = 5 and interpret it,
(iii) The actual revenue from the sale of sixth unit. 4. The cost function of a firm is given by 3x2 − 2x + 3 .
Find the marginal cost, when x = 3 .


Sol :
Ans : 16

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/je177

5. The price of a product is given by p = 1500 − 2x − x2

. Find
EXAMPLE 10.49
(i) the revenue function,
The price per unit of a product is given by p = a − bx , (ii) the marginal revenue function,
where a and b are positive constants. Find: (iii) the MR when x = 20 and interpret it.
(i) Revenue function. Ans : (i) 1500x - 2x2 - x3
(ii) Marginal revenue function. (ii) 1500 - 4x - 3x2


Sol : (iii) 220

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/je178

6. If R (x) rupees if the total revenue received from the
sale of x tables, and R (x) = 600x − 251 x3 . Find
EXAMPLE 10.50 (i) the marginal revenue when x = 25 ,
A firm knows that the demanded price p of a product is (ii) the actual revenue from the sale of 26 tables.
linear function of production quantity x . It also knows Ans : (i) 525
that it can sell 1000 units when the price is < 4 per unit, (iii) ` 14896.96
and it can sell 1500 units when the price is < 2 a unit.
Determine
(i) the price function 7. The total revenue received from the sale of x units of
(ii) the revenue function a product is given by R (x) = 200 + 15 x2 . Find
(iii) the marginal revenue function. (i) the marginal revenue,


Sol : (ii) the marginal revenue when x = 25 .
Ans : (i) 25x (ii) 10
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/je179

8. The total revenue received from the sale of x units of

a product is given by R (x) = 20x − 12 x2 . Find
(i) the marginal revenue,
E X ERC I S E 10.3 (ii) the marginal revenue when x = 10 ,
(iii) the actual revenue from selling 15th item.
1. The cost function of a firm is given by 2x2 − 4x + 5 . Ans : (i) 20 - x (ii) 10 (iii) 5.5
Find the marginal cost, when x = 2 .
Ans : 4
x
9. The price for a commodity is given by p = ae− 300 ,
Chap 10 Application of Derivatives Page 121

where x is the quantity demanded. Given that the

price is ` 7 per unit when 600 units of the product
are produced. Find the total revenue and marginal
revenue. Also, find the price per unit when the
marginal revenue is zero.
Ans : 7xe2 - 300 , = 7e2 − 300 _1 − 300 i ; 7e
x x
x

10. A firm knows that the price per unit p for one of its
product is linear. It also knows that it can sell 1400
units when the price is ` per unit, and it can sell 1800
units at a price of ` 2 per unit. Find the price per
unit if x units are sold (or demanded). Also find the
revenue function and the marginal revenue function.
Ans : 11 - 200
1
x , 11x - 200
1
x2 and 11 - 1001 x

******
Page 122 Maxima and Minima Chap 11

CHAPTER 11

Maxima and Minima

11.1 Introduction separate rising and falling portions of the curve.

The first derivative of a function is a source of much It the recall that the derivative yields the slope of
useful information about the behaviour of the function. the tangent, or the slope of the curve, it appears that
As we have already seen, the sign of fl tells us whether a function is increasing at point where the derivative is
fl is increasing or decreasing. In this section, we use this positive and decreasing at points where the derivative is
information to find maximum and minimum values of negative.
function.
The significance of the sign of the derivative of a
function is simple but crucial. Intervals on which the graph 11.3 Maximum and Minimum Values
of a function f has positive or negative slope provide Let f be a function defined on an interval. Then,
useful information about the behaviour of f . The graph of 1. f is said to have a maximum value in I , if there exists
y = f (x) is shown in Fig 11.1. a point c in I such that f (c) $ f (x), 6x d I .
The number f (c) is called the maximum value of f in
I and the point c is called a point of maximum value
of f in I . In Figure 11.2 x = c is a point of maximum
of f (x) in the interval (a, b).

Figure 11.1

11.2 Meaning of the Sign of the Observation

Figure 11.2
The graph of y = f (x) is shown in the Fig 11.1 and tangents
are drawn at the point A, B, C and D . If we think of a 2. f is said to have a minimum value in I , if there exists
point as moving along the curve from left to right, we a point c in I such that f (c) # f (x), 6x d I . The
notice that the moving point would be rising at some number f (c) in this case is called the minimum value
positions and falling at others. At points on the curve of f in I and the point c is called a point of minimum
where the moving points is rising, we say that y = f (x) value of f in I .In Figure 11.3 x = c is a point of
is an increasing function. At these points y increases as minimum of f (x) in the interval (a, b).
x increases. At points where the moving points is falling, The minimum and maximum of a function on an
y = f (x) is a decreasing function. At the point A, the interval are also called the absolute minimum and absolute
function is increasing. Here the slope of the tangent is maximum on the interval, respectively.
positive. At the point C , the function is decreasing and
the slope of the tangent is negative. At B and also at D
, the slope of the tangent is zero. The point B and D
Chap 11 Maxima and Minima Page 123

Figure 11.5

Extreme Value Theorem

If f is continuous on a closed interval 6a, b@, then f has
both a minimum and a maximum on the interval.

Working rule to Find Absolute Maximum or Absolute

Minimum
Let f be a continuous function defined on an interval
I = 6a, b@ and let f be differentiable at all points of I ,
Figure 11.3 except possibly at the end points a or b. Then to find the
maximum or the minimum value of f .
A function need to not have a minimum or a maximum 1. Find all solutions of f l (x) = 0 . Denote the solutions
on an interval. For instance, in Fig 11.4, you can see that by x1, x2, ....., where x1, x2, ....., d I .
the function f (x) = x 2 + 1 has both a minimum and a 2. Compute the function values at the x1, x2, .....,
maximum on the closed interval 6- 1, 2@ but does not have 3. Compute the function values at the end points a and
a maximum on the open interval (- 1, 2). b of the closed interval I = 6a, b@.
Moreover, in figure 11.5 you can see that continuity Then the maximum value of f is the largest of
(or the lack of it) can affect the existence of an extremum the function values at the end-points and at x1, x2 . The
on the interval. This suggests the following theorem, which corresponding point is called the point of maximum. And
identifies conditions that guarantee the existence of both a the minimum value f is the smallest of the function values
minimum and maximum of a function on a closed interval at the end points and at x1, x2, ..... The corresponding point
is called the point of minimum.

11.4 Local Maxima and Minima

Roughly speaking, f (c) is a local maximum value of f
at c if the graph of f has a little hill above the point c
. Similarly, f (c) is a local minimum value of f at c if the
graph of f has a little valley above the point c .
In Fig. 11.6, the graph of f (x) = x 3 − 3x 2 has a local
maximum at the point (0, 0) and a local minimum at the
point (2, - 4). The graph at (0, 0) looks like little hill and
the graph at (2, - 4) looks like little valley.
(i) (ii)

Figure 11.4

Figure 11.6

We say that the value f (c) is a local maximum value

of the function f if f (x) # f (c) for all x sufficiently near c .
Similarly, we say that the value of f (c) is a local minimum
Page 124 Maxima and Minima Chap 11

value of f if f (x) $ f (c) for all x sufficiently near c . x 0 is not an end point of the domain of f
More precisely, let f be real valued and let c be an 1. If there exists an open interval (a, b) containing x 0
interior point in the domain of f . Then such that f l (x) 2 0 on (a, x 0) and f l (x) 1 0 on (x 0, b)
1. c 0 is called a point of local maxima if there is a h 2 0 , then f has a local maximum value at x 0 .
such that f (c 0) $ f (x), for all x in (c 0 − h, c 0 + h). or
The value f (c 0) is called the local maximum value of
If f (x) changes sign from positive to negative as x
f.
increase through x 0 i.e., if f l (x) 2 0 at every point
2. c 0 is called a point of local minima if there is a h 2 0
sufficiently close to the left of x 0 and f l (x) 1 0 at
such that f (c 0) # f (x), for all x in (c 0 − h, c 0 + h).
every point sufficiently close to the right of x 0 then x 0
The value f (c 0) is called the local maximum value of
is a point of local maxima.
f.
2. If there exists an open interval (a, b) containing x 0
If c 0 is a point of local maximum of f , then the graph
such that f l (x) 1 0 on (a, x 0) and f l (x) 2 0 (x 0, b),
of f around c 0 will be as shown Fig. 11.7. Here f l (x) 2 0
then f has a local maximum value at x 0 .
in the interval (c 0 - h, c 0) and f l (x) 1 0 in the interval
(c 0, c 0 + h). From this, we conclude f l (c 0) = 0 . or
If f l (x) changes sign from negative to positive as x
increases through x 0 i.e., if f l (x) 1 0 at every point
sufficiently close to the left of x 0 and f l (x) 2 0 at
every point sufficiently close the right of x 0 , then x 0 is
a point of local minima.

3. If fl is positive (or negative) on both sides of a critical

or singular point, then f has neither a maximum nor
a minimum value at that point.
or
If f l (x) does not change sign as x increase through
Figure 11.7 x 0 then x 0 is neither a point of local maxima nor a
point of local maxima. Such a point is called a point
Again if c 0 is point of local minima of f , then the
of inflexion.
graph of around c 0 will be as shown in Fig. 11.8. Here
f l (x) 1 0 in the interval (c 0, c 0 - h). Again from this we
conclude f l (c 0) = 0 .
11.6 Second Derivatives Test
A function f will have a local maximum (or minimum)
value at a critical point if its graph is concave downward
(or upward) in an interval containing that point. In fact,
we can often use the value of the second derivative at the
critical point to check whether the function has a local
maximum or a local minimum value there.
Let f be a differentiable function of an interval I
and let x 0 d I . Let f l (x) be continuous as x 0 .
1. If f l (x 0) = 0 and f m (x 0) 1 0 , then f has a local
maximum value at x 0
Figure 11.8 2. If f l (x 0) = 0 and f m (x 0) 2 0 , then f has a local
minimum value at x 0
3. If f l (x 0) = 0 and f m (x 0) = 0 , no conclusion can be
11.5 First Derivatives Test drawn. In this case, go back to the first derivative test.
f may have local maximum at x 0 or a local minimum,
We now give below a working rule for finding points of or it may have an inflexion point instead.
local maxima or points of local minima using only the first
order derivatives. Suppose that f is continuous at x 0 and
Chap 11 Maxima and Minima Page 125

11.7 Summary

Sol :

1. If x 0 is a point of local maxima of f , then f (x 0) is the

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke101
local maximum value of f .
2. If x 0 is a point of local minima of f , then f (x 0) is the
local maximum value of f . EXAMPLE 11.2
3. A function f is said to have absolute maximum value Find the maximum and minimum values if any, of the
(global maximum value or greatest value) at a point following functions given by
in its domain if f (c) 2 f (x) for all x in the domain of (a) f (x) =− (x − 1) 2 + 10
x and c is called the point of absolute minimum. (b) f (x) = x 3 + 1
4. A function f is said to have absolute minimum value

Sol :
(global minimum value or smallest value) at a point
in its domain if f (c) 1 f (x) for all x in the domain of
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke102
x and c is called the point of absolute minimum.
5. To find absolute maxima or absolute minima :
a. Find all critical points of f in the interval i.e., EXAMPLE 11.3
find points x where either f l (x) = 0 or f is not Find the maximum and minimum values if any, of the
differentiable. following functions given by
b. Calculate the values of f at the critical points and (a) f (x) = x + 2 − 1
at the end points of the interval. (b) h (x) = x + 1, x d (- 1, 1)
c. The maximum value calculated in step (b) will be

Sol :
the absolute maximum value of f and the minimum
value will be the absolute minimum value of f .
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke103
6. First Derivative Test:
a. c is a point of local maximum if f l (x) = 0 and f l (x)
changes sign from positive to negative as x increase EXAMPLE 11.4
through c . Find the maximum and minimum values if any, of the
b. c is a point of local minimum if f l (c) = 0 and f l (c) following function g (x) =− x + 1 + 3
changes sign from negative to positive as x increase

Sol :
through c .
c. If f l (x) does not change sign as x increase through
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke104
c , then c is neither a point of local maxima nor a
point of local minima, such a point is called point
of inflexion. EXAMPLE 11.5
7. Second Derivative Test: Prove that the following functions do not have maxima or
a. Let f be a function defined on an interval I and minima :
c d I . Then x = c is a point of local maxima if (a) f (x) = ex (b) g (x) = log x
f l (c) = 0 and f m (c) 1 0 . Here the value f (c) is

Sol :
local maximum value of f .
b. x = c is a point of local minima if f l (c) = 0 and
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke105
f m (c) 2 0 . here f (c) is local minimum value of f .
c. If f l (c) = 0 and f m (c) = 0 , the test fails. In such
cases, we go back to the first derivatives rest and EXAMPLE 11.6
find whether c is a point of maxima, minima or a Prove that the following functions do not have maxima or
point of inflexion. minima :
(a) h (x) = x 3 + x 2 + x + 1 (b) f (x) = x + 2


Sol :
EXAMPLE 11.1
Find the maximum and minimum values if any, of the
following functions given by Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke106
(a) f (x) = 2 (x − 1) 2 + 3
(b) f (x) = 9x 2 + 12x + 2
Page 126 Maxima and Minima Chap 11

EXAMPLE 11.7

Sol :

Find the absolute maximum value and the minimum value
of the function f (x) = x 3, x d 6− 2, 2@ in the given interval. Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke113


Sol :

EXAMPLE 11.14
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke107
Find the maximum and minimum value of x3 − 6x2 + 9x + 15.


Sol :
EXAMPLE 11.8
Find the absolute maximum value and the minimum value Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke114
of the function f (x) = 4x − 12 x 2, x d 6− 2, 92 @ in the given
interval.


Sol : EXAMPLE 11.15
Find the maxima and minima of the function
2x3 − 15x2 + 36x + 11.
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke108


Sol :

EXAMPLE 11.9 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke115

Find the absolute maximum value and the minimum value
of the function f (x) = (x − 1) 2 + 3, x d 6− 3, 1@ in the given
interval. EXAMPLE 11.16


Sol : Find the Maximum and Minimum values of x3 − 2x2 + x + 6.


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke109

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke116

EXAMPLE 11.10
Find the points of maximum and minimum of EXAMPLE 11.17

1
y = (x − 1) (x − 2), 1 # x # 9
3
Find the maxima and minima of the function
x3 + 2x2 − 4x − 8 .


Sol :


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke110

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke117

EXAMPLE 11.11
Find the local extremum values of the function x 2 . EXAMPLE 11.18
Find the local extremum values of (x − 1)(x + 2) 2


Sol :


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke111

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke118

EXAMPLE 11.12
1 . EXAMPLE 11.19
Find the local extremum value of the function 2
x +2 Find the local extremum values of the function (x - 3) 4 .


Sol :


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke112

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke119

EXAMPLE 11.13
EXAMPLE 11.20
Find the local extremum values of the constant function
Find the points of local maxima and local minima, if any,
α.
of the following function. Find also the local maximum
Chap 11 Maxima and Minima Page 127

and local minimum values : EXAMPLE 11.26

f (x) = x 4 − 62x 2 + 120x + 9 Find the local maximum and minimum values of


Sol : y= x , 11x14
(x − 1)(x − 4)


Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke120

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke126

EXAMPLE 11.21
Find the points of local maxima and local minima, if any,
of the following function. Find also the local maximum EXAMPLE 11.27
and local minimum values : Find the local extremum values of the function
f (x) = 2x 3 − 21x 2 + 36x − 20 x 3 − 6x 2 + 9x + 15


Sol :

Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke121 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke127

EXAMPLE 11.22 EXAMPLE 11.28

Find the points of local maxima and local minima, if any, Find the local extremum values of the function x 3 (2x - 1) 3 .
of the following function. Find also the local maximum

Sol :
and local minimum values :
f (x) =− 3 x 4 − 8x 3 − 45 x 2 + 105 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke128
4 2


Sol :
EXAMPLE 11.29
Find the local maximum and minimum values of
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke122
y = x 5 − 5x 4 + 5x 3 − 1


Sol :
EXAMPLE 11.23
Show that the value of xx is minimum when x = 1 . Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke129
e


Sol :

EXAMPLE 11.30
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke123 Find the local maximum and minimum values of
y = (1 − x) 2 ex
EXAMPLE 11.24

Sol :
Find local maximum and local minimum, if any, of the
function f (x) = 2 − 22 , x 2 0 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke130
x x


Sol :
EXAMPLE 11.31
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke124 Find the maximum and minimum value of
f (x) = x 3 − 12x 2 + 36x + 17 in 1 # x # 10


Sol :
EXAMPLE 11.25
Find the points of local maxima and local minima, if any,
of the following function. Find also the local maximum Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke131
and local minimum values :
f (x) = x 4 − 62x 2 + 120x + 9
EXAMPLE 11.32


Sol : Determine the maximum and minimum values of the
f (x) = x +
2
1 ,0 # x # 2
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke125 x +1
Page 128 Maxima and Minima Chap 11

Sol : 4. Find the extreme value of the function :

y = x 3 − 6x 2 + 9x − 8
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke132 Ans : y maximum - 4 , y minimum =− 8

EXAMPLE 11.33
Find the local extremum values of the functions 5. Find the maximum and minimum values of the
x + 2, x 2 0 function:
2 x
y = 2x 3 − 15x 2 + 36x + 7


Sol : Ans : y maximum = 35 , y minimum = 34

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke133

6. Find the maximum and minimum value of the function.
EXAMPLE 11.34 y = 12x 5 − 45x 4 + 40x 3
Find the local maximum and minimum values of Ans : y maximum = 7 , y minimum =− 16
4
y = x ,x ! 1
x−1


Sol :
7. Find the extreme value of the following function :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke134 y = x 4 − 14x 2 + 24x + 9

Ans : y maximum = 20 , y minimum =− 108

EXAMPLE 11.35
Find the local maximum and minimum values of log x
8. Find the maximum value of , 01x13
y = (x + 3) 2 (x − 4) 4 x
Ans : y maximum = 1


Sol : e

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke135

9. Find the maximum and minimum value of
y = 3x 4 − 10x 3 + 6x 2 + 5
Ans : y maximum = 5.44 , y minimum = 5

E X ERC I S E 11.1
10. Locate the extreme points, maxima and minima of
1. Find the maximum and minimum value of the function. 1 3 2
3 x − 3x + 8x − 5
y = x 3 − 12x + 12 Ans : y maximum = 1 , y minimum = 5
Ans : y maximum =− 4 , y minimum = 24 3 3

2. Show that the curve y = x + x1 has one maximum and

one minimum value. Show that the latter is larger 11.8 Application in business
than the former.
Ans : y maximum =− 2 , y minimum = 2 The concept of maxima and minima play a very important
role in almost all fields, especially in business and
economics. Every consumer wants to maximise his utility.
3. Show that the maximum value of the function Every producer wants to maximise revenue and minimise
f (x) = x 3 − 27x + 108 is 108 more than the minimum costs. The producer always tries to maximise his profit.
value. All such problems can be solved through the technique of
Ans : y maximum = 162 , y minimum = 54 maxima and minima. In this section, we shall develop this
important technique.
Chap 11 Maxima and Minima Page 129

11.8.1 Maximisation of Revenue EXAMPLE 11.37

If the price per unit is p = 100 − 4x , find the level of
The technique of maxima minima can also be used to
output at which total revenue is maximum and also find
maximize revenue. The total revenue of a firm is
the maximum revenue.
R (x) = px


Sol :
where p is the price and x is the quantity.
Conditions for Revenue Maximisation
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke137
To maximise revenue R (x) , the following two conditions
are fulfilled:
1.
dR (x)
=0 EXAMPLE 11.38
dx If price per unit is given by p = x121
+ 4 − 1, find level of output
d 2 R (x) at which total revenue is maximum. Also find maximum
2. <0
dx2 revenue.


Sol :

11.8.2 Minimization of Cost Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke138

The technique of maxima minima can also be sued to
minimise cost. Suppose we have a cost function C (x) ,
where x represent output quantity. EXAMPLE 11.39
The price of per unit is given by p = 9 − x where x
Conditions for Cost Minimization
is the quantity demanded. Find the level of output at
To minimize cost C (x) , the following two conditions are which total revenue is maximum. Also find the maximum
fulfilled: revenue.
dC (x)
1. =0

Sol :
dx
d 2 C (x)
2. <0 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke139
dx2

EXAMPLE 11.40
11.8.3 Maximisation of Profit
A manufacturer produces x pants per week at total cost
The technique of maxima minima can also be used to of < (x2 + 78x + 2500). The price per pant is given by
maximize profit. The profit function is given by P (x) . 8x = 600 − p , where ‘p’ is the price of each pant. Find
Conditions for Profit Maximisation the maximum profit obtained, where the profit function is
To maximise revenue P (x) , the following two conditions given by P (x) - C (x).
are fulfilled:

Sol :
dP (x)
1. =0
dx Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke140
2
d P (x)
2. <0
dx2
EXAMPLE 11.41
The price per unit for a particular commodity is p = 15e−x/3
for 0 # x # 8 where x is the number of units demanded.
EXAMPLE 11.36 Determine the price and quantity for which the revenue is
The total cost of producing x TV sets per day is maximum.
< (x2 + 140x + 100) and the price per set at which they may


Sol :
be sold is < (200 - 2x). Find the daily output to maximise
the total profit.
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke141


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke136 EXAMPLE 11.42

The cost function of a firm is given by the equation
Page 130 Maxima and Minima Chap 11

C (x) = 300x − 10x2 + 13 x3 , where x is the quantity (ii) What is the price at maximum profit?
demanded. Find the output at which marginal cost is

Sol :
minimum.


Sol : Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke147

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke142

EXAMPLE 11.48
A pen drive manufacturing company charges < 6000 per
EXAMPLE 11.43 unit for an order of 50 pen drives or less. The charge is
If the cost function is C (x) = 40 − 6x + x2 , find the reduced by < 75 per pen drive for each order in excess of
minimum value of cost C . 50. Find the largest size order, the company should allow


Sol : so as to receive maximum revenue.


Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke143
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke148

EXAMPLE 11.44
Let the revenue function given by R (x) = 14x − x2 and the EXAMPLE 11.49
cost function given by C (x) = x (x2 − 2). A tour operator charges <136 per passenger for 100
(i) Find the level of output at which profit is maximum. passengers with a discount of < 4 for each 10 passengers
(ii) Find the maximum profit and price at maximum in excess of 100. Find the number of passengers that will
profit. maximise the amount of money the tour operator receives.


Sol :

Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke144 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke149

EXAMPLE 11.45 EXAMPLE 11.50

The price per unit for a commodity is p = 100 + x and Last year, 300 people attended the Ravindra Manch Drama
cost function is C (x) = 13 x3 − 7x2 + 111x + 50 . Find profit Club’s winter play. The ticket price was < 70. The advisor
maximising output and the maximum profit. estimates that 20 fewer people would attend for each < 10


Sol : increase in ticket price.
(i) What ticket price would give the most income for the
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke145 Drama Club?
(ii) If the Drama Club raised its tickets to this price, how
much income should it expect to bring in?
EXAMPLE 11.46

Sol :
A company finds that it can sell its product at < 2 per unit
where its cost function is C (x) = 1000 + 12 ( 50x ) 2 . Find the Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke150
profit maximising output and the maximum profit.


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke146

E X ERC I S E 1 1 . 2
EXAMPLE 11.47 1. If p = x +8 2 − 1, find the level of output at which revenue
A toy manufacturer produces x set per week at a total cost (R) is maximum. Also find the maximum revenue.
of 251 x2 + 3x + 100 . The produced quantity for his market Ans : 2, 2
is x = 75 − 3p where p is the price set.
(i) Show that the maximum profit is obtained when about
30 toys are produced per week.
2. The demand function for a manufacturer’s product is
Chap 11 Maxima and Minima Page 131

P = 804− x , where x is the number of units and P is the is number of units and p is price per unit. Find how
price per unit. What is the maximum revenue? many units should the firm manufacture for maximum
Ans : 40, 400 profits, and what is the maximum profit.
Ans : 30, 1180

3. If the demand function is p = 600 − 2x 2, find at which

level of output, the total revenue will be maximum 10. If the demand function of the monopolist is
and what will it be? x = 400 − 20p and the average cost is 5 + x , where x
Ans : 10, 4000 50
is output and P , the price, find the profit maximising
output and also the maximum profit.
Ans : 107, 803.57
4. The total cost function of producing and marketing
x units of a commodity is given by C = x 2 − 2x + 16
. Find the level of output at which cost is minimum.
Also find the minimum value of total cost.
Ans : 1, 15 11.9 Applied problems
The concept of maxima and minima play a very important
role in almost all fields. It can also be used in daily life to
5. The cost function of a firm is given by
solve many problems. Here we will discuss some cases.
C = 200x − 203 x 2 + 29 x 3, where x is the output. Find the
output at which the
(i) marginal cost is minimum EXAMPLE 11.51
(ii) marginal cost is equal to average cost. Find two positive numbers whose sum is 16 and sum of
Ans : (i) 10 (ii) 15 whose cubes is minimum.


Sol :

6. A monopolist has the following demand cost functions, Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke151
p = 20 − x , C = x 2 + 8x + 5 . Find the level of profit
maximising output and the maximum profit.
Ans : 3, 13 EXAMPLE 11.52
Find two positive numbers x and y such that their sum is
35 and the product x 2 y 5 is maximum.
7. A radio manufacturing products x sets per week at a

Sol :

total cost of 15 x 2 + 3x + 100 . He is a monopolist and the

demand for his market is x = 105 − 3p , where p is the Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke152
price in rupees per set. Show that the maximum net
revenue is obtained when about 30 sets are produced
EXAMPLE 11.53
per week. What is the monopoly price?
A projectile is fixed upwards. Its height above the surface
Ans : Proof
of the earth at time t is given by h (t) = at 2 + bt + c where
a, b, c are none-zero constant and a 1 0 . Determine how
high will the projectile travel.
8. If the total cost and total revenue of a firm are given

Sol :
by C = 100 + 0.02x 2 and R = 5x . Find the profit
maximising level of output and the maximum profit.
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke153
Ans : 125, 212.5

EXAMPLE 11.54
9. If the demand function of a firm is 5x = 375 − 3p Two sides of a triangle are given. Find the angle between
, total cost function is C = 500 + 13x + 15 x 2, where x them such that the area shall be maximum.
Page 132 Maxima and Minima Chap 11

Sol : Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke160

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke154

EXAMPLE 11.61
The cost of fuel for running a bus is proportional to the
EXAMPLE 11.55 square of the speed generated in km/hr. It <48 per hour
Divide a number 15 into two parts such that square of one when the bus is moving at a speed of 20 km/hr. What is
multiplied with the cube of the other is minimum. the most economical speed if the fixed charged are < 108


Sol : for an hour, over and above the running charges?


Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke155
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke161

EXAMPLE 11.56
Show that the area of a rectangle of given perimeter is EXAMPLE 11.62
maximum, when the rectangle is a square. Show that the right circular cone of least curved surface


Sol : area and given volume has an altitude equal to 2 times
the radius of the base.
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke156

Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke162

EXAMPLE 11.57
A straight line AB of length 8 cm is divided into two
parts AP and PB by a point P . Find the position of P if EXAMPLE 11.63
AP 2 + BP 2 is minimum. An open box is to be made out of a piece of cardboard


Sol : measuring 24 cm # 24 cm by cutting off equal squares
from the corners and turning up the sides. Find the height
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke157 of the box for maximum volume.


Sol :

EXAMPLE 11.58 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke163

A closed right circular cylinder has a volume of 2156 cm3 .
What will be the radius of its base so that its total surface
area is minimum? EXAMPLE 11.64


Sol : If the sum of the lengths of the hypotenuse and a side of a
right triangle is given, show that the area of the triangle is
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke158 maximum, when the angle between them is 60c.


Sol :

EXAMPLE 11.59 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke164

Divide 64 into two parts such that the sum of the cubes of
two parts is minimum.


Sol : EXAMPLE 11.65
A window is in the form of a rectangle surmounted by a
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke159 semi-circular opening. The total perimeter of the window
is 10 m. Find the dimensions of the window to admit
maximum light through the whole opening.
EXAMPLE 11.60

Sol :
Show that the right circular cylinder of given surface and
maximum volume is such that its height is equal to the Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke165
diameter of the base.


Sol :
Chap 11 Maxima and Minima Page 133

EXAMPLE 11.66

Sol :

A poster is to contain 72 cm2 of printed matter with
borders of 4 cm each at the top and bottom and 2 cm Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke170
on each side. Find the dimensions if the total area of the
poster is minimum. This poster is to be presented in a
debate competition on the topic SAY NO TO SMOKING. EXAMPLE 11.71
Should smoking be banned? A cylinder is such that the sum of its height and the


Sol : circumference of its base is 10 cm. Find the maximum
volume of the cylinder.
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke166

Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke171

EXAMPLE 11.67
A sheet of paper for a poster is 32 m2 in area. The margins
at the top and the bottom are to be 6 cm wide and at the EXAMPLE 11.72
sides are to be 4 cm wide. Find the dimensions of the sheet A given quantity of metal is to be cast into a half cylinder
so that the printed area is maximum. with a rectangular base and semicircular ends. Show that


o the total surface area is minimum when the ratio of the
The total area of a page is 32 m2 . The combined width of length of the cylinder to the diameter of its semicircular
the margin at the bottom and the is 12 cm and at the sides ends is π : (π + 2).
is 8 cm. What must be the dimensions of the page in order

Sol :
that the area of the printed matter may be maximum?


Sol : Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke172

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke167

EXAMPLE 11.73
Find the dimensions of the rectangle of perimeter 0.36 m
EXAMPLE 11.68 which will sweep out a volume as large as possible when
Show that of all the rectangles inscribed in a given fixed revolved about one of its sides.
circle, the square has maximum area.

Sol :


o
Show that the rectangle of maximum area that can be Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke173
inscribed in a circle is a square


Sol :
EXAMPLE 11.74
Show that the right circular cylinder, open at the top, and
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke168
of given surface area and maximum volume is such that its
height is equal to the radius of the base.
EXAMPLE 11.69

Sol :
A rectangle is inscribed in a semicircle of radius R with
one of its sides on the diameter of the semicircle. Find the Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke174
dimensions of the rectangle so that its area is maximum.


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ke169

E X ERC I S E 1 1 . 3
EXAMPLE 11.70 1. Find two numbers whose sum is 24 and whose product
A closed right circular cylinder has volume 128 π cm3 . is as large as possible.
What should be the radius of its base so that its total Ans : 12 and 12
surface area may be minimum?
Page 134 Maxima and Minima Chap 11

2. Find two positive numbers x and y such that x + y = 60

and xy 3 is maximum.
Ans : 15 and 45

3. The combined resistance R of two resistors is given by

R = R + R where R1 and R 2 are the respective resistance
1 1 1
1 2

of the two resistors with R1 + R2 = a (R1, R2 2 0), where

a is a constant. Show that the maximum resistance R
is obtained by choosing resistors for which R1 = R2
Ans : Proof

4. The rate of a chemical reaction y , is given by the

formula y = kx (a − x) where x is the amount of
product, a is the amount of material at the beginning
of the reaction and k 2 0 . Determine the value of x for
which the rate of chemical reaction will be maximum.
Ans : a2 .

5. A cylinder is such that sum of its height and the

circumference of its base is 10 metres. Find the greatest
volume of the cylinder.
Ans : 1000
27π

6. A wire of length 28 m is to be cut into two pieces, one

of the pieces is to be made into a square and the other
into a circle. Where should the wire be cut so that
combined area is minimum?
Ans : at a distance of 428+pp from one end.

7. Prove that the area if a right angled triangle of given

hypotenuse is maximum when the triangle is isosceles.
Ans : Proof

8. Show that of all the rectangles inscribed in a given

circle, the square has the maximum perimeter.
Ans : Proof

******
chapter 12 Probabitility Distribution Page 135

CHAPTER 12

Probabitility Distribution

12.1 Introduction experiment. Since this number can change from one
We have already studied random experiments and outcome to another, it is a variable. Also, since this number
sample spaces corresponding to random experiments. As is obtained from outcomes of a random experiment, it is
an example, consider the experiment of tossing two fair called a random variable.
coins. The sample space corresponding to this experiment
contains four points, namely {HH, HT, TH, TT}.
We have already learnt to construct the sample
12.2 random variable
space of any random experiment. However, the interest
is not always in random experiment and its sample space. A random variable is a real-valued function defined on
We are often not interested in the outcomes of a random the sample space of a random experiment. In other words,
experiment, but only in some number obtained from the domain of a random variable is the sample space of a
the outcome. For example, in case of the experiment of random experiment, while its co-domain is the real line.
tossing two fair coins, our interest may be only in the Thus X : S " R is a random variable.
number of heads when two coins are tossed. In general, Consider an experiment where three seeds are sown
it is possible to associate a unique real number with very in order to find how many of them germinate. Every seed
possible outcome of a random experiment. The number will either germinate or will not germinate. Let us use the
obtained from an outcome of a random experiment can letter Y when a seed germinates. The sample space of this
take different values for different outcomes. This is why experiment can then be written as
such a number is a variable. The value of this variable S = {YYY, YYN, YNY, NYY, YNN, NYN, NNY NNN}
depends on the outcome of the random experiment, and and n ^S h = 8
is therefore called a random variable. a random variable is None of these outcomes is a number. We shall
usually denoted by capital letters like X , Y , Z , ...... try to represent every outcome by a number. Consider
Consider the following examples to understand the concept the number of times the letter Y appears is a possible
of random variables. outcome and denote it by X . Then
X ^YYYh = 3
(i) When we throw two dice, there are 36 possible
We have,
outcomes, but if we are interested in the sum of the
numbers on the two dice, then there are only 11 X ]YYNg = X ^YNYh = X ^NYYh = 2
different possible values, from 2 to 12. X ^YNNh = X ^NYNh = X ^NNYh = 1
(ii) If we toss a coin 10 times, then there are 210 = 1024 X ^NNNh = 0
possible outcomes, but if we are interested in the The variable X has four possible values, namely 0,
number of heads among the 10 tosses of the coin, 1, 2 and 3. The set of possible values of X is called the
then there are only 11 different possible values, from range of X . Thus, in this example, the range of X is the
0 to 10. set {0, 1, 2, 3}.
(iii) In the experiment of randomly selecting four items A random variable is denoted by a capital letter,
from a lot of 20 items that contains 6 defective items, like X and Y . A particular value taken by the random
the interest is in the number of defective items among variable is denoted by the small letter x . Note that x
the selected four items. In this case, there are only 5 is real number and the set of all possible outcomes
different possible outcomes, from 0 to 4. corresponding to a particular value x of X is denoted by
In all the above examples, there is a rule to assign the event 6X = x @. For example, in experiment of three
a unique value to every possible outcomes of the random seeds. the random variable X has four possible values,
Page 136 Probabitility Distribution chapter 12

namely 0, 1, 2, 3. the four events are then defined as 6. N Y N 1

follows.
7. N N Y 1
6X = 0@ = {NNN} ,
6X = 1@ = " YNN, NYN, NNY , ,
8. N N N 0

6X = 2@ = " YYN, YNY, NYY , ,
Form the above table, the discrete random variable take

values 0, 1, 2 and 3.
6X = 3@ = " YYY ,
Note that the sample space in this experiment 12.3.1 Probability Distribution Function
is finite and so is the random variable defined on it. A
If X is a discrete random variable with distinct values x 1,
x 2 , ..., x n , ..., then the function, denoted by PX ^x h and
sample space need not be finite. Consider, for example,
the experiment of tossing a coin until a head is obtained.
defined by
The sample space for this experiment is
P ^X h = p ^x h
S = "H, TH, TTH, TTTH, .....,
p ^x h if x = x i, i = 1, 2, ....., n, .....
Note that S contains an unending sequence of tosses =* i
required to get a head. Here, S is countably infinite. The 0 if x ! x i
random variable X : S " R , denoting the number of tosses This is defined to be the probability distribution function
required to get a head, has the range {1, 2, 3, .....} which or discrete probability function of X .
is also countably infinite. The probability distribution function p ^x h must satisfy
Types of Random Variables : the following conditions
(i) p ^x ih $ 06i
There are two types of random variables, namely discrete
/ p ^x ih = 1
3
and continuous. (ii)
i=1

12.3.2 Expected Value

12.3 Discrete random variable
An extremely useful concept in problems involving random
A variable which can assume finite number of possible variables or distributions is that of expectation. Random
values or an infinite sequence of countable real number is variables can be characterized and dealt with effectively
called a discrete random variable. for practical purposes by consideration of quantities
Example of discrete random variable : called their expectation. The concept of mathematical
(i) Marks obtained in a test. expectation arose in connection with games of chance. For
(ii) Number of red marbles in a jar. example, a gambler might be interested in his average
(iii) Number of telephone calls at a particular time. winnings at a game, a businessman in his average
(iv) Number of cars sold by a car dealer in one month, profits on a product, and so on. The average value of a
etc. random phenomenon is also termed as its Mathematical
For instance, three responsible persons say, P1 , P2 expectation or expected value.
and P3 are asked about their opinion in favour of building
Expected Value
a model school in a certain district. Each person’s response
is recorded as Yes (Y) or No (N). Determine the random The expected value is a weighted average of the values
variable that could be of interest in this regard. of a random variable may assume. The weights are the
The possibilities of the response are as follows probabilities.
Let X be a discrete random variable with probability
Possibilities P1 P2 P3 Values of Random distribution function p ^x h . Then, its expected value is
variable (Number of Yes defined by
E ^X h = / xp ^x h
those who are given)

Please not that E ^X h is an average of the values
1. Y Y Y 3
2. Y Y N 2 that the random variable takes on, where each value is
3. Y N Y 2 weighted by the probability that the random variable is
equal to that value. Values that are more probable receive
4. Y N N 1
more weight.
5. N Y Y 2
Properties of Mathematical Expectation
chapter 12 Probabitility Distribution Page 137

(i) E (a) = a where a is a constant No. of Cars 0 1 2 3 4

(ii) E (aX) = aE (X)
(iii) E (aX + b) = aE (X) + b , where ]a\ and ]b\ are No. of Household 30 320 380 190 80
constants. Estimate the probability distribution function. Verify
(iv) If X $ 0 , then E (X) $ 0 p ^x ih is a probability distribution function.
(v) V (a) = 0

Sol :
(vi) If X is random variable, then V (aX + b) = a 2 V (X)

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/pe102

12.3.3 Variance For Discrete Random Variable
The variance is a weighted average of the squared
deviations of a random variable from its mean. The EXAMPLE 12.3
weights are the probabilities. The variance of a random A problem in a test given to small children asks them
variable X will be a measure of the spread or dispersion to match each of three pictures of animals to the word
of the density of X or simply the variability in the values identifying that animal. If a child assigns the three words
of a random variable. at random to the three pictures, find the probability
If X is discrete random variable with probability distribution for Y , the number of correct matches.
distribution function p (x) the variance of X is defined by

Sol :
Var ^X h = E (X 2) − [E (X)] 2

12.3.4 Standard Deviation Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/pe103

If X is a random variable, the standard deviation of

X (S.D (X)), denoted by σX , is defined as + Var [X] i.e
EXAMPLE 12.4
σX 2 = Var [X]
The variance of X , is also denoted by σX 2 or Let the random variable X denote the sum obtained in
Var (X) or V (X). rolling a pair of dice. Determine the PDF of X .


Sol : Solution :

EXAMPLE 12.1 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/pe104

Which of the following distributions yield discrete random
variable, and continuous random variable?
(i) Number of males in a sample of 100 persons in a
EXAMPLE 12.5
town.
A random variable X has the following probability
(ii) The time between two successive arrivals of customers
function
in a reservation counter.
(iii) The number of people who arrived in the last one X = xi 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
p ^x ih
hour in a reservation counter.
0 a 2a 2a 3a a 2
2a 2 2
7a + a
(iv) The number of villages in a district having no
electricity. (i) Find a ,
(v) The number of hours during a session of Lok Sabha (ii) Evaluate P ^X 1 3h ,
which went without any discussion. (iii) Evaluate P ^X 2 2h and


Sol : (iv) P ^2 1 X # 5h


Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/pe101
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/pe105

EXAMPLE 12.2
In a survey following data were obtained regarding the
numbers of car own by a house.
Page 138 Probabitility Distribution chapter 12

EXAMPLE 12.6
Job Satisfaction Score Programmers Project leaders

p (x) = * 20
x , x = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
3 20 3
If
0, otherwiere 4 10 6
Find (i) P ^X 1 3h and (ii) P ^2 1 X # 4h 5 5 2


Sol : (i) Develop probability distribution for the job
satisfaction of programmers and project leaders.
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/pe106 (ii) Find the mean and variance of the levels of job
satisfaction of programmers and project leaders.
(iii) Who is more satisfied with his job: a randomly
selected programmer or a randomly selected project
EXAMPLE 12.7 leader?
A milk booth can sell 100 to 500 packets on any day. It sells
100 packets or 200 packets with a probability of 0.2 each. It

Sol :
can sell 300 or 400 packets with a probability of 0.25 each
and 500 packets with a probability of 0.1. Describe the Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/pe109
random variable by its probability distribution function.


Sol :
EXAMPLE 12.10
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/pe107 Construct the probability distribution function of the
random variable whose frequency table is given in
following table.

EXAMPLE 12.8 Outcome 2 4 6 8 10 12 14

Decide which of the following distributions are probability Frequency 12 11 8 6 4 5 4
distributions :
(i) The distribution takes the values - 2 , - 1, 0, 1 Also, find its mean and variance.
and p (− 2) =− 0.5 , p (− 1) = 0.7 , p (0) = 0.2 ,

Sol :
p (1) = 0.6.
(ii) The distribution takes the values 1, 2, 3, 4 and
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/pe110
p (1) = 0.1, p (2) = 0.2 , p (3) = 0.25 , p (4) = 0.3 .
(iii) The distribution takes the values 20, 30, 40, 50 with
p (20) = 0.1, p (30) = 0.2 , p (40) = 0.3 , p (50) = 0.4 .
EXAMPLE 12.11


Sol :
Find the probability distribution of a number of successes
in two tosses of a die, where a success is defined as a
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/pe108 number greater than 4.


Sol :

EXAMPLE 12.9
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/pe111
A software company conducts a survey among its
programmers and project leaders regarding their job
satisfaction. The data obtained regarding job satisfaction
of 50 programmers and 15 project leaders is given in EXAMPLE 12.12
following table. (The lowest and highest job satisfaction A bag contains 3 blue and 4 red balls. Three balls are
are given by scores 1 and 5 respectively.) drawn one by one with replacement. Find the probability
distribution of the number of red balls.
Job Satisfaction Score Programmers Project leaders


Sol :
1 5 1
2 10 3 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/pe112
chapter 12 Probabitility Distribution Page 139

EXAMPLE 12.13 EXAMPLE 12.17

An urn contains 4 white and 6 red balls. Four balls are Let X be a random variable which assumes values x 1 , x 2,
drawn at random from the urn. Find the probability x 3 , x 4 such that
distribution of the number of white balls. 2P (X = x 1) = 3P (X = x 2) = P (X = x 3) = 5P (X = x 4)


Sol : Find the probability distribution of X .


Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/pe113
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/pe117

EXAMPLE 12.14
Two bad eggs are mixed accidentally with 10 good ones. EXAMPLE 12.18
Find the probability distribution of the number of bad Find the mean, variance and standard deviation of
eggs in 3 draws at random, without replacement, from the number of heads in three tosses of a fair coin (or
this lot. simultaneous tosses of three coins).


Sol :

Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/pe114 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/pe118

EXAMPLE 12.15 EXAMPLE 12.19

Three numbers are selected at random (without A die is tossed thrice. A success is getting 1 or 6 on a
replacement) from first six positive integers. Let X toss. Find the mean and the variance of the number of
denote the largest of the three numbers obtained. Find successes.
the probability distribution of X .

Sol :


Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/pe119
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/pe115

EXAMPLE 12.20
EXAMPLE 12.16 Two cards are drawn successively with replacement from a
A random variable X has the following probability well shuffled pack of 52 cards. Find the mean and standard
distribution values of X deviation of the number of kings.

X = xi 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Sol :

p ^x ih 0 k 2k 2k 3k k2 2k 2 7k 2 + k
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/pe120
Find :
(i) k , (ii) P (X 1 3),

(iii) P (X 2 6) (iv) P (X 1 6) EXAMPLE 12.21

From a lot of 10 items containing 3 defective items, a
(v) (0 1 X 1 5) sample of 4 items is drawn at random. Let the random
variable X denote the number of defective items in the


Sol : sample. If the sample is drawn without replacement, find
the mean and variance of X .
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/pe116

Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/pe121

Page 140 Probabitility Distribution chapter 12

sold in a day.


Sol :

EXAMPLE 12.22 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/pe125

The random variable X can take only the values 0, 1, 2.
Given that P (X = 0) = P (X = 1) = p and E (X 2) = E (X ),
find the value of p . EXAMPLE 12.26


Sol : Determine the expected value and variance of the random
variable X having the following probability distribution.

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/pe122 X = xi 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

p ^x ih 0.15 0.10 0.10 0.01 0.08 0.01 0.05 0.02 0.28 0.20

Sol :
EXAMPLE 12.23
The probability distribution of a random variable X is
given as : Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/pe126
Zkx 2 for x = 1, 2, 3
]
p (x) = [2kx for x = 4, 5, 6; where k is a constant
]0, otherwise EXAMPLE 12.27
\ Check whether the following can define probability
Find (i) P (X $ 4), (ii) E (X )
distribution function and explain your answer :


Sol : 2
f (x) = 5 − x , x = 0 , 1, 2, 3.
6
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/pe123

Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/pe127

EXAMPLE 12.24
A player tosses three fair coins. he wins < 12 if 3 heads
appear, < 8 if 2 heads appear and < 3 if 1 head appears. EXAMPLE 12.28

Verify that f (x) = * n (n + 1)

On the other hand, he loses < 25 if 3 tails appear. Find 2x , x = 1, 2, 3, ....., n
the expected value of the amount the player can win or .
lose. 0, elsewhere

Sol : can serve as probability function of a random variable X.

Also find P (X # 3).

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/pe124

Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/pe128

EXAMPLE 12.25
A dealer in refrigerators estimates from his past experience
the probabilities of his selling refrigerators in day, which EXAMPLE 12.29
are as follows : Given that f (x) = kx is a probability function for a
2
random variable which can take on the values x = 0, 1, 2, 3
No. of 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
and 4, find k .
refrigerators
sold in a day

Sol :
Probability 0.03 0.20 0.23 0.25 0.12 0.10 0.07
Find the expected value of the number of refrigerators Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/pe129
chapter 12 Probabitility Distribution Page 141

EXAMPLE 12.30 comes up with the following probabilities :

We select one of the integers 1 through 10 at random
and count its divisors. Find the probability distribution Sales (in units) 0 1 2 3 4 5
function. Probabilities 0.15 0.20 0.10 0.05 0.30 0.20


Sol : What is the expected value of the number of units he sells
per sale call?
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/pe130

Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/pe133

EXAMPLE 12.31
Let the random variable X represent the number of
accident occurring on a given day in Jaipur city. Let
EXAMPLE 12.34
the probability function of random variable X be of the
There is a group of 50 people who are patriotic out of
following form where C is source constant :
Z which 20 believe in non-violence. Two persons are selected
]C if x = 0 at random out of them. Write the probability distribution
]2C if x = 1 for the selected persons who are non-violent. Also find the
]
]3C if x = 2 expected value of the distribution.
f (x) = [
]4C if x = 3

Sol :
]1.5C if x = 4
]]
\0.5C if x = 5 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/pe134
(i) Determine the value of C
(ii) Find P (X 1 3),
(iii) Find P (0 1 X # 4), EXAMPLE 12.35


Sol : In a meeting 70% of the members favour a certain proposal,
30% being opposed. A member is selected at random and
let X = 0 if he opposed, and X = 1 if he is in favour. Find
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/pe131
E (X) and Var (X).


Sol :
EXAMPLE 12.32
A random variable X has the following probability Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/pe135
function:

X = xi –2 –1 0 1 2 3
EXAMPLE 12.36
p (xi) 0.1 k 0.2 2k 0.3 3k In a group of 30 scientists working on an experiment,
(i) Find k 20 never commit error in their work and are reporting
(ii) Evaluate P (X < 2) results elaborately. Two scientists are selected at random
(iii) Evaluate P (X $ 2) from the group. Find the probability distribution of the
(iv) Evaluate P (− 2 < X < 2) number of selected scientists who never commit error in


Sol : the work and reporting. Also, find the expected value of
the distribution.


Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/pe132

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/pe136

EXAMPLE 12.33
A salesman wants to know the average number of units
he sells per sales call. He check his past sales records and
Page 142 Probabitility Distribution chapter 12

EXAMPLE 12.37 (i) What is P (X = 4)

A supervisor in a manufacturing plant has three men (ii) What is the expected number of copying machines in
and three women working for him. He wants to choose use at a particular moment in time?
two workers for a special job. Not wishing to show any (iii) Calculate the variance and standard deviation of the
biases in his selection, he decides to select the two workers number of copying machines in use at a particular
at random. Let X denote the number of women in his moment.
selection. Find the probability distribution for X.


Sol :


Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/pe140
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/pe137

EXAMPLE 12.38
Out of a group of 8 highly qualified doctors in a Jaipur E X ERC I S E 12. 1
hospital, 6 are very kind and cooperative with their
patients and so are very popular, while the other two
1. Let X represent the difference between number of
remain reserved. For a health camp, three doctors are
heads and number of tails obtained when a coin is
selected at random. Find the probability distribution of
tossed 6 times. What are the possible values of X ?
Ans : "0, 2, 4, 6,
the number of popular doctors.


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/pe138

2. An urn contains 5 red and 2 black balls. Two balls are
drawn at random. X denotes number of black balls
EXAMPLE 12.39 drawn. What are the possible values of X ?
The city corporation is worried about the number of Ans : "0, 1, 2,
accidents occurring at a road junction without a traffic
signal. The data regarding the number of accidents
occurring at the junction over 20 weeks is given following
table. 3. Find the probability distribution of
(i) number of heads in two tosses of a coin,
Number of accidents 0 1 2 3 4
(ii) number of tails in three tosses of a coin,
Number of weeks 1 3 6 7 3 (iii) number of heads in four tosses of a coin.
The corporation is ready to install a traffic signal at the Ans :
junction if the mean number of accidents per week exceeds
2 and the standard deviation is 2. Will the corporation
install a traffic signal?


Sol : (i)
x 0 1 2
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/pe139
P (x) 1
4
1
2
1
4
(ii)
x 0 1 2 3
EXAMPLE 12.40
An office has four copying machines, and the random P (x) 1 3 3 1
8 8 8 8
variable X measures how many of them are in use at a (iii)
particular moment in time. Suppose that P (X = 0) = 0.08,
P (X = 1) = 0.11, P (X = 0) = 0.27, and P (X = 3) = 0.33 . x 0 1 2 3 4
chapter 12 Probabitility Distribution Page 143

P (x) 1 1 3 1 1 Ans : 7 = 3.5 m 35

16 4 8 4 16 2 12

4. Find the probability distribution of the number of

successes in two tosses of a die if success is defined as
getting a number greater than 4.
9. A class has 15 students whose ages are 14, 17, 15, 14,
Ans :
21, 17, 19, 20, 16, 18, 20, 17, 16, 19 and 20 years. If X
x 0 1 2 denotes the age of a randomly selected student, find
P (x) 4 4 1 the probability distribution of X . Find the mean and
9 9 9
variance of X .
Ans : Mean = 17.5333 , Variance = 5.12381

5. A sample of 4 bulbs is drawn at random with

replacement from a lot of 30 bulbs which includes 6
defectives bulbs. Find the probability distribution of x 14 15 16 17
the number of defective bulbs. P (X = x) 2
15
1
15
2
15
3
15
Ans :
x 18 19 20 21
x 0 1 2 3 4
P (X = x) 1 2 3 1
P (x) 4 _ 45 i 6 _ 45 i
4 4 3 2 4 c 1 m3 1 4
c m c m
15 15 15 15
5 5 5 5
c m
1 1 2
c m
5 5
10. 70% of the members favour and 30% oppose a proposal
in a meeting. The random variable X takes the value
0 if a member opposes the proposal and the value 1 if
a member is in favour. Find E (X) and Var (X).
6. A coin is blased so that the head is 3 times as likel Ans : 0.7, 0.21
to occur as tail. Find the probability distribution of
number of tails in two tosses.
Ans :
x 0 1 2

******
P (x) 9
16
3
8
1
16

7. A random variable X has the following probability

distribution:

x 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
P ^x h k 2k 2k 3k k2 2k2 7k2 + k
Determine : (i) k , (ii) P (X < 3), (iii) P (0 < X < 3),
(iv) P (X > 4)
Ans : (i) 1 , (ii) 3 , (iii) 3 , (iv) 1 = 0.2
10 10 10 5

8. Find expected value and variance of X , the number

on the uppermost face of a fair die.
Page 144 Bionomial Distribution chapter 13

CHAPTER 13

Bionomial Distribution

13.1 introduction If the die is fair, then p = 1

2 and q = 1 − p = 1
2 .
Many experiments are dichotomous in nature. An
experiment is dichotomous if it has only two possible 13.3 binomial distribution
outcomes. For example, a tossed coin shows ‘head’ or ‘tail’,
the result of a student is ‘pass’ or ‘fail’, a manufactured Consider a set of n independent Bernoullian trails (n
item is ‘defective’ or ‘non-defective’, the response to being finite) in which the probability ‘p’ of success in
a question is ‘yes’ or ‘no’, an egg has ‘hatched’ or ‘not any trial is constant, then q = 1 − p , is the probability
hatched’, the decision is ‘yes’ or ‘no’ etc. In such cases, of failure. The probability of x success and consequently
it is customary to call one of the outcomes ‘success’ and (n - x) failures in n independent trials, in a specified
the other ‘failure’. For example, in tossing a coin, if the order (say) SSFSFFFS.....FSF is given in the compound
occurrence of head is considered success, then occurrence probability theorem by the expression
of tail is failure. = P (S) P (S) P (F) P (S) ...
P(SSFSFFFS.....FSF)
P (F) P (S) P (F)
13.2 Bernoulli trial = ppqp...qpq

An experiment that can result in one of two possible = pppp...qqqqq...

outcomes is called a dichotomous experiment. One of the = "x factors, "(n − x) factors,

two outcomes is called success and the other outcome is = px q(n − x)
n
called failure. x success in n trials can occur in C x ways and the
Definition probability for each of these ways is same namely p x q n - x .
A dichotomous experiment is called a Bernoulli trial. Every The probability distribution of the number of successes,
time we toss a coin or perform a dichotomous experiment, so obtained is called the binomial probability distribution
we call it a trial. If a coin is tossed 4 times, the number and the binomial expansion is (q + p) n .
of trials is 4, each having exactly two possible outcomes, Definition
namely success and failure. The outcome of any trial is A random variable X is said to follow binomial distribution
independent of the outcome of other trials. In all such with parameter n and p , if it assumes only non-negative
trials, the probability of success (and hence of failure) value and its probability mass function in given by
remains the same. P (X = x) = p (x)
Sequence of Bernoulli Trials = n C x p x q n − x, x = 0, 1, 2, .....n

A sequence of dichotomous experiments is called a sequence
of Bernoulli trials if it satisfies the following conditions.

Note
(i) The trials are independent. Any random variable which follows binomial distribution
(ii) The probability of success remains the same in all is known as binomial variate i.e. X + B (n, p) is a binomial
trials. variate. The Binomial distribution can be used under the
The probability of success in a Bernoulli trial is denoted by following conditions :
p and the probability of failure is denoted by q = 1 − p . (i) The number of trials ‘n’ finite
For example, if we throw a die and define success as getting (ii) The trials are independent of each other.
an even number and failure as getting an odd number, we (iii) The probability of success ‘p’ is constant for each
have a Bernoulli trial. Successive throws of the die are trial.
independent trials and form a sequence of Bernoulli trials. (iv) In every trial there are only two possible outcomes-
chapter 13 Bionomial Distribution Page 145

success or failure. Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe101

13.3.1 Mean and Variance of Binomial Distribution

EXAMPLE 13.2
The mean of the binomial distribution
A fair coin is tossed 6 times. Find the probability that
/ x c nx m p x qn − x
n
E (X) = exactly 2 heads occurs.
x=0


Sol :
= P / x. c n mb n − 1 l p x − 1q n − x
n

x=1 x x−1
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe102
= np (q + p) n − 1 [since p + q = 1]

= np

EXAMPLE 13.3
E (X) = np
The mean of a Binomial distribution is 12 and its standard
Thus mean of the binomial distribution is np .
deviation is 4. Verify the statement.
Var (X) = E (X 2) − [E (X)] 2


Sol :
/ x 2 c nx m p x q n − x
n
Here, E (X 2) =
x=0
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe103
/ "x (x − 1) + x ,c nx m p x q n − x
n

x=0

= / "x (x − 1),c n m p x q n − x + / x c n m p x q n − x EXAMPLE 13.4

n n

x=0 x x=0 x The probability that a student get the degree is 0.4.
Determine the probability that out of 5 student
= / "x x − 1), P 2d nb lp q
n n (n − 1) n − 2 x − 2 n − x
( (i) one will be graduate
x=2 x (x − 1) x − 2
(ii) atleast one will be graduate
+ / x c n mp x q n − x
n

x=0 x

Sol :
= n (n − 1) P ' / b n − 2 l p x − 2q n − x1 + np
n
2

x=2 x − 2
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe104
= n (n − 1) P 2(q + p) (n − 2) + np

= n (n − 1) P 2 + np

EXAMPLE 13.5
Variance = E (X 2) − {E (X)} 2 In tossing of a five fair coin, find the chance of getting
= n 2 p 2 − np 2 + np − n 2 p 2
exactly 3 heads.
= np (1 − p) = npq


Sol :
Hence, mean of the BD is np and the variance is npq .
Properties of Binomial distribution Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe105
(i) Binomial distribution is symmetrical if p = q = 0.5 .
It is skew symmetric if p ! q . It is positively skewed
EXAMPLE 13.6
if p 1 0.5 and it is negatively skewed if p 2 0.5
The mean of Binomials distribution is 20 and standard
(ii) For Binomial distribution, variance is less than mean
deviation is 4. Find the parameters of the distribution.
Variance npq = (np) q 1 np


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe106

EXAMPLE 13.1
Ram and Shyam play a game in which their chance of
winning are in the ratio 3 : 2 Find Ram’s chance of winning EXAMPLE 13.7
atleast three games out of five games played. If X is a binomially distributed random variable with
E (X) = 2 and var (X) = 4 . Find P (X = 5).


Sol : 3


Sol :
Page 146 Bionomial Distribution chapter 13

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe107 EXAMPLE 13.13

A pair of dice is thrown 4 times. If getting a doublet is
considered a success. Find the probability of 2 successes.
EXAMPLE 13.8


Sol : `
If the average rain falls on 9 days in every thirty days, find
the probability that rain will fall on atleast two days of a
given week. Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe113


Sol :
EXAMPLE 13.14
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe108 Find the parameters of a binomial distribution for which
mean is 4 and variance is 3.


Sol :
EXAMPLE 13.9
What is the probability of guessing correctly atleast six of
the ten answers in a TRUE/FALSE objective test? Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe114


Sol :
EXAMPLE 13.15
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe109 Is the following data valid for a binomial distribution?
= 3 , S.D. = 5
Mean

EXAMPLE 13.10

Sol :

If the chance of running a bus service according to schedule
is 0.8, calculate the probability on a day schedule with 10 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe115
services :
(i) exactly one is late
(ii) atleast one is late EXAMPLE 13.16
Four candidates A, B , C and D are contesting an


Sol :
election. The probabilities that a voter will vote for A,
B , C and D respectively are 0.3, 0.1, 0.2 and 0.4. What
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe110 is the probability that out of 4 voters, three or more will
vote for B ?

EXAMPLE 13.11

Sol :

The sum and product of the mean and variance of a
binomial distribution are 24 and 128. Find the distribution. Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe116


Sol :
EXAMPLE 13.17
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe111 The probability is 0.6 that a new small appliance will
show a profit in its first year of production; 0.3 that it
will show a loss; and 0.1 that it will break even. Find
EXAMPLE 13.12
the probability that in a random sample of 5 new small
Suppose Amar and Bharat are two equally strong table
appliances produced last year :
tennis players. Which of the following two events is more
(i) no more than 3 will show a profit
probable :
(ii) at least 3 will show a profit
(i) Amar beats Bharat exactly in 3 games out of 4 or
(iii) exactly 3 will show a profit
(ii) Amar beats Bharat exactly in 5 games out of 8?


Sol :


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe117

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe112
chapter 13 Bionomial Distribution Page 147

EXAMPLE 13.18 1
4 . What is the probability of 4 success in 6 independent
Suppose that airplane engines operate independently in trials?
flight and fail with probability q = 15 . Assuming that a


Sol :
plane makes a safe flight if at least one-half of its engines
run, determine whether a 4-engine plane or a 2-engine
plane has the highest probability for a successful flight. Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe122


Sol :
EXAMPLE 13.23
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe118 For a binomial distribution, the mean is 5 and standard
deviation is 2. Obtain the p.m.f. of the distribution.
Hence, find the probability of a non-zero value of this
EXAMPLE 13.19 distribution.
Multiple choice test consists of eight questions and three


Sol :
answers to each question (of which only one is correct). If
a student answers each question by rolling a balanced dice
and marking the first answer if he gets 1 or 2, the second Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe123
answer if he gets 3 or 4 and the third answer if he gets 5
or 6, what is the probability that he will get exactly four
EXAMPLE 13.24
correct answers?
One-fourth of the female students entering Ramjas


Sol : College are out-of-state students. If the students are
assigned at random to the dormitories, 3 to a room, what
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe119 is the probability that in one room at most 2 of the 3 room
mates are out-of-state students?


Sol :
EXAMPLE 13.20
A test consists of five questions and to pass the test, a
student has to answer at least four questions correctly, Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe124
Each question has three possible answers, of which only
one is correct. If a student guesses on each question, what
EXAMPLE 13.25
is the probability that the student will pass the test?
A hotel has 5 rooms for rental and they are always


Sol : occupied. The owner has 3 television sets available on
the rental of < 100 per day per set. Only one set will
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe120 be supplied to one occupant, if he wants it. Probability
that an occupant will want to hire a set is 35 . Find the
probability that the hotel owner will get < 300 per day by
EXAMPLE 13.21 renting the sets.
In a shipment of 25 hard disks, six are defective. If five of


Sol :
the disks are selected at random, what is the probability
that
(i) exactly one is defective? Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe125
(ii) at least one is defective?


Sol : EXAMPLE 13.26
A random variable X is binomially distributed with mean
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe121 4 and standard deviation 2.4 . Find the probability that
more than half the trials are successes.


Sol :
EXAMPLE 13.22
Ratio of probability of 3 successes in 5 independent trials
to the probability of 2 successes in 5 independent trials is Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe126
Page 148 Bionomial Distribution chapter 13

EXAMPLE 13.27 EXAMPLE 13.32

It is observed that 80% of television viewers watch “Aap In 64 sets of 10 tosses of a coin, in how many cases one can
ki Adalat” programme. What is the probability that at expect 6 heads and 4 tails.
least 80% of the viewers in a random sample of five watch

Sol :
this programme?


Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe132

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe127

EXAMPLE 13.33
Eight coins are thrown simultaneously. Find the chance
EXAMPLE 13.28 of obtaining
In a binomial distribution consisting of 5 independent (i) At least 6 heads (ii) No heads
trials, probabilities of 1 and 2 success are 0.4096 and (ii) All heads
0.2048, respectively. Find the parameter p of the

Sol :
distribution.


Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe133

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe128

EXAMPLE 13.34
What is probability of getting 9 exactly twice in 3 throws
EXAMPLE 13.29 with a pair of fair dice.
The probability of a man hitting a target is 14 . How many

Sol :
times he fire so that the probability of his hitting the
target at least once is greater than 23 ?
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe134


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe129 EXAMPLE 13.35

The normal rate of infection of a certain disease in human
is known to be 75 % In on experiment with 6 human
EXAMPLE 13.30 injected with a new vaccine, it was observed that none of
How many tosses of a coin are needed, so that the the human caught infection. Find the probability of the
probability of getting at least head is 0.875? observed result if the vaccine was ineffective.


Sol :

Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe130 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe135

EXAMPLE 13.31 EXAMPLE 13.36

A company installs new air conditioners and found that The probability that a bomb dropped from a plane will
for 20% of all installations, a return visit is needed to strike the target is 51 . If 6 bombs are dropped, find the
explain the use of the remote control. Six installations probability that at least two will strike the target.
were made in a particular week. What is the probability

Sol :
that a return visit will be needed in at least two of these
cases?
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe136


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe131 EXAMPLE 13.37

It is known that screws produced by a certain company
will be defective with probability 0.02 independently of
chapter 13 Bionomial Distribution Page 149

each other. The company sells the screws in packages of 10 passing through a check point are from within the state.
and offers a money back guarantee that at most 1 of the What is probability that fewer than 4 of the next 9
10 screws is defective. What preparation of package sold vehicles are from out of state?
must the company replace?

Sol :


Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe142
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe137

EXAMPLE 13.43
EXAMPLE 13.38 Find the parameters of Binomial distribution whose mean
Out of 736 families with 5 children each, how many is 12 and variance 4.
families would you expect to have

Sol :
(i) 5 boys (ii) At least 1 boy


Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe143

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe138

EXAMPLE 13.44
The probability that a patient recovers from a delicate
EXAMPLE 13.39 heart operation is 0.9. What is the probability that exactly
Six dice are thrown together and the appearing of 4 on a 5 of the next 7 patients having this operation survive?
die is counted as a success. Find the probability that there

Sol :
will be 4 successes.


Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe144

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe139

EXAMPLE 13.45
A safety engineer claims that only 40 % of all workers
EXAMPLE 13.40 wear safety helmets when they eat lunch at the workplace.
Suppose that half of the population is non-vegetarian so Assuming that his claim is right. Find the probability
that the chance of an individual being a vegetarian is 21 that 4 of 6 workers randomly chosen will be wearing their
and assuming that 100 investigators take a sample of 10 helmets while having lunch at the workplace.
individuals to see whether they are vegetarians, how many

Sol :
investigators would you expect to report that 3 people or
less were vegetarians?
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe145


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe140 EXAMPLE 13.46

Twelve people are given two identical speakers to listen
for differences, if any. Suppose that these people answered
EXAMPLE 13.41 by guessing only. Find the probability that three people
Six dice are thrown 729 times. How many time do you claim to have heard a difference between the two speakers.
expect at least three dice to show a five or six?

Sol :


Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe146
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe141

EXAMPLE 13.47
EXAMPLE 13.42 If 10 % of the pens manufactured by the company are
A traffic control engineer reports that 75% of the vehicles defective, find the probability that a box of 12 pens contain
Page 150 Bionomial Distribution chapter 13

(i) No defective pen Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe151

(ii) At least two defective pen.


Sol : EXAMPLE 13.52
An electronics firm claims that the proportion of defective
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe147 units of a certain process is 5 %. A buyer has a standard
procedure of inspecting 15 units selected randomly from
a lot on a particular occasion, the buyer found 5 item
EXAMPLE 13.48 defective. What is the probability of this occurrence, given
The sum and product of the mean and variance of a that the claim of 5 % defective is correct.
Binomial distribution are 16 and 60 respectively. Find
the parameters of the Binomial distribution.

Sol :

Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe152

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe148

EXAMPLE 13.53
The chance that one of the 8 telephone lines is busy at
EXAMPLE 13.49 any instant is 0.2, what is the probability that at a certain
A company purchases a lot of a certain kind of electronic instant 4 lines are busy?
device. A method is used that rejects a lot if 2 or more
defective units are found in a random sample of 100 units.

Sol :
(i) What is the mean number of defective units found in
a sample of 100 units if the lot is 1 % defective? Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe153
(ii) What is variance?


Sol : EXAMPLE 13.54
A man takes a step forward with probability 0.4 and
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe149 backward with probability 0.6. Find the probability that
at the end of eleven steps he is one step away from the
starting point.
EXAMPLE 13.50
Homeland security and missile defence technology make

Sol :
it paramount that we become able to detect incoming
missiles. To make the defence successful, multiple radars are Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe154
required. Suppose it is determined that three independent
screens are to be operated and the probability that any
one screen will detect on incoming missile is 0.8.
(i) What is the probability that the missile will be

E X ERC I S E 13. 1
detected by only one screen.
(ii) What is probability that incoming missile will not be
detected by screens.
1. A brokerage survey reports that 30 percent of


Sol : individual investors have used a discount broker,
i.e. one which does not charge the full commission.
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/qe150 In a random sample of 9 individuals, what is the
probability that
(i) exactly two of the sampled individuals have used
EXAMPLE 13.51 a discount broker ?
A perfect cubical die is thrown a large number of times in (ii) not more than three have used a discount broker
sets of 8 . The occurrence of 5 or 6 is called a success. In (iii) at least three of them have used a discount broker
what proportion of the sets you expect three successes ? Ans : (i) 0.2656, (ii) 0.731, (iii) 0.537


Sol :
chapter 13 Bionomial Distribution Page 151

2. Sachin applies for a personal loan of ` 150000 from Ans : 729

a nationalized bank to repair his house. The bank 4096
informed him that over the years, it has received
about 2920 loan applications per year and that the
probability of approval was, on average, above 0.85. 7. The mean of a binomial distribution is 40 and standard
(i) Sachin wants to know the average and standard deviation 6. Calculate n , p and q .
deviation of the number of loans approved per Ans : n = 400 , p = 0.1, q = 0.9
year.
(ii) Suppose bank actually received 2654 loan
applications per year with an approval probability
of 0.82. What are the mean and standard deviation 8. The probability that an evening college student will
now? graduate is 0.4. Determine the probability that out of
Ans : (ii) 19.295, (ii) 19.792 5 students
(i) none,
(ii) one, and
(iii) at least one will graduate.
3. Suppose 10 percent of new scooters will require Ans : (a) 0.0777, (b) 0.2592, (c) 0.9223
warranty service within the first month of its sale.
A scooter manufacturing company sells 1000 scooters
in a month, find the mean and standard deviation of
scooters that require warranty service. 9. A multi-choice test consists of 8 questions with 3
Ans : 10 scooters (approx.) answers to each question (of which only one is correct).
A student answers each question by rolling a balanced
dice and selects the first answer if he gets 1 or 2, the
second if he gets 3 or 4, and the third answer if he
4. The incidence of occupational disease in an industry gets 5 or 6. To get a distribution, the student must
is such that the workers have 20 percent chance of secure at least 75 percent correct answers. If there is
suffering from it. What is the probability that out no negative marking, what is the probability that the
of six workers 4 or more will come in contact of the student secures a distinction?
disease? Ans : 0.019
Ans : 0.01695

10. A supposed coffee connoisseur claims that he can

5. A multiple-choice test contains 8 questions with 3 distinguish between a cup of instant coffee and a cup
answers to each question (of which only one is correct). of percolator coffee 75 percent of the time. It is agreed
A student answers each question by rolling a balanced that his claim will be accepted if he correctly identifies
dice and checking the first answer if he gets 1 or 2, the at least 5 out of 6 cups. Find
second answer if he gets 3 or 4, and the third answer if (i) his chance of having the claim accepted if he is in
he gets 5 or 6. To get a distinction, the student must fact only guessing, and
secure at least 75 percent correct answers. If there is (ii) his chance of having the claim rejected when he
no negative marking, what is the probability that the does have the ability he claims.
student secures a distinction? Ans : (i) 0.466, (ii) 0.534
Ans : 0.0196

******
6. The normal rate of infection of a certain disease in
animals is known to be 25 percent. In an experiment
with 6 animals injected with a new vaccine it was
observed that none of the animals caught the infection.
Calculate the probability of the observed result.
Page 152 Bionomial Distribution chapter 13
chapter 14 Piosson Distibtuion Page 153

CHAPTER 14

Piosson Distibtuion

14.1 intoduction Definition

Poisson distribution was derived in 1837 by a French A random variable X is said to follow a Poission
Mathematician Simeon D. Poison. If n is large, the distribution with parameter λ if it assumes only non-
evaluation of the binomial probabilities can involve negative values and its probability mass function is given
complex computations, in such a case, a simple by
approximation to the binomial probabilities could be use. −λ x
P (X = x) = e λ , x = 0, 1, 2 .....; λ 2 0
Such approximation of binomial when n is large and p is x!
close to zero is called the Poisson distribution.
where x is the number of occurrences of the event such
Let us consider the car sales of a car dealer showroom
that x = 0, 1, 2, 3
in a Delhi, on a given day. Do you think that the number of
cars sales on a given day will make for a random variable? Derivation of Mean and variance of Poission distribution
Assuming that each car sale is an independent event, 3

meaning that sale of one car sale gives no information

Mean E (X) = / xp (x, λ)
x=0
about when the next sale will happen. And the probability −λ x
= / xe λ
3

of one car sale in a given length of time, does not change x=0 x!
over time. Theoretically, the rate at which the car sales
= λe− λ ) / e λ o3
3 x−1

are occurring is not changing through time. Therefore, we

x = 1 (x − 1) !
can conclude that the events defined as car sales in such a
= λe− λ c1 + λ + λ + .....m
2

case are occurring randomly and independently. Based on

2!
these conditions, a random variable X , representing the = λe− λ e λ = λ

number of events in a given length of time has a Poisson
Variance (X) = E (X 2) − [E (X)] 2
distribution. 3
Here E (X 2) = / x 2p (x, λ)
x=0
3
= / x 2 p (x, λ)

14.2 Poisson distribution x=0

= / "x (x − 1) + x , p (x, λ)
3
A discrete probability distribution that expresses the
x=0
probability of a given number of events occurring over a
= / "x (x − 1) + x , e λ
3 −λ x
fixed period of time or space is called a Poisson distribution
x=0 x!
if: x x
= e− λ / x (x − 1) λ + / xe− λ λ
3 3
1 The events occur with a known constant mean rate
x=0 x! x = 0 x!
2. The events are independent of the time from the x−2
= λ2 e− λ / λ
3
occurrence of the previous event. +λ
x = 2 (x − 2) !
3. The rate of occurrence of events is constant and not
= λ2 e− λ e λ + λ = λ2 + λ

based on time
4. The probability of an event is proportional to the Variance (X) = E (X 2) − [E (X)] 2
length of the period of time = λ2 + λ − (λ) 2 = λ

The Poisson distribution can also be used for the
number of events in other specified intervals such as
distance, area or volume.
Page 154 Piosson Distibtuion chapter 14

14.3 As a limiting case of Bionomial were randomly selected from the population, what is the
Poisson distribution is a limiting case of binomial probability that not more than 5 of its clients are involved
distribution under the following conditions : in such an accident next year? (e−10 = 0.00045)
(i) n , the number of trials is indefinitely large i.e.

Sol :
n"3
(ii) p , the constant probability of success in each trial is Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/re103
very small, i.e. p " 0
(iii) np = λ is finite. Thus p = λ and q = 1 − b λ l where
n n
λ is a positive real number. EXAMPLE 14.4
If the probability that an individual suffers a bad reaction
from injection of a given serum is 0.001, determines the
probability that out of 2,000 individuals
14.4 Application of poisson distribution
(a) exactly 3 and
Poisson distribution occurs when there are events which (b) more than 2 individuals will suffer a bad reaction.
do not occur as a definite number on trials but an events


Sol :
occurs rarely and the following examples may be analysed:
(i) Number of bacteria in one cubic centimeter.
(ii) Number of printing mistakes per page in a text book Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/re104
(iii) The number of alpha particles emitted by a
radioactive substance in a fraction of a second.
(iv) Number of road accidents occurring at a particular EXAMPLE 14.5
interval of time per day. When counting red blood cells, a square grid is used, over
Number of lightnings per second. which a drop of blood is evenly distributed. Under the
microscope an average of 8 erythrocytes are observed
per single square. What is the probability that exactly 5
EXAMPLE 14.1 erythrocytes are found in one square?
In a Poisson distribution the first probability term is

Sol :
0.2725. Find the next probability term.


Sol : Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/re105

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/re101

EXAMPLE 14.6
Assuming one in 80 births is a case of twins, calculate the
EXAMPLE 14.2 probability of 2 or more sets of twins on a day when 30
In a book of 520 pages, 390 typo-graphical errors occur. births occur.
Assuming Poisson law for the number of errors per page,

Sol :
find the probability that a random sample of 5 pages will
contain no error.
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/re106


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/re102 EXAMPLE 14.7

If x is a Poisson variate and P ^0 h = P ^1 h = k , prove that
k = e −1 .
EXAMPLE 14.3

Sol :
An insurance company has discovered that only about
0.1 per cent of the population is involved in a certain
type of accident each year. If its 10,000 policy holders Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/re107
chapter 14 Piosson Distibtuion Page 155

EXAMPLE 14.8 EXAMPLE 14.13

If a Poisson distribution has P^X = 1h = P^X = 2h , then An oil exploration firm finds that 5% of the test wells it
prove that P ^1 h = 2e −2 drills, yield a deposit of natural gas. If the firm drills 6


Sol : wells, what is the probability that :
(i) exactly 2 wells?
(ii) at least one well yield gas?
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/re108


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/re113

EXAMPLE 14.9
Between the hours 2 pm and 4 pm, the average number
of phone calls per minute coming into the switch board of
a company is 2.35. Find the probability that during one EXAMPLE 14.14
particular minute, there will be at most two phone calls One hundred car radios are inspected as they come off
given e−2.35 = 0.095374 . the production line and number of defects per radio set is


Sol : recorded below.

No. of Defects 0 1 2 3
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/re109 No. of Radio sets 79 18 2 1
Estimate the average number of defects per ratio and
expected frequencies of 0, 1, 2 and 3 defects, assuming
EXAMPLE 14.10 Poisson distribution.
For a Poisson variate X , calculate P ^X 2 0h , if it is


Sol :
known that
4P ^X = 4h = 5P ^X = 5h
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/re114


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/re110 EXAMPLE 14.15

Air corporation having had just 2 aircrashes during
its first fifty years of existence wants to make the next
EXAMPLE 14.11 decade “aircrash-free”. Assuming that the same trend
Assuming that on an average 1% of the output in a factory will continue, what is the probability of the corporation
making certain part of an article are defective and that meeting the target?
200 units are in a package, find the probabilities that

Sol :
(i) At most 2 defectives
(ii) At least 2 defectives may be found in the package.
^e−2 = 0.1353h Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/re115

Sol :

EXAMPLE 14.16
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/re111 A radioactive source emits on an average 2.5 particles per
second. Calculate the probability that 2 or more particles
will be emitted in an interval of 4 seconds.
EXAMPLE 14.12

Sol :
If the expectation of a Poisson variable is 1, then find
P ^X 2 1h .
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/re116


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/re112

Page 156 Piosson Distibtuion chapter 14

EXAMPLE 14.17 Calculate the proportion of days on which neither car is

The number of deaths per day in a city due to road used and the proportion of days on which some demand is
accidents and due to other causes independently follows refused. ^e−1.5 = 0.2231h .
Poisson distribution with parameter 2 and 6 respectively.


Sol :
Find the probability that the total number of death on a
particular day is 2 or fewer.
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/re121


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/re117

EXAMPLE 14.22
A manufacturer of pins knows that on an average 5% of
his product is defective. He sells pins in boxes of 100 and
EXAMPLE 14.18 guarantees that not more that 4 pins will be defective.
If X is a Poisson variable such that What is probability that a box will meet the guaranteed
P ^X = 2h = 9P ^X = 4h + 90P ^X = 6h quality? (e−5 = 0.0067 )
find the mean and variance of X .

Sol :


Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/re122
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/re118

EXAMPLE 14.23
EXAMPLE 14.19 The number of accidents in a year attributed to taxi
A discrete random variate x follows Poisson law. Find driver in a city follows Poisson distribution with mean 3.
P ^X 2 2h and P ^X is at most 2h , if it is given that Out of 1,000 taxi drivers, find approximately the number
E ^X h = 2.5 and e−2.5 = 0.0821. of drivers with
(i) no accident in a year and


Sol : (ii) more than 3 accidents in a year (given e−1 = 0.3670 ,
e−2 = 0.1353 , e−3 = 0.0498 ).
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/re119

Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/re123

EXAMPLE 14.20
RGV Electrical India Pvt Ltd make electrical transformer.
Past sale records indicate a mean of daily sales for a
certain type of transformer is equal to 5 units. Demand EXAMPLE 14.24
for this item is distributed to a poison distribution. If If 5% students appearing in an examination fail, using
company is having only 3 transformers in stock, what Poisson distribution, find the probability that out of 100
is the probability that the demand will be greater than students appearing in the examination :
stock? ^e−5 = 0.00674h (i) none failed
(ii) 5 students failed


Sol : (iii) maximum 3 failed or atmost 3 failed


Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/re120

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/re124

EXAMPLE 14.21
A car hire firm has two cars, which it hires out day
by day. the number of demands for a car on each day EXAMPLE 14.25
is distributed as a Poisson distribution with mean 1.5. A firm produces articles out of which 0.1 % are usually
defective. They pack them in box containing 500 articles.
chapter 14 Piosson Distibtuion Page 157

If a wholesaler purchases 200 such cases. Find throughout its 100 pages. What is the probability that a
(i) How many boxes are expected to be free of defective page observed at random contains at least two misprints.
items? (Using Poisson distribution).
(ii) How many are expected to have one defective each?

Sol :


Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/re130
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/re125

EXAMPLE 14.31
Messages arrive at a switch board in a Poisson manner at
an average rate of six per hour. Find the probability for
EXAMPLE 14.26 each of the following events.
(i) At least three messages arrive within one hour.
In a Poisson distribution, the probability P _ x i for x = 0
(ii) Exactly two messages arrive with in one hour.
is 10 percent. Find the mean of the distribution.
(iii) No message arrives with in one hour.


Sol :


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/re126

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/re131

EXAMPLE 14.27
EXAMPLE 14.32
It is 1 in 1000 that a birth is a case of twins. If there
A source of liquid is known to contain bacteria with the
are 100 births in town in 1 day, then what is probability
mean number of bacteria per cubic centimeter equal to 3.
that two or more pairs of twins are born? (Using Poisson
Ten 1 cc test tubes are filled with liquid. Assuming that
distribution).
Poisson distribution is applicable, find the probability


Sol : that all ten test tubes will show growth, i.e. contain at
least one bacteria each.
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/re127

Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/re132

EXAMPLE 14.28
Show that Poisson distribution is a limiting case of
binomial distribution.
EXAMPLE 14.33


Sol : In a certain Poisson frequency distribution, the frequency
corresponding to 2 successes is half the frequency
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/re128 corresponding to 3 successes. Find its mean and standard
deviation.


Sol :
EXAMPLE 14.29


Sol : Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/re133

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/re129

EXAMPLE 14.34
On average a certain intersection result in 3 traffic
accidents per month. What is the probability that for any
EXAMPLE 14.30
given month at this intersection.
A book contains 100 misprints distributed randomly
(i) exactly 5 accidents will occur?
Page 158 Piosson Distibtuion chapter 14

(ii) Less than 3 accidents will occur? Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/re138

(iii) At least 2 accidents will occur?


Sol :
EXAMPLE 14.39
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/re134 The Quality Control Manager finds that the average
number of defective parts coming out in a production
cycle is 5. Find the probability that :
(i) 5 or less number of parts are defective in a production
EXAMPLE 14.35 cycle.
Suppose on an average 1 house in 1000 in a certain district (ii) Exactly 5 parts are defective in a production cycle.
has a fire during a year. If there are 2000 houses in that (iii) More than 4 parts are defective in a production cycle.
district, what is the probability that exactly five houses
will have a fire during the year?

Sol :

Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/re139

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/re135

EXAMPLE 14.40
HDFC Bank Manager found that 3 customers arrive on an
EXAMPLE 14.36 the average in every 5 minutes in a savings bank counter.
Service calls come to a maintenance centre according to Assume, that the customers arrive at random :
a Poisson process and on the average, 2.7 calls come per (i) Find the probability that 5 customers arrive in a
minute. Find the probability that no more then 4 calls 5-minutes interval.
come in any minute. (ii) The Manager wants to add one more counter for


Sol : SB customer if the probability that more than 5
customers arrive in a 5-minute interval exceeds 0.2.
Will the Manager add one more counter?
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/re136
(iii) Do subdivisions (i) and (ii) for a 10-minute interval.


Sol :
EXAMPLE 14.37
If the probability of a bad reaction from a certain injection Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/re140
is 0.001, determine the chance that out of 2000 individuals
more than two will get a bad reaction.


Sol : EXAMPLE 14.41
A data entry operator is entrusted with the job of entering
the marks provided by examiners in the computer system.
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/re137
The probability of error in data entry is only 0.001.
A sample of 1000 marks is drawn for checking by the
examination centre. Find the probability that :
EXAMPLE 14.38 (i) There are only 3 errors.
One fifth percent of the blades produced by a blade (ii) There are no errors.
manufacturing factory turn out to be defective. The blades (iii) There number of errors is 4 or more.
are supplied in packets of 10. Use Poisson distribution


Sol :
to calculate the approximate number of packets
containing no defective, one defective and two defective
blades respectively in a consignment of 1,00,000 packets Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/re141
(e−0.02 = .9802).


Sol :
chapter 14 Piosson Distibtuion Page 159

EXAMPLE 14.42 developing mathematical inconsistencies. The marketing

A large private sector bank has given a toll-free phone VP is planning on randomly selecting a group of calculators
number which is available to the customers to register their for this demonstration and is worried about the chances of
complaints regarding the service provided by its branches. selecting a calculator that could start malfunctioning. He
It is found that 48 calls are received by the toll-free phone believes that whether or not a calculator malfunctions is a
in one hour on the average. Assuming the number of calls Bernoulli process, and he is convinced that the probability
follow a Poisson distribution, find the probability that : of a malfunction is really about 0.04.
(i) no calls will be received in a 1- minute period. (i) Assuming that the VP selects exactly 150 calculators
(ii) 2 or more calls will be received in a 1-minute period. to use in the demonstration, and using the Poisson
(iii) no call will be received in a 2-minute period. distribution as an approximation of the binomial,
(iv) 4 or more calls will be received in a 2-minute period. what is the chance of getting at least three calculators


Sol : ] that malfunction?
(ii) No calculators malfunctioning?

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/re142

Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/re145

EXAMPLE 14.43
The station master of Jaipur Junction knows from his past
experience that only 4% of the trains arrive late at Jaipur EXAMPLE 14.46
Junction. On any day 60 trains arrive at the junction and Nitin Yadav, production supervisor for the JBC Company’s
the station master claims that not more than 5% of the Faridabad, is worried about an elderly employee’s ability
trains arrive late at Jaipur Junction. Is his claim justified? to keep up the minimum work pace. In addition to the


Sol : normal daily breaks, this employee stops for short rest
periods an average of 5 times per hour. The rest period is
a fairly consistent 2 minutes each time. Nitin Yadav has
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/re143 decided that if the probability of the employee resting for
10 minutes (not including normal breaks) or more per
hour is greater than 0.5, he will move the employee to a
EXAMPLE 14.44 different job. Should he do so?
On average, five birds hit the Staute of Unity and are

Sol :
killed each week. RK Agrawal, an official of the managing
authority, has requested that government allocate funds
for equipment to scare birds away from the monument. Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/re146
Government subcommittee has replied that funds cannot
be allocated unless the probability of more than three
birds being killed in week exceeds 0.7. Will the funds be
allocated?


Sol : E X ERC I S E 14. 1
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/re144 1. What probability model is appropriate to describe
a situation where 100 misprints are distributed
randomly throughout the 100 pages of a book? For this
model, what is the probability that a page observed at
EXAMPLE 14.45 random will contain at least three misprints?
Casio Electronics has developed a new calculator that Ans : 0.0802
performs a series of functions not yet performed by any
other calculator. The marketing department is planning
to demonstrate this calculator to a group of potential
customers, but it is worried about some initial problems,
which have resulted in 4 percent of the new calculators 2. A new automated production process has had an
Page 160 Piosson Distibtuion chapter 14

average of 1.5 breakdowns per day. Because of the 7. It is given that 30 percent of electric bulbs
cost associated with a breakdown, management is manufactured by a company are defective. Find the
concerned about the possibility of having three or more probability that a sample of 100 bulbs will contain (i)
breakdowns during a day. Assume that breakdowns no defective, and (ii) exactly one defective.
occur randomly, that the probability of a breakdown Ans : 0.15
is the same for any two time intervals of equal length,
and that breakdowns in one period are independent of
breakdowns in other periods. What is the probability
of having three or more breakdowns during a day?
8. A factory produces blades in packets of 10. The
Ans : 0.1912
probability of a blade to be defective is 0.2 percent.
Find the number of packets having two defective
blades in a consignment of 10000 packets.
Ans : 2
3. Suppose a life insurance company insures the lives of
5000 persons aged 42. If studies show the probability
that any 42-years old person will die in a given year
to be 0.001, find the probability that the company will
9. A firm uses a large fleet of delivery vehicles. Their
have to pay at least two claims during a given year.
record over a period of time (during which fleet size
Ans : 0.9598
utilization may be assumed to have remained suitably
constant) shows that the average number of vehicles
unserviceable per day is 3. Estimate the probability
on a given day when
4. A manufacturer who produces medicine bottles, finds (i) all vehicles will be serviceable.
that 0.1 percent of the bottles are defective. The (ii) more than 2 vehicles will be unserviceable.
bottles are packed in boxes containing 500 bottles. A Ans : (i) 0.0497, (ii) 0.5776
drug manufacturer buys 100 boxes from the producer
of bottles. Using Poisson distribution, find how many
boxes will contain:
(i) no defectives
10. In the past 2 months, on an average, only 3 percent
(ii) at least two defectives
of all cheques sent for clearance by a Group Housing
Ans : (i) 0.6065, (ii) 10 (approx.)
Welfare Society (GHWS) have bounced. This month,
the GHWS received 200 cheques. What is the
probability that exactly ten of these cheques bounced?
Ans : 0.0413
5. In a town 10 accidents took place in a span of 50
days. Assuming that the number of accidents per day
follows the Poisson distribution, find the probability
that there will be three or more accidents in a day.
Ans : 0.002

6. Find the probability that at most 5 defective bolts

will be found in a box of 200 bolts if it is known that 2
percent of such bolts are expected to be defective [you
may take the distribution to be Poisson; [e−4 = 0.0183
].
Ans : 0.7844
chapter 15 Normal Distributions Page 161

CHAPTER 15

Normal Distributions

15.1 Introduction and heights.

The binomial and Poisson distributions discussed in
the previous chapters are the most useful theoretical
distributions for discrete variables. In order to have
15.3 Properties of Normal distribution
mathematical distributions suitable for dealing with
quantities whose magnitudes vary continuously like The normal probability curve with mean µ and standard
weight, heights of individual, a continuous distribution deviation σ has the following properties :
is needed. Normal distribution is one of the most widely (ii) Mean, median and mode of the distribution are
used continuous distribution. exactly same.
Normal distribution is the most important and (i) The curve is bell- shaped and symmetrical about the
powerful of all the distribution in statistics. It was first line x = µ
introduced by De Moivre in 1733 in the development of (vi) The curve of a normal distribution has a single peak
probability. Laplace (1749-1827) and Gauss (1827-1855) i.e. it is a unimodal.
were also associated with the development of Normal (iii) x - axis is an asymptote to the curve. (tails of the
distribution. curve never touches the horizontal (x) axis).
(iv) No portion of the curve lies below the x -axis as f (x)
being the probability function can never be negative.
(vii) As x increases numerically, f (x) decreases rapidly,
15.2 Definition the maximum probability occurring at the point
A random variable X is said follow a normal distribution x = µ.
with parameters mean µ and σ2 , if its probability density (viii) The total area under the normal curve is equal to
function is given by unity and the percentage distribution of area under
) 2 σ 3
1 exp − 1 d x − µ n (1)
2
the normal curve is given below
f (x) =
σ 2π (a) About 68.27% of the area falls between µ − σ
where f (x) > 0, 6x ! (− 3, 3), µ ! (- 3, 3) and µ + σ ,
When a random variable can take on any value P (µ − σ 1 X 1 µ + σ) = 0.6826
within a given range where the probability distribution
is continuous, it is called a normal distribution or (b) About 95.5% of the area falls between µ − 2σ
Gaussian distribution. A random variable with a Gaussian and µ + 2σ ,
distribution is said to be normally distributed, and is P (µ − 2σ 1 X 1 µ + 2σ) = 0.9544
called a normal deviate.
In the normal distribution function given by (c) About 99.7% of the area falls between µ − 3σ
equation (1), the curve known as probability curve is and µ + 3σ ,
bellshaped with one peak point. P (µ − 3σ 1 X 1 µ + 3σ) = 0.9973
The normal distribution is used in the cases where
we need to make inferences by taking random samples;
and distribution of random variable is not known. This
type of distribution is applied to fit the actual observed 15.4 Standard Normal Distribution
frequency distribution on many phenomena like weights The standard normal distribution, also called the z
Page 162 Normal Distributions chapter 15

-distribution, is a special normal distribution where the (iii) Find the z -score of data point 24
mean is 0 and the standard deviation is 1. Any normal (iv) Data point if its z -score is 2
distribution can be standardized by converting its values (v) Data point if its z -score is - 2
into z -scores.

Sol :
z score
x−µ Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/se102
z score z = σ
This z -scores tell you how many standard deviations
from the mean each value lies. Converting a normal
distribution into a z-distribution allows to calculate the EXAMPLE 15.3
probability of certain values occurring and to compare In a CBSE school exam, scores of 300 student of class XII
different data sets. are recorded at the end of the session. The average score
for the batch was 700 and the standard deviation was
15.4.1 Properties of Standard Normal distribution calculated to be 180.
(i) Taniya scored 800 marks in total out of 1000. Find
(i) The area under the standard normal curve is equal to
out how has Taniya scored compared to his batch
1.
mates in the whole district.
(ii) 68.26% of the area under the standard normal curve
(ii) Lavanya scored 420 marks in the same batch. What
lies between z =− 1 and Z = 1
can you say about her performance as compared to
(iii) 95.44% of the area lies between Z =− 2 and Z = 2
the batch of 300 students?
(iv) 99.74% of the area lies between Z =− 3 and Z = 3
(iii) How much has Varsha scored if he has done better
15.4.2 As a Limiting Case of Binomial than 44.83% of his batchmates?
Normal distribution is a limiting case of binomial

Sol :
distribution under the following conditions :
(i) n , the number of trials is infinitely large, i.e. n " 3 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/se103
(ii) neither p (nor q) is very small,
The normal distribution of a variable when
represented graphically, takes the shape of a symmetrical
EXAMPLE 15.4
curve, known as the Normal Curve. The curve is asymptotic
Find the following probabilities for the standard normal
to x -axis on its either side.
distribution :
(i) P (0 # Z # 1) (ii) P (Z $- 2)

EXAMPLE 15.1

Sol :

Given that mean of a normal variate X is 12 and standard
deviation is 4, then find: Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/se104
(i) Find the z -score of data point 20
(ii) Find the z -score of data point 8
(iii) Data point if its z -score is 5
(iv) Data point if its z -score is - 2 EXAMPLE 15.5
Find the following probabilities for the standard normal


Sol : distribution :
(i) P (- 2 # Z # 1) (ii) P (Z $ 2.5)
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/se101


Sol :

EXAMPLE 15.2 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/se105

Given that mean of a normal variate X is 30 and standard
deviation is 6, then find:
(i) Find the z -score of data point 48 EXAMPLE 15.6
(ii) Find the z -score of data point 30 Find the following probabilities for the standard normal
chapter 15 Normal Distributions Page 163

distribution : (ii) To the right of Z =− 0.65

(i) P (Z #- 2.5) (ii) P (- 2 $ Z or Z $ 2.5)

Sol :


Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/se111
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/se106

EXAMPLE 15.12
EXAMPLE 15.7 If X follows a normal distribution with mean 12 and
If a continuous random variable follows a normal variance 16, find P ^X $ 20h .
distribution with mean 6.5 and standard deviation 2, find:

Sol :
(i) P (3 # X # 9) (ii) P (X # 9)

Sol : Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/se112

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/se107

EXAMPLE 15.13
For a normal distribution with mean 28 and variance 100,
what value of z corresponds to x = 30 ?
EXAMPLE 15.8
If a continuous random variable follows a normal

Sol :
distribution with mean 6.5 and standard deviation 2, find:
(i) P (X $ 3) (iv) P (4 1 X 1 6) Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/se113


Sol :

EXAMPLE 15.14
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/se108
If X be a normal variate with mean 3 and variance 16,
find the value of t such that P ^3 # X # t h = 0.4772 .


Sol :
EXAMPLE 15.9
If a continuous random variable follows a normal
distribution with mean 6.5 and standard deviation 2, find: Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/se114
(i) P (7 # X # 9) (ii) P (X 1 2 or X $ 8)


Sol :
EXAMPLE 15.15
The average daily sale of 550 branch offices was < 150
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/se109
thousand and standard deviation is < 15 thousand.
Assuming the distribution to be normal, indicate how
many branches have sales between
EXAMPLE 15.10 (i) < 1, 25, 000 and < 1, 45, 000
If X is a normal variate with mean 30 and SD 5. Find the
(ii) < 1, 40, 000 and < 1, 60, 000
probabilities that (i) 26 # X # 40 , (ii) X 2 45


Sol :


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/se115

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/se110

EXAMPLE 15.16
EXAMPLE 15.11
Assume the mean height of children to be 69.25 cm with
Find the area under the standard normal curve, which lies
a variance of 10.8 cm. How many children in a school of
(i) To the left of Z = 0.94
Page 164 Normal Distributions chapter 15

1,200 would you expect to be over 74 cm tall? Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/se120

Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/se116 EXAMPLE 15.21

A sample of 125 dry battery cells tested to find the length
of life produced the following results with mean 12 and SD
3 hours. Assuming that the data to be normal distributed,
EXAMPLE 15.17 what percentage of battery cells are expected to have life
The marks obtained in a certain exam follow normal (i) More than 13 hours
distribution with mean 45 and SD 10. If 1,300 students (ii) Less than 5 hours
appeared at the examination, calculate the number of (iii) Between 9 and 14 hours
students scoring
(i) less than 35 marks and

Sol :
(ii) more than 65 marks.


Sol : Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/se121

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/se117

EXAMPLE 15.22
Weights of fish caught by a traveller are approximately
normally distributed with a mean weight of 2.25 kg and
EXAMPLE 15.18 a standard deviation of 0.25 kg. What percentage of fish
900 light bulbs with a mean life of 125 days are installed in weigh less than 2 kg?
a new factory. Their length of life is normally distributed
with a standard deviation of 18 days. What is the expected

Sol :
number of bulbs expire in in less than 95 days.


Sol : Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/se122

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/se118

EXAMPLE 15.23
The average daily procurement of milk by village society
in 800 litres with a standard deviation of 100 litres. Find
EXAMPLE 15.19 out proportion of societies procuring milk between 800
Assume that the mean height of soldiers is 69.25 inches litres to 1000 litres per day. Assume normal distribution.
with a variance of 9.8 inches. How many soldiers in a
regiment of 6,000 would you expect to be over 6 feet tall?

Sol :

Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/se123

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/se119

EXAMPLE 15.24
Assume the mean height of students in an exactly normal
EXAMPLE 15.20 distribution to be 170 cm. with a variance of 27 cm. How
A bank manager has observed that the length of time the many students in a college of 1,000 students would you
customers have to wait for being attended by the teller expect to be over 183 cm tall?
is normally distributed with mean time of 5 minutes and
standard deviation of 0.7 minutes. Find the probability

Sol :
that a customer has to wait
(i) For less than 6 minutes Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/se124
(ii) Between 3.5 and 6.5 minutes


Sol :
chapter 15 Normal Distributions Page 165

EXAMPLE 15.25 hours and a standard deviation 0.1 hour. If “Normal

East-West Airlines has the policy of employing only Indian time work” finishes at 6.00 p.m. and a job is started at
women whose height is between 157 cm and 183 cm. If 4.00 p.m., what is the probability that the job will need
the height of Indian women is approximately normally overtime payments?
distributed with a mean of 163 cm and a standard


Sol :
deviation of 8 cm, out of the 1,000 applications received,
find the number of applicants that would be
(i) too tall Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/se129
(ii) too short
(iii) of acceptable height.


Sol : EXAMPLE 15.30
A batch of 5,000 electric lamps has a mean life of 1,000
hours and a standard deviation of 75 hours. Assume a
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/se125
normal distribution :
(i) How many lamps will fail before 900 hours?
(ii) How many lamps will fail between 950 and 1,000
EXAMPLE 15.26 hours?
The wage distribution of the workers in a factory is normal (iii) What proportion of lamps will fail before 925 hours?
with mean < 4000 and standard deviation < 500. If the (iv) Given the same mean life, what would the standard
wages of 40 workers be less than < 3500, what is the total deviation have to be to ensure that no more than
number of workers in the factory? 20% of lamps fail before 916 hours?


Sol :

Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/se126 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/se130

EXAMPLE 15.27 EXAMPLE 15.31

The mean of a normal distribution is 50 and 5% of the In a sample of 240 workers in a factory the mean and
values are greater than 60. Find the standard deviation of standard deviation of wages were < 113.50 and < 30.30
the distribution. respectively. Find the percentage of workers. getting wages


Sol : between < 90 and < 170 in the whole factory assuming
that the wages are normally distributed.

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/se127

Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/se131

EXAMPLE 15.28
A workshop produces 2000 units per day. The average
weight of units is 130 kg with a S.D. of 10 kg. Assuming EXAMPLE 15.32
normal distribution, how many units are expected to A project yields an average cash-flow of < 550 lakhs and
weigh less than 142 kg? standard deviation cash flow of < 110. Calculate the


Sol : following probabilities assuming the normal distribution:
(i) Cash flow will be more than < 675 lakhs.
(ii) Cash flow will be less than < 450 lakhs.
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/se128 (iii) Cash flow will be between < 425 lakhs and < 750
lakhs.


Sol :
EXAMPLE 15.29
The time taken to complete a particular type of job is
distributed approximately normal with a mean of 1.8 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/se132
Page 166 Normal Distributions chapter 15

EXAMPLE 15.33 EXAMPLE 15.37

A random variable X having a normal distribution with The average grade for an exam is 74 and the standard
µ = 50 and σ = 10 , find the probability that X assumes deviation is 7. If 12 % of the class is given A’s and the
a value between 45 and 62. grades are curved to follow a normal distribution, what is


Sol : the lowest possible A and the highest possible B?


Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/se133
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/se137

EXAMPLE 15.34
The local authorities in certain city installed 10000 electric EXAMPLE 15.38
lamps on the roads of the city. The lamps have an average The mean length of steel bars produced by a company is
life of 1000 burning hours with a standard deviation of 200 10 m with standard deviation 20 cm. A man purchased
hours. Assume that the lives of the lamps are normally 5000 bars. How many of these bars are expected to be
distributed. shorter than 9.75 m in length? Assume that the length of
(i) What number of lamps might be expected to fail in steel bars normally distributed.
the first 800 burning hours?

Sol :
(ii) What number of lamps might be expected to fail in
between 800 and 1200 burning hours?
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/se138


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/se134 EXAMPLE 15.39

A juice machine is regulated so that it discharges an
average of 200 ml per cup. If amount of drink is normally
EXAMPLE 15.35 distributed with a standard deviation equal to 15 ml.
If the heights of 300 students are normally distributed (i) What fraction of the cups will contain more than 224
with mean 64.5 inches and standard deviation 3.3 inches, millilitres?
how many students have height (ii) What is the probability that a cup contains between
(i) Less than 5 feet, i.e., 60 inches; 191 and 209 millilitres?
(ii) Between 5 feet and 5 feet 9 inches; i.e 60 inch and 69 (iii) How many cups will probably overflow, if 230
inch millilitre cups are used for the next 1000 drinks?


Sol :

Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/se135 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/se139

EXAMPLE 15.36 EXAMPLE 15.40

The distribution of weekly wages for 500 workers in a The IQ’s of 600 applicants of a certain college are
factory is approximately normal with the mean and approximately normally distributed with a mean of 115
standard deviation of Rs 75 and Rs 15 respectively. Find and a standard deviation of 12. If the college requires an IQ
the number of workers who receive weekly wages of at least 95, how many of these students will be rejected
(i) More than Rs 90 (ii) Less than Rs 45. on this basis regardless of their other qualifications?


Sol :

Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/se136 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/se140

chapter 15 Normal Distributions Page 167

EXAMPLE 15.41 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/se143

A coin is tossed 400 times. Use the normal curve
approximation to find the probability of obtaining less
than 176 or more than 227 heads.
EXAMPLE 15.44


Sol : The owner of a theatre plans to construct another theatre
in the same city. From his experience with his existing
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/se141 theatre he knows that the number of persons who come
to his theatre in any show is normally distributed with a
mean of 850 and a standard deviation of 200. He wants
to have sufficient number of seats in the proposed theatre
EXAMPLE 15.42
so that not more than 5% of the people who come to his
A dalal dtreet analyst estimates that the annual return
proposed theatre will not get a ticket. At the same time
from the stock of Mega Pharma can be considered to be an
he wants to minimise his loss due to vacant seats in the
observation from a normal distribution with mean µ = 8
proposed theatre. How many seats should he have in the
and standard deviation σ = 1.5 . The analyst’s investment
proposed theatre so that both of his conflicting objectives
choices are based upon the considerations that any return
are met with?
greater than 5% is satisfactory and a return greater than
10% is excellent.

Sol :
(i) Find the probability that Mega Pharma’s stock will
prove to be unsatisfactory ? Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/se144
(ii) Find the probability that Mega Pharma’s stock will
prove to be excellent ?


Sol : EXAMPLE 15.45
The manager of a TV showroom orders 100 TVs per
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/se142 month. He is unable to fulfil the entire demand in one
month out of 4 months on the average. He estimates the
average monthly demand to be 90 TVs. Assume that
demand for TVs follows a normal distribution.
EXAMPLE 15.43
(i) Find the standard deviation of the distribution of
A software company is recruiting fresh engineering
demand.
graduates during the placement season and training for
(ii) How many TVs should be order per month if he
providing skills for undertaking projects independently
wants the probability of running out of stock to be
by themselves. The training period for the trainees varies
at most 0.1.
due to their varied educational background and eagerness
to learn the nuances of programming. From historical

Sol :
data, the company finds that the time of completion of
the training programme has an average of 4 months and Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/se145
variance of 2.25 months.
(i) What is the probability that a randomly selected
graduate completes the training programme within
EXAMPLE 15.46
4 months, 5 months and 6 months?
Beta Engineering Company requires ball bearings for
(ii) Find the probability that the completion time for
its machine and orders them from an ancillary unit.
a randomly selected graduate varies from 3 to 5
The required diameter is 3 cm. but Gamma Engineering
months.
Company can manage with ball bearings of diameter
(iii) If the company has recruited 800 graduates in this
3 ! 0.02 cm . The diameters of ball bearings manufactured
year, find the number of graduates who complete
by the ancillary unit follows a normal distribution with
the training within 2 months or takes more than 5
mean of 3 cm and standard deviation of 0.03 cm. What
months?
is the probability that the ball bearings will satisfy the


Sol : specification prescribed by Gamma Engineering Company.
If the ancillary unit improves its process so that the
Page 168 Normal Distributions chapter 15

standard deviation reduces to 0.01, find the probability Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/se149
that the ball bearings satisfies the specifications.


Sol :
EXAMPLE 15.50
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/se146 The average number of hours a person works per 5-day
week in a software company is 44. Also, 12% of the works
work for more than 48 hours. Assume that the number of
hours of work follows a normal distribution.
EXAMPLE 15.47 (i) Find the standard deviation of the distribution.
The Novelty Store is getting conflicting estimates for its (ii) What percentage of workers work for less than 40
sales in the next quarter from two agencies. Estimate I hours?
claims that the quarterly sales in lakhs of rupees will be
normally distributed with µ = 400 and σ = 50 . Estimate

Sol :
II claims that the sales in lakhs of rupees will be normally
distributed with µ = 350 and σ = 50 . The owner of the Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/se150
store is unable to decide which estimate is accurate and
assigns equal probability for both of them.
(i) Assuming that estimate I is accurate, find the
probability that the quarter sales exceed < 350 lakhs.

E X ERC I S E 15. 1
(ii) Assuming that the estimate II is accurate, find
the probability that the quarterly sales exceed
< 350 lakhs .
1. 1000 light bulbs with a mean life of 120 days are


Sol : installed in a new factory and their length of life is
normally distributed with standard deviation of 20
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/se147 days.
(a) How many bulbs will expire in less than 90 days?
(b) If it is decided to replace all the bulbs together,
what interval should be allowed between
EXAMPLE 15.48
replacements if not more than 10% should expire
From past records, a business school knows that 10% of
before replacement?
their students get placements in MNCs. In the current
Ans : (a) 67, (b) 94
year, the business school has 400 students. Find the
probability that :
(i) 35 to 45 students get placement in MNCs
(ii) less than 30 students get placement in MNCs
(iii) more than 48 students get placement in MNCs 2. The lifetimes of certain kinds of electronic devices


Sol : have a mean of 300 hours and standard deviation
of 25 hours. Assuming that the distribution of these
lifetimes, which are measured to the nearest hour, can
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/se148 be approximated closely with a normal curve
(i) Find the probability that any one of these
electronic devices will have a lifetime of more
EXAMPLE 15.49 than 350 hours.
A business school wants to admit only top 2% of the (ii) What percentage will have lifetimes of 300 hours
students who were called for interview and GD. It is or less?
found that the marks in the interview follow a normal (iii) What percentage will have lifetimes from 220 or
distribution with a mean of 70 and standard deviation of 260 hours?
12. What mark should a student get in interview so that Ans : (i) 0.0228, (ii) 50%, (ii) 5.41
he gets admission in MBA?


Sol :
chapter 15 Normal Distributions Page 169

3. Assume that the test scores from a college admissions 7. A workshop produces 2000 units of an item per day.
test are normally distributed with a mean of 450 and The average weight of units is 130 kg with a standard
a standard deviation of 100. deviation of 10 kg. Assuming normal distribution, how
(i) What percentage of people taking the test score many units are expected to weigh less than 142 kg ?
are between 400 and 500 ? Ans : 1770
(ii) Suppose someone received a score of 630. What
percentage of the people taking the test score
better? What percentage score worse?
(iii) If a particular university will not admit any
8. A wholesale distributor of fertilizer products finds
one scoring below 480, what percentage of the
that the annual demand for one type of fertilizer
persons taking the test would be acceptable to
is normally distributed with a mean of 120 kg and
the university?
standard deviation of 16 kg. If he orders only once a
Ans : (i) 38.30, (ii) 3.59, (iii) 61.79
year, what quantity should be ordered to ensure that
there is only a 5 percent chance of running short?
Ans : 146.24 kg

4. The results of particular examination are given below

in a summary form:
Result % of Candidates 9. The annual commissions per salesperson employed by
Passed with distinction 10 a pharmaceutical company, which is a manufacturer
of cough syrup, averaged ` 40000, with a standard
Passed without distinction 60
deviation of ` 5000. What percent of the salespersons
Failed 30 earn between ` 32000 and ` 42000 ?
It is known that a candidate fails in the examination Ans : 60%
if he obtains less than 40 marks (out of 100) while
he must obtain at least 75 marks in order to pass
with distinction. Determine the mean and standard
deviation of the distribution of marks, assuming this
to be normal. 10. In a normal distribution 31 percent of the items are
Ans : µ = 50.17 , σ = 19.4 under 45 and 8 percent are over 64. Find the mean
and standard deviation of the distribution.
Ans : 50 and 10

5. Assume the mean height of soldiers to be 68.22 inches

with a variance of 10.8 inches. How many soldiers in
a regiment of 1000 would you expect to be over six
feet tall?
Ans : 125

6. The income of a group of 10000 persons was found to

be normally distributed with mean = ` 750 p.m. and
standard deviation = ` 50. Show that in this group
about 95 percent had income exceeding ` 668 and
only 5 percent had income exceeding ` 832. What was
the lowest income among the richest 100?
Ans : ` 866.50
Page 170 Index Number chapter 16

CHAPTER 16

Index Number

16.1 Introduction over a period of time in relation to its value at some fixed
Index numbers are commonly used statistical indicators point in time, called the base period. This resulting ratio
for measuring the combined fluctuations in a group of of the current value to a base value is multiplied by 100 to
related variables. Generally used to indicated the state of express the index as a percentage.
the economy, index numbers are aptly called ‘barometers of Current period value
i.e., Index number = 100
economic activity’. Index numbers are used in comparing Base period value #
prices, production, sales, exports or imports over a Note that since an index number is a ratio of a
certain period of time. For example, consumer price index measure taken during one time period (current period)
(CPI) is a commonly quoted index, which measures price to the same measure taken during another time period
fluctuations. The CPI is a single numbers representing the (base period) it has no units of measurement and is always
general level of prices that affects consumers. Similarly, we expressed as a percentage.
have SENSEX (also called BSE 30), a stock market index

Illustration
that reflects current market conditions. If the index number of wholesale prices of food articles in
2012 as compared to 2001 is 160, the implication is that
overall level of wholesale prices of food articles in 2012
is 160% of the level in 2001. Here, 2012 is the current
16.2 Meaning and Definition
year while 2001 is the base year. In other words, there is
An index number is a specialized type of average. An an increase of 160% on an average in the prices of food
average is a single figure representing a group of figures. articles from 2001 to 2012.
Averages are used to compare two or more series as they Index numbers can also be calculated for individual
represent their central tendencies. But there is a great variables. For example, if the price of wheat is ` 40 in
limitation in the use of average. Averages can be used 2012 while it was ` 20 in 2001, the index number of
to compare only those series which are expressed in the the price for year 2012 with respect to the base 2001 is
same units. But the device of index numbers helps us in P = 20
40
# 100 = 200 . That is, the price of wheat in 2012
comparing change in series which are in different units. is 200% of its price in 2001. Here, since only a single
Therefore, index numbers are called specialized type of variable is considered, the index is called ‘relative’. In this
averages. particular case, it is ‘Price relative’.
A Measure of Change Indices may be based at any convenient period and
are published at frequent intervals.
It is a numerical value characterizing the change in
complex economic phenomena over a period of time or Period Index (Example)
space. –Maslow Daily Stock Market Prices (SENSEX)
Monthly Index of Industrial Production (IIP)

In other words, an index number is a statistical Yearly Gross National Product (GNP)
measure designed to show changes in a variable or a Characteristics of Index Number
group of related variables with respect to time. It could
be defined as a relative measure describing the average 1. They are expressed as percentages.
changes in any quantity over time. An index number 2. They are specialised averages.
measures the changing value of price, quantity or values 3. They measure changes that are not directly
chapter 16 Index Number Page 171

measurable. appropriate price index and thus making the series

real.
5. Index numbers act as economic barometers: Just
as barometers indicate the atmospheric pressure,
16.3 Uses of Index Numbers many indices are used to indicate the pressure of the
According to a Simpson and F. Kafka index numbers are economic and business behaviour. They are also used
one of the most widely used statistical tools. They are used to measure ups and downs in the general economic
to feel the pulse of the economy and they have come to condition of a country. For example, SENSEX is
be used as indicators of inflatory or deflatory tendencies: often seen as a leading indicator of India’s economic
Following is a list of users of the index numbers: strength and market sentiment.
1. Index numbers help in establishing trends:
Indexes, when analyzed reveal a general trend of
the phenomenon under study. For example, index
number of industrial production of the country not 16.4 Relative index
only reflects the trends in the phenomenon but are A price relative index is the ratio of the price of a specific
actually useful in determining factors leading to product in one period to the price of the same product in
industrial production. some other period. It is the simplest form of index.
2. Index numbers help in policy making: Index number
help the policy makers in a government or an
organisation in crafting new policies. For example, it EXAMPLE 16.1
is widely known that the dearness allowance, (a major The inflation rate for six months is given in following table.
component of the salary of an employee) is linked to Taking the first month as the base period find inflation
the cost of living index, usually the consumer price index numbers for the remaining five months.
index. Whenever the government of the management
of an organisation announces its wage policy the Month 1 2 3 4 5 6
basis will be the cost of living index. Thus, indices Inflation rate (%) 3.44 4.09 4.07 4.05 3.98 3.97
guide policy making.

Sol :
3. Index numbers help determine the purchasing
power of the rupee: Indices are used to determine
the purchasing power of the rupee. The consumer Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve101
price index for industrial workers-CPI(IW) increased
from 100 in 2001 to 198 in January 2012. The real
purchasing power of the rupee is found out as follows. EXAMPLE 16.2
100 = 0.505 The petrol prices for six months is given in following.
198 Taking the first month as the base period, find petrol
It indicates that if the rupee was worth 100 paise in price index numbers for the remaining five months.
2001 its purchasing power is 50.5 paise in 2012.

Sol :
4. Index numbers help deflate time series data: Indexes
play an important role in adjusting the original data
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve102
to reflect the reality. For example, nominal income
(income at current prices) can be transformed into
real income (reflecting the actual purchasing power)
by using income deflators. Similarly, suppose that the EXAMPLE 16.3
industrial production is represented in value terms The gold prices for six months is given in following table.
(i.e., product of volume of production and price). If Taking the first month as the base period, find gold price
the subsequent yars value industrial production were index numbers for the remaining five months.
to increase by 25%, this increase may not be a result

Sol :
of increase in the volume of production as one would
assume. It could be because of the increase in the
price. This inflation which has caused the increase Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve103
in the series can be eliminated by the usage of an
Page 172 Index Number chapter 16

EXAMPLE 16.4 16.5 Steps in Constructing Index Numbers

Between 2002 and 2006 the price of a commodity increased
The various steps involved in constructing a index number
by 40% while the production of the commodity decreased
are as follows:
by 20%. By what percentage did the value of production
of the commodity change with respect to its value in 2002? 16.5.1 Defining (Stating) the Purpose of the Index


Sol : Number
An index number which is designed keeping specific
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve104 objective in mind is a very powerful tool. Hence, a clear
definition of the purpose will help in selection of the right
index number. The subsequent steps involving the selection
of items, base period, weights, etc., depend mainly on the
EXAMPLE 16.5
purpose. Absence of clear definition of purpose leads often
The price index of cosmetics was 110 in 2001 with base
leads to construction of an unsuitable index number.
as 1995 and 120 in 2002 with 2001 as base. It further
For example, an index whose purpose is to measure
increased by 30% in 2003 in relation to the price index
consumer price index should not include wholesale rates
of 2002 and decreased by 10% in 2004 as compared to its
of items while the index number meant for slum colonies
level in 2003. Find the index for 2004 with 1995 as base.
should not include luxury items like cars air-conditioners,


Sol : etc.

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve105 16.5.2 Selecting the Base Period

Base period, as we have seen earlier in the chapter, is
the time period that serves as a basics for comparison in
the index number. Hence, while constructing the index,
EXAMPLE 16.6
an appropriate base period should be selected. It must
Following table shows the national income at 1990 prices
be kept in mind that this base year must be a normal
(` billion) and price index (1990 base) in years 2000 to
year and an economically stable year. In other words, the
2005.
year should be free of wars, floods, famines, etc., with
Year 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 no abnormal variations. Also, the base year should not
National 400 410 420 440 460 480 be too distant in the past and the consumption patterns
Income during the two periods should not differ much. Note that,
depending on the situation, fixed base index number or
Price Index 105 110 112 120 127 130 chain base index number can be prepared.
Compute the series of national income at current prices:
16.5.3 Selecting the Items


Sol :
The purpose of constructing an index number will usually
help us in selecting the items for it. For example, a
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve106 wholesale price index number requires items which are
transacted at the wholesale market. Similarly, a consumer
price index for a group of people requires items which are
EXAMPLE 16.7 consumed by that particular group of people. The items
The SENSEX for six months is given in following table. for a CPI for another group would differ with the habits,
Talking the first month as the base period, find sensex customs and standard of living. Generally, there are many
index numbers for the remaining five months. items that could be included in the index number. But,


Sol : the list can be reduced by selecting the representative
items only.

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve107 16.5.4 Obtaining Price Quotations

After the items are selected for constructing the index
number, price quotations for these items should be
obtained from authentic sources. If different places or
chapter 16 Index Number Page 173

agencies are involved, then the prices should be averaged. one period to another. If in the above example, we are
interested in the quantum of production of edible oils,
16.5.5 Selecting the Appropriate System of Weight instead of the price of edible oils, then we are comparing
The items considered in constructing index do not always quantities in two different years or over a period of time.
have equal weights. Weights are attached to these items It is the quantity index that needs to be constructed
according to their importance. For example, it is universally here. Index of industrial production (IIP) and index of
argued that wheat is the most important cereal as against agricultural production are some popularly used quantity
other cereals for the North Indians. Hence, highest weight indices.
should be attached to this item while constructing an
index number which includes wheat. 16.6.3 Value Index
Mostly, the weights are quantities in the base The value index is a combination index. It combines
period, current period or any other period. Sometimes, price and quantity changes to present a more spatial
a combination of quantities in different periods may be comparison. Value index numbers as such measure
considered weights. changes in net monetary worth. Usually value index is
used in sales, inventories, foreign trade, etc. Though it
16.5.6 Selecting the Appropriate Formula enables comparison of value of a commodity in a year to
The selection of formula is based mainly as the availability the value of that commodity in a base year, it has limited
of data. Depending on the availability of data regarding use. Its limited use is owing to its inability to distinguish
quantities Laspeyre’s Paasche’s, Fisher’s or any other the effects of price and quantity separately.
index number is calculated (All these index numbers are Export value index and import value index are
introduced in the subsequent sections.) While selecting popular value index numbers.
the formula, care should be taken to see that maximum Remarks: Special purpose index numbers: A few index
use of available data is made. numbers such as consumer price index, industrial
production, etc., are constructed for specific purposes
depending on the nature and degree of relationship
between groups and items.
16.6 Types of Index Numbers


Note
There are three types of principal indexes: 1. Index number for the base year is always 100.
1. Price index 2. Price index is 130 means price level in the current
2. Quantity index year is 130% of the price level in the base year.
3. Value index 3. Index number for 2012 with base 2001 is 275 means
average price level has increased by 175% from 2001
16.6.1 Price Index
to 2012.
The price index is the most frequently used form of index 4. Index number for 2012 with base 2001 is 95 means
numbers. Price index numbers indicate the general level of average price level has increased by 5% from 2001 to
prices of articles in the current period as compared to that 2012.
of the base period. For example, a price index for edible 5. Average price level in 2012 is double the average
oils would compare changes in the price of edible oils. If price level of 2001 means index of prices for 2012
we are trying to compare the price of edible oils this year with base 2001 is 200.
to the prices of edible oils last year, it involves.
(i) a comparison of two price situations over time, and
(ii) the heterogeneity of the edible oils given the various
varieties of oil. 16.7 Notations and Symbols Used in Index
By constructing a price index number, we are summarizing Numbers
the price movements of each type of oil in this group of It is customary to denote the base year by ‘0’ and the
edible oils into a single number. The wholesale price index current year by 1 in index numbers.
(WPI), consumer price index (CPI), and retail price index Thus,
(RPI) are some popularly used price indices. p0 = prices in the base period
q0 = quantities consumed in the base period
16.6.2 Quantity Index
p1 = prices in the current period
A quantity index measures the changes in quantity from
Page 174 Index Number chapter 16

q1 = quantities consumed in the current period To sum up, the methods of constructing of indexes
P01 = Price index number for the current year with respect can be classified into categories as shown below.
to the base year
Q01 = Quantity index number for the current year with
respect to the base year
V01 = Value index number for the current year with
respect to the base year
P = p1 # 100 Price relative
p0

Q = q1 # 100 Quantity relative

q0

W = Weight

16.8 Limitations of Index Numbers

1. Index numbers are based on only few items and not
all items.
2. Index numbers suffer from the limitations of Random
sampling used in selection of items. 16.10 Simple Index Numbers
3. Index numbers generally do not take into account
This is unweighted index numbers. In this index numbers,
changes in the quantity of products.
weights are not assigned to the various items. Two
4. Index numbers suffer from the limitations of the
unweighted index number are discussed below:
method used for their construction. Each method has
its own merits and limitations. No particular method 16.10.1 Simple Aggregative Price Index
is suitable for all circumstances.
5. Index numbers suffer from the selection of abnormal This is the simplest method of constructing an index. An
base period. aggregate price index or composite price index measures
6. Index numbers suffer from the problems of the average price change for a basket of related items from
comparability and reliability. the base period to the current period. When this method
7. International comparisons of index numbers are not is used to construct a price index, the total of the current
possible since the items of index differ from country year prices of the various commodities is divided by the
to country. total of the base year prices and this quotient is multiplied
by 100.
Σp1
i.e., P01 = 100
Σp0 #
16.9 Methods of Constructing Index
Numbers where p0 = prices in the base period
p1 = prices in the current period
There are two approaches for constructing an index
number, namely: Σp0 = Sum of prices of all items in the base year
1. The aggregates method. Σp1 = Sum of prices of all items in the current
2. The average of relatives method. year
Note that the index constructed in either of these P01 = Price index
methods could be: Steps:
(a) An unweighted (Simple) index: An unweighted or
1. Add the current year prices of all the items i.e.,
simple index is an index where equal weights are
obtain Σp1 .
2. Add the base year prices of the items ^Σp0h
assigned implicitly.
(b) A weighted index: A weighted index is an index where
3. Divide Σp1 by Σp0 and multiply the quotient by 100
weights are assigned to the various items according
to get the price index P01 .
to their importance.
chapter 16 Index Number Page 175

Merits and Demerits of Simple Aggregates Method Method when Index Numbers are given for two or more
Merits: years. From the following data, compute index taking 2000-
1. This is the simplest method of constructing index 2002 as the base period by simple aggregative method:
numbers.
Year Price of Rice (` per kg.)
2. This is an intuitively easy method to understand.
Demerits: 2000 20
1. It does not consider the relative importance of the 2001 25
various commodities involved. 2002 30
2. The units used in the price or quantity quotations
2003 45
can exert a big influence on the value of the index.
2004 63

Sol :
EXAMPLE 16.8
From the following data, compute an index for the year
2002 taking 2001 as base by simple aggregative method: Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve110

Commodity 2001 Price (`) 2002 Price (`)

Rice 1 5 EXAMPLE 16.11
Wheat 2 4 The prices of there commodities A, B and C increased
from ` 60, ` 10 and ` 15 in 2008 to ` 75, ` 15 and ` 20
Pulses 3 3 respectively in 2010. Using the simple aggregate method,
Milk 4 2 find by much on an average the prices have increased?

Sol :

Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve108 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve111

EXAMPLE 16.9 EXAMPLE 16.12

From the following data, compute index using simple For the following given data construct an index number
aggregative method: for 2015 taking 2014 as base.
(a) taking 2000 as the base year Commodity Price in 2014 Price in 2015
(b) taking 2003 as the base year
Rice 90 95
Year Price of Rice (` per kg.) Wheat 40 60
2000 20 Pulses 90 110
2001 25 Milk 30 35
2002 30


Sol :
2003 45
2004 63
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve112


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve109 EXAMPLE 16.13

For the following data calculate the price index number
using simple aggregative method using 2016 as base year.

EXAMPLE 16.10 Price (in `)

Computation of Index Numbers by Simple Aggregative Commodity
2016 2018
Page 176 Index Number chapter 16

Rice 30 50 Commodity Base year Current year

Wheat 100 150 Price Quantity Price Quantity
Milk 20 40 Rice 4 15 5 25
Rent 80 100 Pulses 8 20 12 30
Sugar 6 25 8 30


Sol :
Oil 14 10 21 10
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve113

Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve116

EXAMPLE 16.14
Find x if the price index numbers using simple aggregative
method is 160.
EXAMPLE 16.17
Commodity Base Year Price Current Year Price From the following data find the price index number using
Rice 36 60 simple aggregative method using 1995 as base year.

Wheat x 36 Commodity P Q R S T
Milk 12 24 Price (in `) in 1995 15 20 24 22 28
Fuel 48 72 Price (in `) in 2000 27 38 32 40 45

Sol :

Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve114 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve117

EXAMPLE 16.15 EXAMPLE 16.18

From the following data calculate the quantity index Find the price index number using simple aggregative
number using simple aggregative method using 2015 as method using 1995 as base year.
base year
Commodity A B C D E
Quantity (in kg) Price (in `) in 1995 42 30 54 70 120
Commodity 2015 2019 Price (in `) in 2005 60 55 74 110 140
Rice 50 45


Sol :
Wheat 12 15
Milk 16 14
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve118
Fuel 25 24
Rent 18 62
EXAMPLE 16.19


Sol :
From the following data find the price index number using
simple aggregative method using 2005 as base year.
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve115
Vegetable Price ( `) in 2005 Price in (`)2012
Lady Finger 32 38
EXAMPLE 16.16 Capsicum 30 36
From the following data calculate value index number
Brinjal 40 60
using simple aggregative method.
chapter 16 Index Number Page 177

EXAMPLE 16.23
Tomato 40 62
The inflation rate for six months is given in following table.
Potato 16 28 Taking the first month as the base period find inflation
index numbers for the remaining five months.


Sol :


Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve119
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve123

EXAMPLE 16.20
From the following data find the quantity index number EXAMPLE 16.24
using simple aggregative method : The petrol prices for six months is given in following.
Taking the first month as the base period, find petrol
Commodity I II III IV V price index numbers for the remaining five months.
Base Year Quantities 140 120 100 200 225

Sol :
Current Year Quantities 100 80 70 150 185

Sol : Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve124

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve120

EXAMPLE 16.25
The gold prices for six months is given in following table.
Taking the first month as the base period, find gold price
EXAMPLE 16.21 index numbers for the remaining five months.
The following are two sets of retail prices of a typical


Sol :
family’s shopping basket. The data pertain to retail prices
during 2011 and 2012.
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve125
Commodity Unit Price (`)
2011 2012
Milk (1 litre) 40 45 EXAMPLE 16.26
Eggs (1 dozen) 30 40 Find x if the Price Index Number using Simple Aggregate
Method is 200
Butter (1 kg) 150 170
Bread (500 gm) 30 40 Commodity P Q R S T
Calculate the simple aggregate price index for 2012 using Base Year Price 20 12 22 23 13
2011 as the base year. Current Year Price 30 x 38 51 19


Sol :


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve121

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve126

16.10.2 Simple Average of Price Relatives Method

EXAMPLE 16.22 In this method, an average of the price relatives is calculated.
The SENSEX for six months is given in following table. Theoretically, any of the measures of central tendency can
Talking the first month as the base period, find sensex be used to obtain the index. But, conventionally, the price
index numbers for the remaining five months. relatives are averaged either by the arithmetic mean or


Sol : the geometric mean. When arithmetic mean is used for
averaging the relatives, the formula for computing the
index is
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve122
Page 178 Index Number chapter 16

P01 = ΣP (b) average of price relative method.

n
Commodity : A B C D E F
p1
where P = 100
p0 # Price in 2014 (`) : 20 30 10 25 40 50
Price in 2015 (`) : 25 30 15 35 45 55
Merits and Demerits of Simple Average of Price Relatives
Merits :

Sol :
1. Extreme items do not influence the index. Equal
importance is given to all the items.
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve128
2. This index is not influenced by the units of
measurement of prices. Relatives are pure numbers
and are, therefore, independent of the original units.
Consequently, index numbers computed by this EXAMPLE 16.29
method would be the same regardless of the way Construct the consumer price index number for 2019
in which prices are quoted. Thus, simple average of taking 2018 as the base year, and using simple average of
price relatives are said to meet what is called the price relative method, for the following data:
‘units test’. Price (in `)
Demerits : Items
2018 2019
1. While constructing this index number difficulties are
faced with regard to the selection of an appropriate Butter 200 210
average. Arithmetic mean is not always a justified Cheese 160 120
method of averaging as it causes an upward bias. Milk 30 30
The use of geometric mean involves computational
difficulties. Other averages are hardly ever used. Eggs 28 28
2. The relatives are all assigned equal importance when

Sol :
in reality this hardly is the case. Some relatives are
more important than others economically.
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve129

EXAMPLE 16.27
EXAMPLE 16.30
Compute the price index number for the following data
From the following table calculate quantity index numbers
using simple average of price relatives.
for 2015 with quantities in 2013 as base. All quaityt are
Price (`) given in kiligrams.
Commodity
2010 2011 Item A B C D E
L 10 16 Quantity (2013) 12 15 18 20 30
M 20 21 Quantity (2015) 24 30 27 25 30
N 5 6 (i) Using simple aggregative method.
O 2 3 (ii) Using simple average of relatives method applying
arithmetic mean.
P 7 14


Sol :


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve130

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve127

EXAMPLE 16.31
EXAMPLE 16.28 From the data given below construct the price index
Compute a price index for the following by number for the year 1983 taking 1982 as base and using
(a) simple aggregate and simple average of price relatives method..
chapter 16 Index Number Page 179

Commodities Price (`) B 4 12

1982 1983 C 8 6
A 6 10 D 7 7
B 2 2 E 6 3
C 4 6 F 5 4
D 10 12


Sol :
E 8 12

Sol : Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve134

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve131

EXAMPLE 16.35
Compute an index number from the following data by
using simple average of price relatives method.
EXAMPLE 16.32
From the following data, construct an index number for Commodity Prices in 2005 (`) Prices in 2008 (`)
the year 2018 taking 2019 as base by the simple average of A 100 120
relatives method using mean.
B 50 60
Commodities : A B C D E C 30 45
Prices in ` 2018 10 4 15 2 20 D 20 24
Prices in ` 2019 12 5 18 3 22


Sol :


Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve135
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve132

EXAMPLE 16.36
EXAMPLE 16.33 Find price index number by simple average of price
Apply simple average of relatives method to calculate relatives method from the following data:
index number for 2015 from the following data with base
2010. Commodities Wheat Milk Fish Sugar
Base Price 5 8 25 6
Commodities : A B C D E
Current Price 7 10 32 12
Prices in 2015 15 20 10 25 40
Prices in 2010 10 12 5 20 35

Sol :

Sol : Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve136

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve133

EXAMPLE 16.34 E X ERC I S E 16. 1

Construct an index number for the data given below by
using the simple average of price relatives method. 1. From the following data, compute an index for the
year 2012 taking 2012 as base by simple aggregative
Article Prices in 2000 (`) Prices in 2005 (`)
method:
A 5 10
Page 180 Index Number chapter 16

Commodity 2011 Price (`) 2012 Price (`) Commodity Unit Price (`)
P 3 15 2013 2015
Q 6 12 Eggs (1 dozen) 6 8
R 9 9 Butter (1 kg) 27 33
S 12 6 Bread (500 gm) 9 11
Ans : 140 Calculate the simple aggregate price index for 2012
using 2011 as the base year.
Ans : 124

2. From the following data, compute an index for the

year 2015 taking 2014 as base by simple aggregative
method: 5. Find the price index number using simple aggregative
method using 1995 as base year.
Commodity 2014 Price (`) 2015 Price (`)
U 13 16 Commodity A B C D E
Price (in `) in 1995 43 29 55 69 120
V 15 18
Price (in `) in 2005 59 56 76 109 139
W 12 15
Ans : 138.92
X 20 23
Ans : 120

6. From the following data find the quantity index

number using simple aggregative method :
3. From the following data find the price index number
Commodity P Q R S T
using simple aggregative method using 2007 as base
year. Base Year Quantities 144 126 99 207 224
Vegetable Price ( `) Current Year Quantities 106 79 77 152 186
2007 2010 Ans : 75

Lady Finger 16 19
Capsicum 15 18
Brinjal 20 30 7. Construct the consumer price index number for 2015
Tomato 20 31 taking 2013 as the base year, and using simple average
Potato 8 14 of price relative method, for the following data:
Ans : 141.77 Price (in `)
Items
2013 2015
Butter 100 105
Cheese 64 48
4. The following are two sets of retail prices of a typical
Milk 17 17
family’s shopping basket. The data pertain to retail
prices during 2013 and 2015. Eggs 18 18
Commodity Unit Price (`) Ans : 95

2013 2015
Milk (1 litre) 8 10
Bread (500 gm) 9 11 8. From the data given below construct the price index
chapter 16 Index Number Page 181

number for the year 1983 taking 1982 as base and commonly in use.
using simple average of price relatives method. 1. Weighted Aggregate Price Index
Commodities Price (`) 2. Weighted Average of price Relative index

1982 1983
A 18 30
B 6 6 16.12 Weighted Aggregate Price Index
C 12 18
In a weighted aggregate price index, each item in the basket
D 30 36 of items chosen for calculation of the index is assigned a
E 24 36 weight according to its importance. In most cases, the
Ans : 137.34 quantity of usage is the best measure of importance.
Hence, we should obtain a measure of the quantity of
usage for the various items in the group. This explicit
weighting allows us to gather more information than just
the change in price over a period of time as well as improve
9. Compute an index number from the following data by the accuracy of the general price level estimate.
using simple average of price relatives method. Weight is assigned to each item in the basket in
Prices (`) various ways and the weighted aggregates are also used in
different ways to calculate an index. A few methods (or
Commodity 2015 2020
approaches) to determine weights (value) to be assigned
P 85 102 to each item in the basket are as follows:
Q 35 42 1. Laspeyre’s Method
R 42 63 2. Paasche’s Method
3. Dorbish and Bowley’s Method
S 25 30 4. Fisher’s ideal Method
Ans : 12.7 5. Marchall-Edgeworth’s Method
6. Walsch’s Method
7. Kelly’s Method

16.12.1 Laspeyre’s Weighting Method

10. Find price index number by simple average of price
relatives method from the following data: This method suggests to treat quantities as constant at
base period level and are used for weighting price of each
Commodities Wheat Milk Fish Sugar
item or commodities both in base period and current
Base Price 10 12 25 8 period. Since this index number depends upon the same
Current Price 14 15 32 16 base price and quantity, therefore one can directly compare
Ans : 148.25 the index of one period with another. The formula for
calculating Laspeyre’s price index, named after the
statistician Laspeyre’s is given by
Σp1 q0
Laspeyre’s price index P01 (L) = 100
Σp 0 q 0 #

where p1 = prices in the current period

16.11 Weighted Price Indexes p0 = prices in the base period

While constructing weighted price indexes, rational weights q0 = quantities consumed in the base period
are assigned to all items or commodities in an explicit Advantages and Disadvantages of Laspeyre’s Method
manner. Such weights indicate the relative importance of
Advantages :
items or commodities included in the calculation of an
The main advantage of this method is that it uses only
index. The weights used are of two types, quantity weights
one quantity measure based on the base period and
and value weights. There are two price indexes that are
therefore we need not keep record of quantity consumed in
Page 182 Index Number chapter 16

each period. Moreover, having used the same base period Commodity Base year Current year
quantity, we can compare the index of one period with
another directly. Price Quantity Price Quantity
Disadvantages : A 8 20 11 15
We know that the consumption of commodities decreases B 7 10 12 10
with relatively large increases in price and vice versa. Since
C 3 30 5 25
in this index the fixed quantity weights are determined
from the base period usage, it does not adjust such changes D 2 50 4 35
in consumption and therefore tends to result in a bias in


Sol :
the value of the composite price index.

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve139

EXAMPLE 16.37
For the data given in the following table, compute
Laspeyres Price Index. EXAMPLE 16.40
Calculate Laspeyre’s Price index numbers from following
Commodity p0 q0 p1 q1 given data.
A 10 30 12 50
Item Base year Current year
B 8 15 10 25
Price Quantity Price Quantity
C 6 20 6 30
I 10 9 20 8
D 4 10 6 20
II 20 5 30 4


Sol : III 30 7 50 5
IV 40 8 60 6
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve137


Sol :

EXAMPLE 16.38 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve140

Calculate Laspeyre’s Price index numbers from following
given data.
EXAMPLE 16.41
Commodity Base year Current year
Calculate Laspeyre’s Price index numbers from following
Price Quantity Price Quantity given data.
A 20 50 50 45
Commodity Base year Current year
B 50 12 80 15
Price Quantity Price Quantity
C 10 16 25 14
I 10 12 20 9
D 30 25 45 24
II 20 4 25 8
E 40 18 60 62
III 30 13 40 27


Sol : IV 60 29 75 36

Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve138

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve141

EXAMPLE 16.39
Calculate Laspeyre’s Price index numbers from following
given data.
chapter 16 Index Number Page 183

EXAMPLE 16.42 In the Paasche’s method, the price of each item or

From the following data, compute Laspeyre’s price index commodity is weighted by the quantity in the current
number for the current year. period instead of the base year as used in Laspeyre’s
method. Paasche’s formula for calculating the index is
Commodity Base year Current year
given by
Price Quantity Price Quantity Σp1 q1
Paasche price index P01 (P) =
A 1 6 5 8 Σp0 q1
B 2 7 4 7 where p1 = prices in current year
C 3 8 3 6 p0 = prices in base year
D 4 9 2 5 q1 = quantities in current year
Advantages and Disadvantages of the Paasche’s Method


Sol :
Advantages :
The Paasche’s method combines the effects of changes
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve142
in price and quantity consumption patterns during the
current year. It provides a better estimate of changes in
the economy than Laspeyre’s method. If the prices or
EXAMPLE 16.43 quantities of all commodities or items change in the same
Construct price index number from the following data by ratio, then the values of the Laspeyre’s and Paasche’s
using Laspeyre’s method. indexes will be same.
Disadvantages :
Commodity Base year Current year This method requires knowledge of the quantities
Price Quantity Price Quantity consumed of all commodities in each period. Getting the
A 4 40 2 60 data on the quantities for each period is either expensive
or time-consuming. Moreover, each year the index number
B 2 50 5 100
for the previous year requires recomputation to reflect the
C 3 10 4 40 effect of the new quantity weights. Thus, it is difficult to
D 1 30 3 50 compare indexes of different periods when calculated by
the Paasche’s method.


Sol : Comparison of Laspeyre’s And Paasche’s Methods

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve143 S.No. Basis of L as p e y r e ’ s P aas c h e ’ s

Comparison Method Method
1. Weights Weights are Weights are
EXAMPLE 16.44 the base year the current
Construct Laspeyre’s index numbers for 2019 using 2018 quantities. year quantities.
being the base year : 2. Change in Weights do not Weights
weights change from change from
Article 2018 2019
one period to one period to
Price Quantity Price Quantity another period. another period
A 2 6 3 5 since new
weights for
B 3 7 4 6
each period are
C 4 10 5 12 considered.


Sol : 3. In case of In case of In case of
rising prices rising prices, it rising prices, it
overestimates underestimates
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve144
the rise in the rise in
16.12.2 Paasche’s Weighting Method prices. prices.
Page 184 Index Number chapter 16

4. Comparison The Indices The indices for Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve146

for different different years
years can be can not be
compared with compared with EXAMPLE 16.47
each other each other Construct price index number from the data given below
since weights since weights by using Paasche’s method.
are the same are not the
base year same. Commodity 2006 2008
weights. Price Quantity Price Quantity
5. Consumption It does not It takes into A 10 5 10 15
pattern take into consideration B 4 20 5 40
consideration the
the consumption C 2 30 7 30
consumption pattern. D 5 15 12 10
pattern.


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve147

EXAMPLE 16.45
From the following data, compute Paasche’s price index
number for the current year. Price is given in ` and
quantity is given in kg. EXAMPLE 16.48
Using the figures of the previous illustration, construct the
Item Base year Current year index numbers for 2019 taking 2018 as base by Paasche’s
Price Quantity Price Quantity method. Price is given in ` and quantity is given in kg.

A 1 6 5 8 2018 2019
B 2 7 4 7 Item Price Quantity Price Quantity
C 3 8 3 6 A 2 6 3 5
D 4 9 2 5 B 3 7 4 6

Sol : C 4 10 5 12

Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve145
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve148

EXAMPLE 16.46
For the following data, calculate the price index number
EXAMPLE 16.49
of 2009 with 2008 as the base year, using: (a) Laspeyre’s
Find x in the following table if Laspeyre’s and Paasche’s
method, and (b) Paasche’s method.
Price Index Numbers are equal.
Commodity 2008 2009
Item Base year Current year
Price Quantity Price Quantity
Price Quantity Price Quantity
A 20 8 40 6
A 2 10 2 5
B 50 10 60 5
B 2 5 x 2
C 40 15 50 15


Sol :
D 20 20 20 25

Sol : Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve149

chapter 16 Index Number Page 185

EXAMPLE 16.50 EXAMPLE 16.53

In the following table p and q represent price and quantity In the following table p and q represent price and quantity
respectively and subscript for the time period. respectively and subscript for the time period.

Commodity p0 q0 p1 q1 Commodity p0 q0 p1 q1
A 1 10 2 5 A 1 10 2 5
B 1 5 x 2 B 1 5 x 2
Find x if the ratio between Laspeyres L and Paasche’s P Find x if the ratio between Laspeyres L and Paasche’s P
index numbers is L : P = 28 : 27 index numbers is L : P = 28 : 27


Sol :

Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve150 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve153

16.12.3 Fisher’s Ideal Method

EXAMPLE 16.51 This method (or approach) is the geometric mean of the
Find x if Paasche’s Price Index Number is 140 for the Laspeyre’s and Paasche’s indexes and the formula in given
following data. by
Σp1 q0 Σp1 q1
Fisher’s ideal price index = 100
Commodity Base year Current year Σp0 q0 # Σp0 q1 #
Price Quantity Price Quantity
Advantages and Disadvantages of Fisher’s Method
A 20 8 40 7
Advantages :
B 50 10 60 10 Fisher’s method is also called ideal method due to
C 40 15 60 x following reasons :
1. The formula is based on geometric mean which is
D 12 15 15 15
considered to be the best average for constructing


Sol : index numbers.
2. The formula takes into account both base year and
current year quantities as weights. Thus it avoids the
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve151
bias associated with the Laspeyre’s and Paasche’s
indexes.
3. This method satisfies essential tests required for a
EXAMPLE 16.52 index, that is, time reversal test and factor reversal
Calculate Laspeyre’s and Paasche’s Price Index Number test.
for the following data. Disadvantages :
The calculation of index using this method requires
Commodity Base year Current year more computation time. Although the index number is
Price Quantity Price Quantity theoretically better than others discussed previously, it is
A 20 18 30 15 not fit for common use because it requires current quantity
weights every time an index is calculated.
B 25 8 28 5
C 32 5 40 7
D 12 10 18 10 EXAMPLE 16.54
Compute index number from the following data using


Sol :
Fisher’s ideal index formula.

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve152

Page 186 Index Number chapter 16

Item 2014 2015 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve156

Price Quantity Price Quantity 16.12.4 Doorbish and Bowley’s Index

A 12 10 15 12 Dorbish and Bowley Price Index is a weighted price index
B 15 7 20 5 which is the arithmetic mean of the Laspeyres and Paasche
price indices. It is given by the formula
C 24 5 20 9
D 5 16 5 14 P01 = L + P
2


Sol : where L = Laspeyres index
P = Paasche index
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve154 Σp1 q0 Σp1 q1
+
Σp0 q0 Σp0 q1
or P01 = # 100
2

EXAMPLE 16.55
Calculate from the following data, the Fisher’s ideal index
number for the year 2015.
EXAMPLE 16.57
Item 2014 2015 Given that Laspeyre’s and Paasche’s Index Number are 25
Price Expenditure Price Expenditure and 16 respectively. Find Dorbish-Bowley’s and Fisher’s
on Quantity on Quantity Price Index Number.
Consumed Consumed

Sol :
A 8 200 65 1950
B 20 1400 30 1650 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve157
C 5 80 20 900
D 10 360 15 300
EXAMPLE 16.58
E 27 2160 10 600
If Laspeyre’s and Dorbish Price Index Number are 150.2


Sol : and 152.8 respectively, find Paasche’s Price Index Number.


Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve155
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve158

EXAMPLE 16.56
From the following data, construct Fisher’s Index Number EXAMPLE 16.59
: Here Price is per unit in ` and expenditure is in also ` Given that Σp1 q1 = 250 , Σp0 q0 = 150 , Paasche’s index
number = 150 and Dorbish-Bowley’s index number = 145
Item Base year Current year
. Find Fisher’s Index number.
Price Total Price Total


Sol :
per unit Expenditure per unit Expenditure
P 2 40 5 75
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve159
Q 4 16 8 40
R 1 10 2 24
S 5 25 10 60 EXAMPLE 16.60
From the following information, calculate Laspeyre’s


Sol :
index number and Paasche’s index number. Fisher’s index
number 160, Dorbish-Bowley’s index number 164,
chapter 16 Index Number Page 187

Sol : Factor reversal test requires that the product of the

index number of prices (with quantities as weights) and the
index number of quantity (with prices as weights) should
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve160
indicate net change in value taking place in between the
16.12.5 Tests of Adequacy of Index Numbers two periods.
Symbolically
Among the various index number formulae, it is difficult
Σp1 q1
to select the most appropriate one. Various adequacy tests P01 # Q01 =
Σp0 q0
have been suggested. A few of them are:
1. Unit test where P01 and Q01 are price and quantity index
2. Time reversal test (TRT) numbers. Note that here P01 and Q01 are mere ratio-they
3. Factor reversal test (FRT) should not be expressed as percentages.
4. Circular test Fisher’s ideal index number formula is the only one
to satisfy this test.
1. Unit Test
4. Circular Test
The unit test requires that the formula for construction an
index should be independent of the units in which prices This test is an extension of the time reversal test. The
and quantities are quoted. All index number formulae test requires that if an index is constructed for the year ‘
except the simple aggregative index satisfy this test. a ’ with base year ‘b ’ and for the year ‘b ’ with base year ‘
c ’, we ought to get the same result
2. Time Reversal Test (TRT) Symbolically
According to Prof. Irving Fisher, who proposed this test, P01 # P12 = P02
an index number should be such that when the base
year and current year are reversed (inter changed), the or P01 # P12 # P20 = 1 (notice that P20 = 1 )
P02
resulting index number should be reciprocal of the original
where P01 , P12 , P02 and P20 are price indices with
index number.
three periods 0, 1 and 2.
The time reversal test requires that the index
Index number formulae that satisfy the circularity test
number computed backwards should be the reciprocal
are:
of the index number computed forwards, except for the
(i) Simple aggregative index number
constant of proportionality.
(ii) Fixed weight aggregative index number.
Symbolically,
P0n # Pn0 = 1
where, P0n = Index number for period n with base
EXAMPLE 16.61
period 0. Show that
Pn0 = Index number for period 0 with base (i) Laspeyre’s index number does not satisfy time
period n . reversal test.
The following five index number formulae satisfy time (ii) Paasche’s index number does not satisfy factor
reversal test: reversal test.
(a) The Fisher’s ideal index number (iii) Fisher’s index number satisfies time reversal test.
(b) Simple geometric mean of place relatives

Sol :
(c) Aggregative indices with fixed weights
(d) The weighted geometric mean of price relatives if we
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve161
use fixed weights
(e) Marshall-Edgeworth index formula.
3. Factor Reversal Test (FRT)
According to this test, also proposed by Prof. Irving
Fisher, the index number formula should be such that E X ERC I S E 16. 2
the price index and quantity index computed accordingly
to the formula should be equally effective in indicating 1. For the data given in the following table, compute
changes. Laspeyres Price Index.
Page 188 Index Number chapter 16

Commodity p0 q0 p1 q1 D 8 9 4 5
A 5 30 6 50 Ans : 160
B 4 15 5 25
C 3 20 3 30
D 2 10 3 20 5. For the following data, calculate the price index
Ans : 118.97 number of 2009 with 2008 as the base year, using:
(i) Laspeyre’s method
(ii) Paasche’s method
Commodity 2008 2009
2. Calculate Laspeyre’s Price index numbers from
Price Quantity Price Quantity
following given data.
A 4 8 8 6
Commodity Base year Current year
B 10 10 12 5
Price Quantity Price Quantity
C 8 15 10 15
A 4 50 10 45
D 4 20 4 25
B 10 12 16 15
Ans : (i) 124.7 (ii) 121.77
C 2 16 5 14
D 6 25 9 24
E 8 18 12 62
Ans : 187.77 6. In the following table p and q represent price and
quantity respectively and subscript for the time
period.
Commodity p0 q0 p1 q1
3. Calculate Laspeyre’s Price index numbers from A 3 50 6 25
following given data.
B 3 25 x 10
Commodity Base year Current year Find x if the ratio between Laspeyres L and Paasche’s
Price Quantity Price Quantity P index numbers is L : P = 28 : 27
Ans : 12
A 8 5 11 3
B 7 2 12 2
C 3 6 5 5
D 2 10 4 7 7. Find x if Paasche’s Price Index Number is 140 for the
Ans : 164.29 following data.
Commodity Base year Current year
Price Quantity Price Quantity
P 20 16 40 14
4. From the following data, compute Paasche’s price
index number for the current year. Price is given in ` Q 50 20 60 20
and quantity is given in kg. R 40 30 60 x
Item Base year Current year S 12 30 15 30
Price Quantity Price Quantity Ans : 21.5
A 2 6 10 8
B 4 7 8 7
C 6 8 6 6
8. Compute index number from the following data using
chapter 16 Index Number Page 189

Fisher’s ideal index formula.

Remarks :
Item 2014 2015
1. The weights generally used are the values of the
Price Quantity Price Quantity items at the base year
P 12 20 15 20 w = p0 q0
Q 15 14 20 10 2. Sometimes current year values are also used as
weights. In such cases
R 24 10 20 18
w = p1 q1
S 5 32 5 28
3. Note that when base year values are used as weights
Ans : 115.76 to calculate the weighted arithmetic mean of price
relatives, the result is identical to the index number
as calculated by Laspeyre’s formula.

9. From the following data, construct Fisher’s Index

Number : Here Price is per unit in ` and expenditure EXAMPLE 16.62
is in also ` From the following data compute price index by the
Item Base year Current year weighted average of relative price.
Price Total Price Total
Price (`)
per unit Expenditure per unit Expenditure Commodity Quantity
Base Year Current Year
P 4 40 10 75
Sugar 3.00 4.00 20 kg
Q 8 16 16 40
Flour 1.50 1.60 40 kg
R 2 10 4 24
Milk 1.00 1.50 10 lt
S 10 25 20 60
Ans : 219.12

Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve162

10. Given that Laspeyre’s and Paasche’s Index Number

are 36 and 64 respectively. Find Dorbish-Bowley’s and EXAMPLE 16.63
Fisher’s Price Index Number. A large manufacturer purchases a particular component
Ans : 50 and 48 from three different vendors that differ in unit price and
quantity supplied. The relevant data for 2009 and 2010
are given below:

Supplier Quantity in 2009 Unit Prices (`)

2009 2010
16.13 Weighted Average of Price Relatives
A 10 15 16
In this method, appropriate weights (w ), are assigned
B 40 12 14
to various terms and a weighted average of the price
relatives is calculated. As earlier, either arithmetic mean C 20 18 20
or geometric mean is used for averaging to obtain the Calculate the weighted average of price relative index.
index.


Sol :
When arithmetic mean is used for averaging, the
weighted average of price relative is
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve163
P01 = ΣwP
Σw
p1
where P = 100 is the price relative.
p0 #
Page 190 Index Number chapter 16

EXAMPLE 16.64 3. Calculate the weighted aggregative price index for

Calculate the weighted aggregative price index for 2008 2008 from the following data:
from the following data:
Item Price in 2000 Price in 2008 Weights
Item Price in 2000 Price in 2008 Weights P 20 25 10
A 20 25 5 Q 10 12 2
B 10 12 1 R 12 18 6
C 12 18 3 S 16 16 12
D 16 16 6 T 5 4 8
E 5 4 4 U 13 10 6
F 13 10 3 Ans : 110.63

Sol :
4. From the following data compute price index by the
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve164 weighted average of relative price.:
Item Year 2009 Year 2010
Quantity Prices Prices
P 21 45 32

E X ERC I S E 16.3 Q 84 36 28
R 21 36 40
1. From the following data compute price index by the Calculate the weighted average of price relative index.
weighted average of relative price. Ans : 113.13
Price (`)
Commodity Quantity
Base Year Current Year
Sugar 30 40 24 kg
5. From the following data compute price index by the
Flour 15 16 48 kg weighted average of relative price.
Milk 10 15 12 lt Group Base Year Current Year
Ans : 122.3077 Price
Price Quantity
P 48 30 54
2. A large manufacturer purchases a particular Q 36 20 42
component from three different vendors that differ in R 24 34 50
unit price and quantity supplied. The relevant data
S 72 44 84
for 2009 and 2010 are given below:
T 84 50 96
Supplier Quantity in 2009 Unit Prices (`)
Ans : 115.78
2009 2010
P 13 30 32
Q 52 24 28
R 26 36 40
Calculate the weighted average of price relative index.
Ans : 113.13 16.14 Consumer Price Index
The consumer price index, also known as the cost of living
index or retail price index, is constructed to measure the
amount of money which consumers of a particular class
chapter 16 Index Number Page 191

have to pay to get a basket of goods and services at a The CPI is a weighted aggregate price index with fixed
particular point of time in comparison to what they the weights. The need for weighting arises because the
paid for the same in the base year. relative importance of various commodities or items for
The need for constructing consumer price indexes different classes of people is not the same. The percentage
arises because the general indexes do not highlight the of expenditure on different commodities by an average
effects of rise or fall in prices of various commodities family constitutes the individual weights assigned to
consumed by different classes of people on their cost the corresponding price relatives, and the percentage
of living. Moreover, different classes of people consume expenditure on five well-accepted groups of commodities
different types of commodities and even the same type of namely: (i) food, (ii) clothing, (iii) fuel and lighting, (iv)
commodities are not consumed in the same proportion by house rent, (v) miscellaneous.
different classes of people. To study the effect of rise or The weight applied to each commodity in the
fall in prices of different types of commodities, the Cost of market basket is derived from a usage survey of families
Living Index (CLI) are constructed separately for different throughout the country. The consumer price index or cost
classes of people. of living index numbers are constructed by the following
The problem in constructing consumer price indexes two methods:
arise because variations in prices of commodities have to
be studied from the point of view of consumers living in 16.14.3 Aggregate Expenditure Method or Weighted
different regions or places. Since retail prices in different Aggregate Method
places differ and the pattern of consumption is also not This method is similar to the Laspeyre’s method of
identical at different places, therefore people living in constructing a weighted index. To apply this method,
different regions, pay different prices to purchase various the quantities of various commodities consumed by a
commodities. Moreover, the relative importance of various particular class of people are assigned weights on the basis
commodities to all people is not identical. Therefore we of quantities consumed in the base year. Mathematically
cannot construct one CLI for the whole country. it is stated as

16.14.1 Uses of Consumer Price Index (CPI) Number Consumer price index
Total expenditure in current period
= 100
The importance of the CPI can be seen from the following Total expenditure in base period #
:
1. The CPI are used to formulate economic policy, Σp1 q0
=
100
escalate income payments, and measure real earnings. Σp 0 q 0 #
2. The CPI are used to measure purchasing power of where p1 and p0 = prices in the current period and base
the consumer in rupees. The purchasing power of
period, respectively
the rupee is the value of a rupee in a given years
compared to a base year. The formula for calculating q0 = quantities consumed in the base period
the purchasing power of the rupee is
Purchasing power = 1 100
Consumer price index # EXAMPLE 16.65
3. When a time series is concerned with such rupee From the following data construct cost of living index
values as retail sales amounts or wage rates, the price (CLI) numbers.
index is most frequently used to achieve deflation
Commodity Base Year Current Year
of such time-series. The process of deflating can be
expressed in the form of a formula as Price Quantity Price
Money value Rice (kg) 50 12 65
Real wage = 100
Consumer price index #
Sugar (kg) 40 15 45
4. The CPI is used in wage negotiations and wage Wheat (kg) 45 5 50
contracts. Automatic adjustment of wages or the
dearness allowance component of the wages is done Milk (lit) 50 8 52
on the basis of the consumer price index. Oil (lit) 85 4 100
Pulse (kg) 65 6 80
16.14.2 Construction of a Consumer Price Index
Page 192 Index Number chapter 16

Sol : following table :

Group Base Year Current Year

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve165 Price
Price Quantity
Food 40 15 45
EXAMPLE 16.66 Clothing 30 10 35
From the following data, compute consumer price index Fuel and Lighting 20 17 25
number for the current year using Aggregate Expenditure
House Rent 60 22 70
Method :
Miscellaneous 70 25 80
Commodity Base Year Current Year


Sol :
Price Quantity Price Quantity
A 1 6 5 8
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve168
B 2 7 4 7
C 3 8 3 6
D 4 9 2 5 EXAMPLE 16.69
Lenna was getting a salary of ` 10000 in the base period, Calculate the cost of living index in for the data given in
what should be her salary in the current period if her following table :
standard of living is to remain the same ? If she is getting Group Base Year Current Year
a salary of ` 11000 in the current year, how much she Price
ought to have received an extra allowance to maintain her Price Quantity
former standard of living ? Food 132 10 170


Sol : Clothing 154 12 160
Fuel and Lighting 164 20 180
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve166 House Rent 175 18 195
Miscellaneous 128 5 120

EXAMPLE 16.67

Sol :

Calculate the cost of living index in for the data given in
following table : Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve169

Group Base Year Current Year 16.14.4 Weighted Average of Price Relative Method
Price Quantity Price or Family Budget Method
Food 120 15 170 To apply this method the family budget of a large number
Clothing 150 20 190 of people, for whom the index is meant, are carefully
studied. Then the aggregate expenditure of an average
Fuel and Lighting 130 30 220
family on various commodities is estimated. These values
House Rent 160 10 180 constitute the weights. Mathematically, consumer price
Miscellaneous 200 12 200 index is stated as

Sol : Consumer price index = ΣPV # 100

ΣV
p1
where P = Price relatives, 100
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve167 p0 #

V = Value weight, p0 q0

EXAMPLE 16.68
Calculate the cost of living index in for the data given in
chapter 16 Index Number Page 193

EXAMPLE 16.70
Commodity 2001 2001 2002
Calculate the index number using
Price Quantity Price
(i) Aggregate expenditure method, and
(ii) Family budget method for the year 2000 with 1995 as A 1 6 5
the base year from the following data: B 2 7 4

Item Quantity (in Price (in </ Price (in </ C 3 8 3

Units) 2005 Unit) 2005 Unit) 2010 D 4 9 2
A 100 8.00 12.00


Sol :
B 25 6.00 7.50
C 10 5.00 5.25 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve172
D 20 48.00 52.00
E 25 15.00 16.50
F 30 9.00 27.00 EXAMPLE 16.73
Base year weights (W ) and current year price relatives (I


Sol : ) are given in following table. Calculate the cost of living
index.
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve170 Group I W
Food 70 5
Clothing 90 3
EXAMPLE 16.71
Consider the following table for calculation of cost of Fuel and Lighting 100 2
living index. House Rent 60 4

Price Miscellaneous 80 6
Group Weight
2015 2019

Sol :
Food 10 24 60
Clothing 32 60 05 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve173
Fuel 20 50 10
Rent 40 120 15
EXAMPLE 16.74
Miscellaneous 36 72 10 In the following table base year weights (W ) and current
(i) Find cost of living index (CLI) number by family year price relatives (I ) are given. Calculate the cost of
budget method. living index.
(ii) If the expenditure in 2015 is ` 15000, find expenditure
in 2019. Group I W
Food 400 3


Sol :
Clothing 300 3
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve171 Fuel and Lighting 150 4
House Rent 120 5
Miscellaneous 100 2
EXAMPLE 16.72
From the following data compute Consumer Price Index

Sol :
for the year 2002 taking 2001 as base using Family Budget
Method Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve174
Page 194 Index Number chapter 16

EXAMPLE 16.75 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve177

Base year weights (W ) and current year price relatives (I
) are given in following table. Calculate the cost of living
index.
EXAMPLE 16.78
Group I W Prepare Consumer Price Index Number from the following
data for 2004 and 2005 taking 2003 as base:
Food 200 30
Clothing 150 20 Group 2003 2004 2005
Fuel and Lighting 120 10 A 20 24 21
House Rent 180 40 B 1.25 1.50 1
Miscellaneous 160 50 C 5 8 8
D 2 2.25 2.12


Sol :
Give weights to the four groups as 6, 4, 3 and 2 respectively
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve175

Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve178

EXAMPLE 16.76
Base year weights (W ) and current year price relatives (I
) are given in following table. Fins the value of y . EXAMPLE 16.79
Compute the general price index given the following items
Group I W
of information:
Food 180 4
Group of items Average Group Price
Clothing 120 5
Expenditure per Index
Fuel and Lighting 300 6 household per
House Rent 100 x month (`)
Miscellaneous 160 3 Food 300 190
Fuel and light 100 118


Sol :
House 150 140
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve176 Clothing 125 181
Miscellaneous 75 101

Sol :
EXAMPLE 16.77
Base year weights (W ) and current year price relatives (I
) are given in following table. Find y if the cost of living Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve179
index is 200

Group I W
EXAMPLE 16.80
Food 180 4 Following information relating to works in an industrial
Clothing 120 5 town is given:
Fuel and Lighting 160 3 Items of Item Index Proportion of
House Rent 300 y Consumption in 2005 expenditure on item
Miscellaneous 200 2 Food, drink and 132 60%
tobacco


Sol :
Clothing 154 12%
chapter 16 Index Number Page 195

EXAMPLE 16.83
Items of Item Index Proportion of
Mukesh Agrawal works as accountant in privet company
Consumption in 2005 expenditure on item
at Delhi and earn ` 35000 per month . The cost of living
Fuel and lighting 147 16% index for a particular month is given as 136. Using the
Housing 178 8% following information, find out the amount of money he
Miscellaneous 158 4% spent on house rent and clothing:

Consumer price index in 2000 is considered as 100. Average Group Expenditure Group Index
wages per month in 2000 is ` 2000. Food 14000 180
(i) What should be the dearness allowance expressed as
Clothing ? 150
percentage of wages?
(ii) What should be the average wages per worker per House Rent ? 100
month in 2005 in that town so that the standard of Fuel and Lighting 5600 110
living of the workers does not fall below the 2000
Miscellaneous 6300 80
level?


Sol :

Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve180 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve183

EXAMPLE 16.81 EXAMPLE 16.84

In calculating a certain cost of living index number, the Owing to change in prices the consumer price index of
following weights were used: Food 15, clothing 3, rent 4, the working class in a certain area rose in a month by
fuel and light 2, miscellaneous 1. one quarter of what it was prior to 225. The index of
(i) Calculate the index for a data when the average food became 252 from 198, that of clothing from 185 to
percentage increases in price of items in the various 205, of fuel and lighting form 175 to 195, and that of
groups over the base period were 32, 54, 47, 78 and miscellaneous from 138 to 212. The index of rent, however,
58 respectively. remained unchanged at 150. It was known that the weight
(ii) Lavanya was earning ` 20000 in the base period, of clothing, rent and fuel, and lighting were the same.
what should be her salary in the current period if her Find out the exact weight of all the groups.
standard of living is to remain the same?

Sol :


Sol :
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve184
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve181

EXAMPLE 16.85
EXAMPLE 16.82 Ramkaran works as textile worker in Ahemdabad and
In 2004 for working class people wheat was selling at an earns ` 7500 p.m. The cost of living index for January,
average price of ` 32 per 10 kg., cloth of ` 4 per metre, 2016 is given as 160. Using the following data find out the
house rent ` 60 per house and other items at ` 20 per amounts he spends on (i) Food, and (ii) Rent.
unit. By 2005 cost of wheat rose by ` 8 per 10 per kg.,
Group Expenditure (`) Group Index
house rent by ` 30 per house and other items doubled in
price. The working class cost of living index for the year Food ? 190
2005 (with 2004 as base) was 160. By how much the cloth Clothing 1250 181
rose in price during the period?
Rent ? 140


Sol : Fuel and Lighting 1000 118
Miscellaneous 750 101
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve182
Page 196 Index Number chapter 16

Sol : rent. Find the rise in food, fuel, rent and miscellaneous
groups.
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve185

Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve188

EXAMPLE 16.86
Calculate cost of living index (CLI) number from the
following data. EXAMPLE 16.89
Group Item Group Index Weight The consumer price index over a certain period increases
from 120 to 215 and the wages of a worker increases from
Food 350 50 ` 8800 to ` 12000. What is the gain or loss to the worker?
Rent 200 18


Sol :
Clothing 220 10
Fuel and Electricity 250 8 Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve189
Miscellaneous 280 14

Sol :
EXAMPLE 16.90
Weekly take-home pay (wages) of labour and consumer
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve186 price index for respective years are shown in following
table.

Year Weekly take-home Consumer price

EXAMPLE 16.87
pay (wages) ` Index
From the following table find x if CLI is 215.
2000 10950 112.8
Group Item A B C D E
2001 11220 118.2
Group Index 254 174 160 x 211
2002 11640 127.4
Weight 45 15 12 18 8
2003 12508 138.2


Sol : 2004 13540 143.5
2005 13810 149.8
Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve187 (i) What was the real average weekly wage for each
year?
(ii) In which year did the employees have the greatest
EXAMPLE 16.88 buying power?
In a working class consumer price index of a particular (iii) What percentage increase in the weekly wages for
town, the weights according to different group of items the year 2005 is required (if any) to provide the same
were as follows buying power that the employees enjoyed in the year
in which they had the highest real wages.
Food Fuel Clothing Rent Misc.


Sol :
55 15 10 12 8
One mill compensated for the rise in the prices of food Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve190
and rent but did not compensate for anything else and
fixes dearness allowance at 182%. Another mill of the
same town paid dearness allowance of 46.5 per cent which
compensated for the rise in fuel and miscellaneous groups. EXAMPLE 16.91
It is known that the rise in food is double the rise in fuel During a certain period the cost of living index number
and the rise in miscellaneous groups is double the rise in goes up from 110 to 200 and the salary of the worker is
also raised from ` 325 to ` 500. Does the worker really
chapter 16 Index Number Page 197

gain, and if so, by how much in real terms?

Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve191

EXAMPLE 16.92
Ramu earned ` 9000 per month in 2000. The cost of
living index increased by 70% between 2000 and 2003.
How much extra income should the worker have earned in
2003 so that he could buy the same quantities as in 2000?


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve192

EXAMPLE 16.93
Cost of living index in 2015 is 200 and same in 2018 is
250. If a person monthly income is ` 11000 in 2015 what
should be his income in 2018 in order to maintain the
same standard of living?


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve193

EXAMPLE 16.94
The cost of living index number for year 1995 and 1999
are 140 and 200 respectively. A person earns ` 11200 per
month in the year 1995. What should be his monthly
earning in the year 1999 in order to maintain his standard
of living as in the year 1995?


Sol :

Solution Link : www.cbse.wiki/lema/ve194